1. 觉悟品显示巴利原文
1. Bodhivaggo
1. 第一觉悟经注显示巴利原文
1. Paṭhamabodhisuttavaṇṇanā
1 在这里,「如是我闻」等是缘起(nidāna),其中「如是(evaṃ)」是不变词(nipātapada)。「我(me)」等是名词(nāmapadāni)。「住于优楼频螺(Uruvelāyaṃ viharati)」一句中,「住(viharati)」的「于(vi)」是前缀词(upasaggapada),「住(harati)」是动词(ākhyātapada)。应依照这样的方式,理解所有地方的词类分别。显示巴利原文
1. Yaṃ panettha ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādikaṃ nidānaṃ, tattha evanti nipātapadaṃ. Metiādīni nāmapadāni. Uruvelāyaṃ viharatīti ettha vīti upasaggapadaṃ, haratīti ākhyātapadanti imināva nayena sabbattha padavibhāgo veditabbo.
然而,从义理上来说,「如是(evaṃ)」一词有多种含义,比如比喻(upamā)、教导(upadesa)、随喜(sampahaṃsana)、呵责(garahaṇa)、领受语(vacanasampaṭiggaha)、行相(ākāra)、示例(nidassana)、确定(avadhāraṇa)、询问(pucchā),以及表示「此(idaṃ)」词的意义和限量(parimāṇa)等。例如,它在下面这些经文中是比喻义:「如是生而为人,应做众多善事(evaṃ jātena maccena, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahu)」(《法句经》53等)。在「应这样前进,应这样后退(Evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabbaṃ)」(《增支部》4.122等)中,是教导义。在「正是这样,世尊!正是这样,善逝!(Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā)」(《增支部》3.66等)中,是随喜义。在「这个贱民女子就是这样在任何场合下都称赞那个秃头沙门的容貌(Evamevaṃ panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī)」(《相应部》1.187等)中,是呵责义。在「‘是的,尊者!’那些比丘回答世尊说(Evaṃ, bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ)」(《长部》2.3;《中部》1.1等)中,是领受语义。在「尊者!我是这样理解世尊所宣说的法(Evaṃ byā kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī)」(《中部》1.398等)中,是行相义。在「‘来,年轻人,前往沙门阿难那里;去后,以我之言,询问沙门阿难是否无病、无恙、起居轻利、气力充沛、安住轻利:“年轻人须婆-多德亚之子询问尊者阿难是否无病、无恙、起居轻利、气力充沛、安住轻利。”并这样说:“愿尊者阿难出于慈悯,前往年轻人须婆-多德亚之子的住所。”(Ehi tvaṃ, māṇavaka, yena samaṇo ānando tenupasaṅkama, upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ puccha 'subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhavantaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ pucchatī'ti, evañca vadehi 'sādhu kira bhavaṃ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṃ, tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṃ upādāyā'ti)」(《长部》1.445等)中,是示例义。在「‘迦罗摩们!你们如何认为?这些法是善还是不善?’‘尊者!是不善。’‘是有罪过还是无过失?’‘尊者!是有罪过。’‘是受智者呵责还是受智者称赞?’‘尊者!是受智者呵责。’‘若圆满执取,是否导致无益与痛苦?在这里,你们如何认为?’‘尊者!若圆满执取,会导致无益与痛苦。在这里,我们是这么认为的。’('Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, kālāmā, ime dhammā kusalā vā akusalā vā'ti? 'Akusalā, bhante'. 'Sāvajjā vā anavajjā vā'ti? 'Sāvajjā, bhante'. 'Viññūgarahitā vā viññuppasatthā vā'ti? 'Viññūgarahitā, bhante'. 'Samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, no'vā? 'Kathaṃ vo ettha hotī'ti? 'Samattā, bhante, samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ no ettha hotī'ti)」(《增支部》3.66等)中,是确定义。在「这些善沐浴、善涂香,须发修剪整齐,佩戴花环装饰的人(Evamete sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassū āmuttamālābharaṇā)」(《长部》1.286等)中,是询问义。在「如是种种各种技艺行业(Evaṃgatāni puthusippāyatanāni)」(《长部》1.182),以及「这样的种类、这样的行相」等处,表示「此(idaṃ)」词的意义。因为「已去(gata)」这个词是「方式(pakāra)」的同义词,同样,「种类(vidha)」、「行相(ākāra)」等词也是如此。事实上,世间人在使用「种类(vidha)」、「相应(yutta)」、「已去(gata)」这些词时,都是用其「方式」义。在「这样快速地转变,这样有限的寿命(Evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ evamāyupariyanto)」(《增支部》1.48等)中,是限量义。显示巴利原文
Atthato pana evaṃsaddo tāva upamūpadesasampahaṃsanagarahaṇavacanasampaṭiggahākāra- nidassanāvadhāraṇapucchāidamatthaparimāṇādi anekatthappabhedo. Tathā hesa ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccena, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahu’’nti evamādīsu (dha. pa. 53) upamāyaṃ āgato. ‘‘Evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabba’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.122) upadese. ‘‘Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) sampahaṃsane. ‘‘Evamevaṃ panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.187) garahaṇe. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.3; ma. ni. 1.1) vacanasampaṭiggahe. ‘‘Evaṃ byā kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.398) ākāre. ‘‘Ehi tvaṃ, māṇavaka, yena samaṇo ānando tenupasaṅkama, upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ puccha ‘subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhavantaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ pucchatī’ti, evañca vadehi ‘sādhu kira bhavaṃ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṃ, tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṃ upādāyā’ti’’ādīsu (dī. ni. 1.445) nidassane. ‘‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, kālāmā, ime dhammā kusalā vā akusalā vā’ti? ‘Akusalā, bhante’. ‘Sāvajjā vā anavajjā vā’ti? ‘Sāvajjā, bhante’. ‘Viññūgarahitā vā viññuppasatthā vā’ti? ‘Viññūgarahitā, bhante’. ‘Samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, no’vā? ‘Kathaṃ vo ettha hotī’ti? ‘Samattā, bhante, samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ no ettha hotīti’’’ādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) avadhāraṇe. ‘‘Evamete sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassū āmuttamālābharaṇā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.286) pucchāyaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃgatāni puthusippāyatanāni (dī. ni. 1.182), evaṃvidho evamākāro’’tiādīsu idaṃsaddassa atthe. Gatasaddo hi pakārapariyāyo, tathā vidhākārasaddā. Tathā hi vidhayuttagatasadde lokiyā pakāratthe vadanti. ‘‘Evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ evamāyupariyanto’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 1.48) parimāṇe.
难道不应认为,在“evaṃ vitakkitaṃ no tumhehi, evamāyupariyanto”等句中,由于“如是”一词表达了询问行相与限量行相,因此它唯有“行相”义?并非如此,因为此处存在特殊性。此处的“如是”仅表示一般行相,故被视为行相义。而在“Evaṃ byā kho”等句中,它表示特殊的行相。这些“如是”词既能表达询问行相,也能表达限量行相,故为特殊行相的能诠。如此理解后,像“evaṃ jātena maccena”等比喻和举例的语句才得以成立。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca ‘‘evaṃ vitakkitaṃ no tumhehi, evamāyupariyanto’’ti cettha evaṃsaddena pucchanākāraparimāṇākārānaṃ vuttattā ākārattho eva evaṃsaddoti. Na, visesasabbhāvato. Ākāramattavācako hettha evaṃsaddo ākāratthoti adhippeto. ‘‘Evaṃ byā kho’’tiādīsu pana ākāravisesavacano. Ākāravisesavācino cete evaṃsaddā pucchanākāraparimāṇākārānaṃ vācakattā. Evañca katvā ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccenā’’tiādīni upamānaudāharaṇāni yujjanti. Tattha hi –
犹如从花堆,可编出众多花环;
如是生而为人,应广行众多善。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yathāpi puppharāsimhā, kayirā mālāguṇe bahū; Evaṃ jātena maccena, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahu’’nti. –
在此,由于获得人身如同花堆;亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、成就财富等因缘的集合,则如同制作众多花环所需的因缘集合——即布施等福行的因缘集合;由于光彩、芳香等殊胜功德的结合,花环的功德便与众多福行相似;又因为凡夫具有必死的本质,应当造作福行。因此,以无差别的方式将花堆与花环作为比喻。这两个比喻的运用方式,先是以“犹如”一词作非确定性的表述,再以“如是”一词作确定性的表述。然而,当该比喻方式被确定时,从义理上它本身就是比喻,故说“在比喻中出现”。显示巴利原文
Ettha puppharāsiṭṭhānīyato manussuppatti sappurisūpanissayasaddhammassavanayonisomanasikārabhogasampattiādito dānādipuññakiriyāhetusamudāyato sobhāsugandhatādiguṇavisesayogato mālāguṇasadisiyo bahukā puññakiriyā maritabbasabhāvatāya maccena kattabbāti abhedatāya puppharāsi mālāguṇā ca upamā, tesaṃ upamānākāro yathāsaddena aniyamato vutto. Puna evaṃsaddena niyamanavasena vutto. So pana upamākāro niyamiyamāno atthato upamā eva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upamāyaṃ āgato’’ti.
同样地,在“应以如是方式前进”等的教导中,与沙门相称的威仪成就,其中那教导的方式,在意义上即是教导本身,因此说:“在‘你们应如此前进,应如此后退’等语句中,指的是教导。”显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘evaṃ iminā ākārena abhikkamitabba’’ntiādinā upadisiyamānāya samaṇasāruppāya ākappasampattiyā yo tattha upadesākāro, so atthato upadesoyevāti vuttaṃ – ‘‘evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabbantiādīsu upadese’’ti.
在“正是如此,世尊!正是如此,善逝!”此句中,对于正确无颠倒了知世尊所说法义的人,他们以种种方式对其中所具功德生起的欢喜与踊跃,即是随喜。此处应依前述之理,理解为随喜的方式。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’ti ettha bhagavatā yathāvuttamatthaṃ aviparītato jānantehi kataṃ yaṃ tattha vijjamānaguṇānaṃ pakārehi haṃsanaṃ udaggatākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsanaṃ, so tattha pahaṃsanākāroti vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ.
在“同样地,然而此……”此句中,应依前述之理,理解为诃责的方式。而这一诃责方式,正因有“贱民”等呵骂之词,故在此处以evaṃ一词表示,应如此了知。正如在此处一样,譬喻等方式,也因以譬喻等方式所说的“花堆”等词的存在而说,应如此了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evamevaṃ panāya’’nti ettha garahaṇākāroti vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ. So ca garahaṇākāro ‘‘vasalī’’tiādikhuṃsanasaddasannidhānato idha evaṃsaddena pakāsitoti viññāyati. Yathā cettha, evaṃ upamākārādayopi upamādivasena vuttānaṃ puppharāsiādisaddānaṃ sannidhānato vuttāti veditabbaṃ.
在“我们如此认为”一句中,同样是为了让人们对前述诸法能带来不利与痛苦的特质产生决断,于是以承认、接受的方式进行提问:“或者,你们对此如何认为?”之后回答:“我们对此如此认为”,由此便以“如是”一词显示了那种方式的决断。再者,当那些法导致不利和痛苦的方式得到确定时,它便成为简择义。因此才说:“在‘我们对此如此认为’等语句中,是简择义。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ no’’ti etthāpi tesaṃ yathāvuttadhammānaṃ ahitadukkhāvahabhāvena sanniṭṭhānajananatthaṃ anumatiggahaṇavasena ‘‘no vā kathaṃ vo ettha hotī’’ti pucchāya katāya ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotī’’ti vuttattā tadākārasanniṭṭhānaṃ evaṃsaddena āvikataṃ. So pana tesaṃ dhammānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanākāro niyamiyamāno avadhāraṇattho hotīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotītiādīsu avadhāraṇe’’ti.
“你且这样说吧”——即“如我所说那般,你去对沙门阿难如是说”——这种言说的方式,现在要用“如是”一词来指出,因此说这是指示义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evañca vadehī’’ti yathāhaṃ vadāmi evaṃ samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ vadehīti vadanākāro idāni vattabbo evaṃsaddena nidassīyatīti ‘‘nidassanattho’’ti vuttaṃ.
这些“如是”一词虽然也表达方式的差别,但由于它们被用于譬喻等特殊意义,因此被说成具有譬喻等意义。然而,“是的,尊者!”这句话,是那些被劝导要善巧地听闻、作意佛法的比丘们,以承认自己已安住于该状态的方式说出的,所以此处的“如是”一词是接受话语的意思。因此,“是的,尊者!”即等于“善哉,尊者!”“很好,尊者!”而在这里,此词应被视为用于方式、指示与简择义之中。显示巴利原文
Evamākāravisesavācīnampi etesaṃ evaṃsaddānaṃ upamādivisesatthavuttitāya upamādiatthatā vuttā. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’ti pana dhammassa sādhukaṃ savanamanasikāre niyojitehi bhikkhūhi tattha patiṭṭhitabhāvassa paṭijānanavasena vuttattā tattha evaṃsaddo vacanasampaṭiggahattho. Tena evaṃ, bhanteti sādhu, bhante, suṭṭhu, bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti. Svāyamidha ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇesu daṭṭhabbo.
其中,“如是”一词依方式义,指明此义:世尊的言教具种种理趣、极为微细,从种种意乐中生起,义理与文句圆满,具足种种神变,于法之教说与体证之际甚为甚深,能随顺一切众生各自的语言而传入耳中。有谁能以一切方式完全了知如此言教呢?我纵以最大心力生起闻法的意乐,也仅仅是“如是我闻”——意即我只以一种方式听闻而已。显示巴利原文
Tattha ākāratthena evaṃsaddena etamatthaṃ dīpeti – nānānayanipuṇamanekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ atthabyañjanasampannaṃ vividhapāṭihāriyaṃ dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhagambhīraṃ sabbasattānaṃ sakasakabhāsānurūpato sotapathamāgacchantaṃ tassa bhagavato vacanaṃ sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātuṃ, sabbathāmena pana sotukāmataṃ janetvāpi evaṃ me sutaṃ, mayāpi ekenākārena sutanti.
此处,单一性、差异性、作用及如是法性等,连同被称为“欢喜旋、三莲池狮子游戏、方向光、钩”等的这些,依可意等所缘的分类而有种种不同的理趣,故称种种理趣。或者,理趣即是圣典的走向;这些圣典的走向,依施设、随施设等,依杂染分等、世间等、两者夹杂等,依善等,依蕴等,依摄等,依时解脱等,依安立等,依善根等,依三法发趣等而有种种类别,所以称为种种理趣。通过这些理趣而显得微细、柔和、深妙,所以说种种理趣微妙。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ekattanānattaabyāpāraevaṃdhammatāsaṅkhātā nandiyāvattatipukkhalasīhavikkīḷitadisālocanaaṅkusasaṅkhātā ca assādādivisayādibhedena nānāvidhā nayā nānānayā. Nayā vā pāḷigatiyo, tā ca paññattianupaññattādivasena saṃkilesabhāgiyādilokiyāditadubhayavomissakādivasena kusalādivasena khandhādivasena, saṅgahādivasena, samayavimuttādivasena, ṭhapanādivasena , kusalamūlādivasena, tikapaṭṭhānādivasena ca nānappakārāti nānānayā, tehi nipuṇaṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumanti nānānayanipuṇaṃ.
意乐即是志向,而此志向依常见等分类、依少尘垢等分类而有多种。或者,自意乐等即是种种意乐,此乃此言教的生起之因,故称“从种种意乐所生起”。显示巴利原文
Āsayova ajjhāsayo, so ca sassatādibhedena apparajakkhatādibhedena ca anekavidho. Attajjhāsayādiko eva vā aneko ajjhāsayo anekajjhāsayo. So samuṭṭhānaṃ uppattihetu etassāti anekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
由于具足戒等义之成就,以及彰显这些义的文之成就,即依靠开示、阐明、开显、分别、显了、施设这六种义句,以及字母、词、文、方式、语法、解说这六种文句而具足,故说具足义与文。显示巴利原文
Sīlādiatthasampattiyā tabbibhāvanabyañjanasampattiyā saṅkāsanapakāsanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapaññattivasena chahi atthapadehi akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca samannāgatattā atthabyañjanasampannaṃ.
由神通、记心、教诫的差别而有种种,其中每一种又依所缘等差别而有多类,所以称为「种种神变」。其中,由于除去敌对,即除去贪等烦恼,故称“神变”。然而,世尊并没有应被除去的贪等敌对烦恼,凡夫在离随烦恼、具足八种功德的心中,因敌对已除,神通才会生起,因此依彼处假立的名称,不能将此处称为神变。可是,若大悲世尊所应调伏的有情具有敌对烦恼,依去除那些烦恼而说为神变,则是合理的。或者,世尊及教法的敌对者即是外道,由去除他们而说为神变。因为通过示现神通、记心与教诫,那些外道在见解上被破斥,不能显示己见而被除去。又或者,“paṭi”一词表“后”义,如“tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo”等句中所示。因此,在心等持、远离随烦恼之后,由已作所作的人随后应执行、应转起,故为“神变”。或者,在自己的随烦恼已被第四禅及道去除之后,随后而有之行,称为神变。神通、记心、教诫这三者,当自己的随烦恼已去,已作所作,为了有情的利益而再转起。显示巴利原文
Iddhiādesanānusāsanībhedena tesu ca ekekassa visayādibhedena vividhaṃ bahuvidhaṃ vā pāṭihāriyaṃ etassāti vividhapāṭihāriyaṃ. Tattha paṭipakkhaharaṇato rāgādikilesāpanayanato pāṭihāriyanti atthe sati bhagavato na paṭipakkhā rāgādayo santi ye haritabbā, puthujjanānampi vigatūpakkilese aṭṭhaguṇasamannāgate citte hatapaṭipakkhe iddhividhaṃ pavattati, tasmā tattha pavattavohārena ca na sakkā idha pāṭihāriyanti vattuṃ. Sace pana mahākāruṇikassa bhagavato veneyyagatā ca kilesā paṭipakkhā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyanti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati yuttametaṃ. Atha vā bhagavato ceva sāsanassa ca paṭipakkhā titthiyā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyaṃ. Te hi diṭṭhiharaṇavasena diṭṭhippakāsane asamatthabhāvena ca iddhiādesanānusāsanīhi haritā apanītā honti. Paṭīti vā ayaṃ saddo pacchāti etassa atthaṃ bodheti ‘‘tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu (cūḷani. pārāyanavagga, vatthugāthā 4) viya. Tasmā samāhite citte vigatūpakkilese katakiccena pacchā haritabbaṃ pavattetabbanti paṭihāriyaṃ. Attano vā upakkilesesu catutthajjhānamaggehi haritesu pacchā haraṇaṃ paṭihāriyaṃ. Iddhiādesanānusāsaniyo vigatūpakkilesena katakiccena sattahitatthaṃ puna pavattetabbā, haritesu ca attano upakkilesesu parasattānaṃ upakkilesaharaṇāni hontīti paṭihāriyāni bhavanti. Paṭihāriyameva pāṭihāriyaṃ, paṭihāriye vā iddhiādesanānusāsanīsamudāye bhavaṃ ekekaṃ pāṭihāriyanti vuccati. Paṭihāriyaṃ vā catutthajjhānaṃ maggo ca paṭipakkhaharaṇato. Tattha jātaṃ nimittabhūtato tato vā āgatanti pāṭihāriyanti attho veditabbo.
然而,由于经典之义的教示、彼之语言与通达,或者称为因、因之果、两者之施设与通达的「法义教示与证悟」是甚深的;犹如大海,对于未积集资粮的人,难以找到立足处,难以深入;因此世尊的话语具足这四种甚深的状态,故称为「法义教示与证悟甚深」。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana tantiatthadesanā tabbohārābhisamayasaṅkhātā hetuhetuphalatadubhayapaññattipaṭivedhasaṅkhātā vā dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhā gambhīrā, sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo anupacitakusalasambhārehi alabbhaneyyappatiṭṭhā duppariyogāhā ca, tasmā tehi catūhi gambhīrabhāvehi yuttanti bhagavato vacanaṃ dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhagambhīraṃ.
世尊的教法之声唯有一种,当它于一刹那中生起时,便能使说各种不同语言的众生,各以自己的语言同时领受,无前无后。应知,这是由于诸佛的佛威力不可思议,故能随顺一切众生各自的语言,入其耳门。显示巴利原文
Eko eva bhagavato dhammadesanāghoso, ekasmiṃ khaṇe pavattamāno nānābhāsānaṃ sattānaṃ attano attano bhāsāvasena apubbaṃ acarimaṃ gahaṇūpago hoti. Acinteyyo hi buddhānaṃ buddhānubhāvoti sabbasattānaṃ sakasakabhāsānurūpato sotapathaṃ āgacchatīti veditabbaṃ.
为作例示,他为了将自己从“我非自生者,这并非由我亲证”的想法中解脱出来,而以“如是我闻,我也如此听闻”来标示如今将要讲述的全部经文。显示巴利原文
Nidassanatthena ‘‘nāhaṃ sayambhū, na mayā idaṃ sacchikata’’nti attānaṃ parimocento ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ, mayāpi evaṃ suta’’nti idāni vattabbaṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ nidasseti.
以决定之义,如世尊所说:“诸比丘,于我的声闻比丘弟子中,多闻第一者,即是阿难;具念者、具慧者、坚定者、侍者第一者,亦是阿难。”(增支部1.219‑223)又如法将所说:“具寿阿难通晓义理、通晓法、通晓音韵、通晓语法、通晓前后文。”(增支部5.169)他使自身相应于如是所称叹之德,显示忆持之力,令闻者生起希求之心。因此他说:“如是我闻,且于义理及音声皆无减无增,唯应如此见,不应作他见。”所谓“他见”,是指如同在世尊面前亲闻,却作他解而看待,并非对世尊的教说可以任作他解;因为世尊的教说具有不可思议的威力,不可更改。因此说“然彼一切知”。唯如所闻而忆持,即是忆持之力。显示巴利原文
Avadhāraṇatthena ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahussutānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando, gatimantānaṃ, satimantānaṃ, dhitimantānaṃ, upaṭṭhākānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando’’ti (a. ni. 1.219-223) evaṃ bhagavatā, ‘‘āyasmā ānando atthakusalo, dhammakusalo, byañjanakusalo, niruttikusalo, pubbāparakusalo’’ti (a. ni. 5.169) evaṃ dhammasenāpatinā ca pasatthabhāvānurūpaṃ attano dhāraṇabalaṃ dassento sattānaṃ sotukāmataṃ janeti. ‘‘Evaṃ me sutaṃ, tañca kho atthato vā byañjanato vā anūnamanadhikaṃ, evameva na aññathā daṭṭhabba’’nti. Aññathāti bhagavato sammukhā sutākārato aññathā na pana bhagavatā desitākārato. Acinteyyānubhāvā hi bhagavato desanā, sā neva sabbākārena sakkā viññātunti vuttovāyamattho. Sutākārāvirujjhanameva hi dhāraṇabalaṃ.
“me”这一词形可见于三种意义。例如,在“gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyyaṃ”(不应食用由我以偈颂唱诵之物)等句中,意为“由我”。在“sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetu”(萨度!尊者!请世尊为我略说法要)等句中,意为“为我”。在“dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha”(诸比丘,你们要成为我的法嗣)等句中,意为“我的”。而在此处,则适合理解为“由我听闻”与“我的听闻”两种意义。显示巴利原文
Mesaddo tīsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hissa ‘‘gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyya’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.194; su. ni. 81) mayāti attho. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.88; 5.382; a. ni. 4.257) mayhanti attho. ‘‘Dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.29) mamāti attho. Idha pana ‘‘mayā sutaṃ, mama suta’’nti ca atthadvaye yujjati.
在此,当表达“非他者即是自我”时,那指的是在自身相续中生起、名为“自我”的那个。然而,“me”一词虽似唯表一种意义,但依具格、为格等语法差别,其意义的分化确实可以了知。因此,所谓“me一词见于三种意义中”(me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissati),应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yo paro na hoti, so attāti evaṃ vattabbe niyakajjhattasaṅkhāte sasantāne vattanato tividhopi mesaddo kiñcāpi ekasmiṃyeva atthe dissati, karaṇasampadānādivisesasaṅkhāto pana viññāyatevāyaṃ atthabhedoti ‘‘me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissatī’’ti vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“suta”这个字,不论带前缀还是不带前缀,都分有多种意义:行走、闻名、濡湿、积集、勤行、耳所识、耳门随转所了知等。实际上,虽然前缀能区分动作,但因其只是显明作用,所以即使带有前缀,“suta”这个字本身也表达相应的意义。因此,在列举不带前缀的“suta”字的意义时,将带前缀的也一并采纳,并无矛盾。显示巴利原文
Sutanti ayaṃ sutasaddo saupasaggo anupasaggo ca gamanavissutakilinnūpacitānuyogasotaviññeyya sotadvārānusāra viññātādianekatthappabhedo. Kiñcāpi hi upasaggo kiriyaṃ viseseti, jotakabhāvato pana satipi tasmiṃ sutasaddo eva taṃ tamatthaṃ vadatīti anupasaggassa sutasaddassa atthuddhāre saupasaggassa gahaṇaṃ na virujjhati.
其中,“senāya pasuto”(追随军队)等语中,意为“行走”。“sutadhammassa passato”(见闻法者)等中,意为“闻名法者”。“avassutā avassutassa”(漏者对漏者)等中,意为“被烦恼所漏湿者对漏湿者”。“tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappakaṃ”(你们已积累了不少福)等中,意为“已积集”。“ye jhānappasutā dhīrā”(那些勤行禅那的智者)等中,意为“勤行禅那者”。“diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ”(所见、所闻、所觉)等中,意为“耳所识”。“sutadharo sutasannicayo”(多闻持法者、闻法积集者)等中,意为“持守随耳门转起而了知者”。在此处,它的意义是“依耳门随转而领受”或“领受”。如果“me”的意思为“由我”,则与“如是由我听闻,依耳门随转而领受”的解释相符;如果意思为“我的”,则与“如是我的听闻,依耳门随转的领受”相符。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘senāya pasuto’’tiādīsu gacchantoti attho. ‘‘Sutadhammassa passato’’tiādīsu (udā. 11) vissutadhammassāti attho. ‘‘Avassutā avassutassā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 657) kilesena kilinnā kilinnassāti attho. ‘‘Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappaka’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 7.12) upacitanti attho. ‘‘Ye jhānappasutā dhīrā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 181) jhānānuyuttāti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ muta’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.241) sotaviññeyyanti attho. ‘‘Sutadharo sutasannicayo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.339) sotadvārānusāraviññātadharoti attho. Idha panassa ‘‘sotadvārānusārena upadhārita’’nti vā ‘‘upadhāraṇa’’nti vā attho. Me-saddassa hi mayāti atthe sati ‘‘evaṃ mayā sutaṃ sotadvārānusārena upadhārita’’nti yujjati. Mamāti atthe sati ‘‘evaṃ mama sutaṃ sotadvārānusārena upadhāraṇa’’nti yujjati.
因此,在三词之中,由于与“suta”一词结合的“evaṃ”必须用来显示听闻的动作,故“evaṃ”所显示的是在耳识领受等耳门识之后生起的意门识的作用。“me”显示的是具足此识的补特伽罗。所有句子都带有表示决定(eva)的强调义,以达到确定的效果。“suta”则显示排遣“未听闻”,即没有减少、没有增加、没有颠倒地把握。既如所听闻,即应说为“所听闻”,所以那是正确地听闻,没有减少、没有增加、没有颠倒地把握。或者,依据“声音是通过排斥其他意义而表达意义”的观点,“suta”意为“不是未听闻”,因此“suta”显示对“未听闻”的否定,也就是没有减少、没有增加、没有颠倒地把握。这等于说:如是我闻,不是我所见,不是以自然智亲证,也不是以其他方式获得;而正是听闻,且是正确地听闻。又或者,在带决定义的“evaṃ”一词中,有这样的义理结合:与它相关的“suta”词含有决定的意义,因此“suta”词应被理解为对“未听闻”的否定,及显示没有减少、没有增加、没有颠倒地把握。显示巴利原文
Evametesu tīsu padesu yasmā sutasaddasannidhāne payuttena evaṃsaddena savanakiriyājotakena bhavitabbaṃ, tasmā evanti sotaviññāṇasampaṭicchanādisotadvārikaviññāṇānantaraṃ uppannamanodvārikaviññāṇakiccanidassanaṃ. Meti vuttaviññāṇasamaṅgīpuggalanidassanaṃ. Sabbāni hi vākyāni evakāratthasahitāniyeva avadhāraṇaphalattā tesaṃ. Sutanti assavanabhāvappaṭikkhepato anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassanaṃ. Yathā hi sutaṃ sutamevāti vattabbataṃ arahati tathā taṃ sammā sutaṃ anūnaggahaṇaṃ anadhikaggahaṇaṃ aviparītaggahaṇañca hotīti. Atha vā saddantaratthāpohanavasena saddo atthaṃ vadatīti etasmiṃ pakkhe yasmā sutanti etassa asutaṃ na hotīti ayamattho vutto, tasmā sutanti assavanabhāvappaṭikkhepato anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – evaṃ me sutaṃ, na mayā idaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, na sayambhūñāṇena sacchikataṃ, na aññathā vā upaladdhaṃ. Api ca sutaṃva, tañca kho sammadevāti. Avadhāraṇatthe vā evaṃsadde ayamatthayojanā, tadapekkhassa sutasaddassa niyamattho sambhavatīti tadapekkhassa sutasaddassa assavanabhāvappaṭikkhepo anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassanatā ca veditabbā. Iti savanahetusavanavisesavasenapi sutasaddassa atthayojanā katāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
同样,“evaṃ”:由于那依耳门随转而转起的识路执取了种种义与文句,因此阐明以种种方式在所缘中转起的状态,这就是“evaṃ”一词的“行相义”。“me”是显示自身。“suta”是显示法,因为如前所述的识路是以教法为所缘。此处略义如下:以种种方式在所缘中转起的识路为所依,我未造作其他,唯成办此事——即此法已闻。显示巴利原文
Tathā evanti tassā sotadvārānusārena pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇato nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattibhāvappakāsanaṃ ākārattho evaṃsaddoti karitvā. Meti attappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti dhammappakāsanaṃ yathāvuttāya viññāṇavīthiyā pariyattidhammārammaṇattā. Ayañhettha saṅkhepo – nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā karaṇabhūtāya mayā na aññaṃ kataṃ, idaṃ pana kataṃ, ayaṃ dhammo sutoti.
同样地,「evaṃ」一词意为“应被指示者”,具有“例示”的意义,因为应被指示的内容,其本质就是可以被指出。因此应知,通过「evaṃ」一词,即已指涉整部经典。「me」是指明补特伽罗。「suta」是指明补特伽罗的作用。因为通过「suta」一词所获得的听闻行为,是与听闻识的相续相关联的;在其中,存在对补特伽罗的施设,而在没有补特伽罗施设的单纯法相续中,听闻行为并不可得。此处的简要义是:我将要阐述的那部经典,是由我如此听闻。显示巴利原文
Tathā evanti nidassitabbappakāsanaṃ nidassanattho evaṃsaddoti katvā nidassetabbassa niddisitabbabhāvato. Tasmā evaṃsaddena sakalampi suttaṃ paccāmaṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ. Meti puggalappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti puggalakiccappakāsanaṃ. Sutasaddena hi labbhamānā savanakiriyā savanaviññāṇappabandhappaṭibaddhā, tattha ca puggalavohāro, na ca puggalavohārarahite dhammappabandhe savanakiriyā labbhati. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yaṃ suttaṃ niddisissāmi, taṃ mayā evaṃ sutanti.
同样地,所谓「evaṃ」,是指某一心相续缘于种种所缘而转起,便能执取种种义理与文句,因此它说明的是“种种行相”——这便是「evaṃ」一词的“行相义”。因为“如是”这种行相的施设,正是依于诸法各自转起的行相而可被施设的本性。「me」是作者的说明。「suta」是境的说明;因为应被听闻的法,对于以听闻行为而行事的补特伽罗而言,正是借助听闻行为而成为其转起的所缘。至此显示:以种种方式转起的心相续,对于具足它的作者,在其所缘境上,已有执取的决定。显示巴利原文
Tathā evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānārammaṇappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddeso ākārattho eva evaṃsaddoti katvā. Evanti hi ayamākārapaññatti dhammānaṃ taṃ taṃ pavattiākāraṃ upādāya paññapetabbasabhāvattā. Meti kattuniddeso. Sutanti visayaniddeso, sotabbo hi dhammo savanakiriyākattupuggalassa savanakiriyāvasena pavattiṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Ettāvatā nānappakārena pavattena cittasantānena taṃsamaṅgino kattu visaye gahaṇasanniṭṭhānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti.
又或者,「evaṃ」说明补特伽罗的作用。因为对于已听闻的诸法,「evaṃ」一词的性质是开显其被执取的行相——无论是作为例证还是确定——由此说明了具有彼行相等执持的状态;这正是通常被习惯称为补特伽罗的诸法之造作,故称为补特伽罗的作用。「suta」说明识的作用,因为即使是主张有补特伽罗的人,其听闻行为也不可能离开识而存在。「me」则说明兼具这两种作用的补特伽罗。因为「me」一词的使用,必然以补特伽罗的特性为所缘,而识的作用也应在这里一起安立。此处的扼要意义是:由具足听闻行为与识的补特伽罗,依于识而获得“听闻行为”的称谓,这便是“听闻”。显示巴利原文
Atha vā evanti puggalakiccaniddeso, sutānañhi dhammānaṃ gahitākārassa nidassanassa avadhāraṇassa vā pakāsanasabhāvena evaṃsaddena tadākārādidhāraṇassa puggalavohārupādānadhammabyāpārabhāvato puggalakiccaṃnāma niddiṭṭhaṃ hotīti. Sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso, puggalavādinopi hi savanakiriyā viññāṇanirapekkhā na hotīti. Meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso. Meti hi saddappavatti ekanteneva sattavisesavisayā viññāṇakiccañca tattheva samodahitabbanti. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – mayā savanakiccaviññāṇasamaṅginā puggalena viññāṇavasena laddhasavanakiccavohārena sutanti.
同样地,「如是」(evaṃ)和「我」(me),从真实义上的究竟义(saccikaṭṭhaparamattha)来说,属于不存在的施设(avijjamānapaññatti)。因为一切可藉由语言来理解的义理,都只能通过施设来通达;而所有的施设,都可以归入“存在的”等六种施设之中。因此,像幻影、阳焰这类并非真实存在的东西,或者像那些只凭口头传说来执取的说法一样,它也不是无上的真理。而像色法、声音等,以及可以被损害、感受等这些究竟上的特性,在真实义上的究竟义中是存在的。然而,当说到「如是」和「我」时,所指的那个形态义,并不具备究竟的性质,在真实义上的究竟义中找不到它,所以称为不存在的施设。既然如此,在这里,从究竟意义上讲,又有什么东西可以得到「如是」或「我」的指称呢?「闻」(sutaṃ)则是存在的施设(vijjamānapaññatti)。因为在这里通过耳朵听到的内容,从究竟义上来说,是存在的。显示巴利原文
Tathā evanti ca meti ca saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññatti. Sabbassa hi saddādhigamanīyassa atthassa paññattimukheneva paṭipajjitabbattā sabbapaññattīnañca vijjamānādīsu chasu paññattīsu avarodho, tasmā yo māyāmarīciādayo viya abhūtattho anussavādīhi gahetabbo viya anuttamatthopi na hoti. So rūpasaddādiko ruppanānubhavanādiko ca paramatthasabhāvo saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena vijjati. Yo pana evanti ca meti ca vuccamāno ākārattho, so aparamatthasabhāvo saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena anupalabbhamāno avijjamānapaññatti nāma. Tasmā kiñhettha taṃ paramatthato atthi, yaṃ evanti vā meti vā niddesaṃ labhetha? Sutanti vijjamānapaññatti, yañhi taṃ ettha sotena upaladdhaṃ, taṃ paramatthato vijjamānanti.
「如是」是依于入耳根之法,通过回想其被认知的形态等方式而说,属回想施设。「我」是依于相续所包含的、具有作者等特殊差别的五蕴而须被表述的,故为所依施设。「闻」则是参照“见”等而说,故为类比施设。纵使“闻”这一称谓所表达的内容,是在缺乏“见”等自性的声处活动的,但如同“第二”“第三”是依于“第一”等而说一样,由于它是依据“见、觉、识”而被认定为“闻”,所以必须参照“见”等来说。所谓“没有听闻不到的”,正是用这个“闻”字来阐明此义。显示巴利原文
Tathā evanti sotapathamāgate dhamme upādāya tesaṃ upadhāritākārādīnaṃ paccāmasanavasena. Meti sasantatipariyāpanne khandhe karaṇādivisesavisiṭṭhe upādāya vattabbato upādāpaññatti. Sutanti diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato upanidhāpaññatti. Diṭṭhādisabhāvarahite saddāyatane pavattamānopi sutavohāro dutiyaṃ tatiyantiādiko viya paṭhamādīni, diṭṭhamutaviññāte apekkhitvā sutanti viññeyyattā diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbo hoti. Asutaṃ na hotīti hi sutanti pakāsitoyamatthoti.
在此,「如是」一词表明了阿难尊者的不迷乱。尊者阿难以「如是」回忆了自己所证悟、所听闻的种种差别相状,因此显露其不迷乱。迷乱者无法以种种方式通达,而诸经典依因缘的方式多种多样、极难通达,故以此语阐明不迷乱。以「闻」一词,则表明他对所闻之法不忘失。因为所闻之行相被如实揭示;若闻而即忘,时隔之后便无法承认“这是我听闻的”。如此,由不迷乱成就智慧:因无迷乱,或仅凭听闻时生起的智慧,便成就后续的智慧;同样,由不忘失成就正念。其中,以智慧为主导的念,能准确确定字句。由于字句所要通达的形态并非甚深,只需依所闻而忆持,这是所应作,故此时“念”的作用更为突出,而“慧”处于辅助地位,因此称为“以慧为先导”。以正念为主导的智慧,则能通达义理。因为义理所通达的形态极为深奥,故此时“慧”的作用更为突出。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca evantivacanena asammohaṃ dīpeti. Paṭividdhā hi attanā sutassa pakāravisesā evanti idha āyasmatā ānandena paccāmaṭṭhā, tenassa asammoho dīpito hoti. Na hi sammūḷho nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hoti, paccayākāravasena nānappakārā duppaṭividdhā ca suttantāti dīpitanti. Sutantivacanena sutassa asammosaṃ dīpeti, sutākārassa yāthāvato dassiyamānattā. Yassa hi sutaṃ sammuṭṭhaṃ hoti, na so kālantare mayā sutanti paṭijānāti. Iccassa asammohena paññāsiddhi, sammohābhāvena paññāya eva vā savanakālasambhūtāya taduttarikālapaññāsiddhi, tathā asammosena satisiddhi. Tattha paññāpubbaṅgamāya satiyā byañjanāvadhāraṇasamatthatā. Byañjanānañhi paṭivijjhitabbo ākāro nātigambhīro, yathāsutaṃ dhāraṇameva tattha karaṇīyanti satiyā byāpāro adhiko, paññā tattha guṇībhūtā hoti paññāya pubbaṅgamāti katvā. Satipubbaṅgamāya paññāya atthappaṭivedhasamatthatā. Atthassa hi paṭivijjhitabbo ākāro gambhīroti paññāya byāpāro adhiko, sati tattha guṇībhūtāyevāti satiyā pubbaṅgamāyāti katvā. Tadubhayasamatthatāyogena atthabyañjanasampannassa dhammakosassa anupālanasamatthatāya dhammabhaṇḍāgārikattasiddhi.
另一种解释:以“如是”一词指明如理作意。由于如理作意,对于所说行相的展示与确定,以及下文将要阐明的种种通达,皆能不颠倒地成就,因为这是以法为对象的。若非如理作意者,种种通达便无从生起。以“闻”一词指明不散乱。因为当被问及“第一部菩提经是在何处宣说?”等问题时,对于典籍范围内将要叙述的经文,若心不专注,则无法听闻,因为心散乱者没有听闻。事实上,一个心散乱的人,即使如实告知一切成就之事,他也会说:“我没听到,请再说一遍。”在此,如理作意成就了自身的正志与过去世所积的福德,因为心志不正者,或过去世未积福德者,不会拥有如理作意。不散乱则成就了对正法的听闻与对善士的亲近依止,因为不听闻者,以及未亲近善士者,不会拥有不散乱。因此说,心散乱者无法听闻,不亲近善士者亦无真正的听闻。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – evantivacanena yonisomanasikāraṃ dīpeti, tena ca vuccamānānaṃ ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthānaṃ upari vakkhamānānaṃ nānappakārappaṭivedhajotakānaṃ aviparītasiddhi dhammavisayattā. Na hi ayoniso manasikaroto nānappakārappaṭivedho sambhavati. Sutantivacanena avikkhepaṃ dīpeti, ‘‘paṭhamabodhisuttaṃ kattha bhāsita’’ntiādipucchāvasena pakaraṇapattassa vakkhamānassa suttassa savanaṃ samādhānamantarena na sambhavati vikkhittacittassa savanābhāvato. Tathā hi vikkhittacitto puggalo sabbasampattiyā vuccamānopi ‘‘na mayā sutaṃ, puna bhaṇathā’’ti bhaṇati. Yonisomanasikārena cettha attasammāpaṇidhiṃ pubbe ca katapuññataṃ sādheti sammā appaṇihitattassa pubbe akatapuññassa vā tadabhāvato. Avikkhepena saddhammassavanaṃ sappurisūpanissayañca sādheti assutavato sappurisūpanissayavirahitassa ca tadabhāvato. Na hi vikkhitto sotuṃ sakkoti, na ca sappurise anupanissayamānassa savanaṃ atthīti.
另一种解释:已说“对于心相续以种种方式转起时,能把握种种义理与文句者,即是对种种原因的说明”。而此种善妙行相——通过抉择世尊言教义理与文句的差别,以彻底通达完整教法的成就,圆满成就利他——对于心未善安立或过去未作福德者,是不会出现的。因此,以“如是”这一善妙行相,说明了自身后二轮(见轮与智轮)的成就;以“闻”与听闻相应,说明了前二轮(戒轮与定轮)的成就。因为不住于适宜处所、缺乏善士依止之人,不会有听闻。如此,由后二轮的成就,其意乐清净得以成立。因为心善安立且过去已作福德者,意乐清净,远离了导致不清净的烦恼。正如所说:“心若善安立,能因此做得更好”(《法句经》43),以及“阿难,你已作福德,精进努力吧,你很快将成为无漏者”(《长部》2.207)。由前二轮的成就,则成立加行清净。因为通过住于适宜处所、依止善士、随顺善人的见解而行,其加行是清净的。又以此意乐清净,成就证悟的善巧,因为先前已净化了渴爱与邪见等杂染;以加行清净,成就教法的善巧。因为身语加行极清显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – ‘‘yassa cittasantānassa nānappakārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddeso’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā ca so bhagavato vacanassa atthabyañjanappabhedaparicchedavasena sakalasāsanasampattiogāhanena niravasesaṃ parahitapāripūrīkaraṇabhūto evaṃ bhaddako ākāro na sammā appaṇihitattassa pubbe akatapuññassa vā hoti. Tasmā evanti iminā bhaddakena ākārena pacchimacakkadvayasampattimattano dīpeti, sutanti savanayogena purimacakkadvayasampattiṃ. Na hi appatirūpe dese vasato sappurisūpanissayavirahitassa ca savanaṃ atthi. Iccassa pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyā āsayasuddhi siddhā hoti. Sammā paṇihitacitto pubbe ca katapuñño visuddhāsayo hoti tadasuddhihetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ dūrībhāvato. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sammā paṇihitaṃ cittaṃ, seyyaso naṃ tato kare’’ti (dha. pa. 43) ‘‘katapuññosi tvaṃ, ānanda, padhānamanuyuñja, khippaṃ hohisi anāsavo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.207) ca. Purimacakkadvayasiddhiyā payogasuddhi. Patirūpadesavāsena hi sappurisūpanissayena ca sādhūnaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanena parisuddhappayogo hoti. Tāya ca āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhi, pubbeyeva taṇhādiṭṭhisaṃkilesānaṃ visodhitattā payogasuddhiyā āgamabyattisiddhi. Suparisuddhakāyavacīpayogo hi vippaṭisārābhāvato avikkhittacitto pariyattiyaṃ visārado hoti. Iti payogāsayasuddhassa āgamādhigamasampannassa vacanaṃ aruṇuggamanaṃ viya sūriyassa udayato yonisomanasikāro viya ca kusalakammassa arahati bhagavato vacanassa pubbaṅgamaṃ bhavitunti ṭhāne nidānaṃ ṭhapento evaṃ me sutantiādimāha.
另一种解释:“如是”一词,如前所说,阐明种种通达,由此显示自身具足义无碍解与辩无碍解的成就。“闻”一词,因其与“如是”紧接,或基于对后文的期待,阐明对所闻分类的通达,由此显示自身具足法无碍解与词无碍解的成就。当他说出这一如前所说、阐明如理作意的“如是”时,他是在显示:“这些法,我以心善加审察,以见善巧通达。”因为对教法的通达,是以这样的方式:以心审察“此处说戒、此处说定、此处说慧,有如此这般连结”等,伴随着随闻行相的思惟,通过成为法审察忍,或称为知遍知的见,在处处所说的色法、无色法中,善作决择“这是色,色有如此之多”等,如此通达,并能为自己与他人带来利益与安乐。当他说出这一阐明与听闻相应的“闻”时,他是在显示:“我多闻这些法,忆持,以语串习。”因为对教法的听闻、忆持与串习,有赖于倾耳专注。以此二者,通过显示法是善说的、义理与文句圆满,激发对听闻的恭敬心。因为对于义理与文句圆满的法,若不恭敬听闻,便会失却大利益。因此,激发恭敬心后,应殷重地听闻法。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – evanti iminā pubbe vuttanayeneva nānappakārappaṭivedhadīpakena vacanena attano atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ dīpeti. Sutanti iminā evaṃsaddasannidhānato vakkhamānāpekkhāya vā sotabbabhedappaṭivedhadīpakena dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ dīpeti. Evanti ca idaṃ vuttanayeneva yonisomanasikāradīpakavacanaṃ bhāsamāno ‘‘ete dhammā mayā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā’’ti dīpeti. Pariyattidhammo hi ‘‘idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā, ettakā ettha anusandhiyo’’tiādinā nayena manasā anupekkhito anussavākāraparivitakkasahitāya dhammanijjhānakkhantibhūtāya ñātapariññāsaṅkhātāya vā diṭṭhiyā tattha tattha vuttarūpārūpadhamme ‘‘iti rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpa’’ntiādinā nayena suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā paṭividdho attano ca paresañca hitasukhāvaho hotīti. Sutanti idaṃ savanayogadīpakavacanaṃ bhāsamāno ‘‘bahū mayā dhammā sutā dhātā vacasā paricitā’’ti dīpeti. Sotāvadhānappaṭibaddhā hi pariyattidhammassa savanadhāraṇaparicayā. Tadubhayenapi dhammassa svākkhātabhāvena, atthabyañjanapāripūriṃ dīpento savane ādaraṃ janeti. Atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇañhi dhammaṃ ādarena assuṇanto mahatā hitā paribāhiro hotīti ādaraṃ janetvā sakkaccaṃ dhammo sotabbo.
再者,以“如是我闻”这整句话,尊者阿难不将如来所宣说的教法视为自己所作,从而超越了非善士之地;他承认自己是声闻弟子,从而进入了善士之地。同样,他令心从不正法出离,令心安住于正法。通过显示“这纯粹是我所听闻的,且正是彼世尊的言教”,他令自己解脱,归向导师,确立胜者之教,安立法脉。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃme suta’’nti iminā pana sakalena vacanena āyasmā ānando tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammaṃ attano adahanto asappurisabhūmiṃ atikkamati, sāvakattaṃ paṭijānanto sappurisabhūmiṃ okkamati. Tathā asaddhammā cittaṃ vuṭṭhāpeti, saddhamme cittaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti. ‘‘Kevalaṃ sutamevetaṃ mayā, tasseva pana bhagavato vacana’’nti dīpento attānaṃ parimoceti, satthāraṃ apadisati, jinavacanaṃ appeti, dhammanettiṃ patiṭṭhāpeti.
此外,以“如是我闻”不宣称此是自己所造,而公开先前的听闻:“这是我从那位具足四无畏、持十力、安住于师子座、作狮子吼、一切众生中最上、法自在者、法王、以法为尊、法之明灯、以法为皈依、正法转轮圣王、正自觉者的世尊面前,亲自领受的。因此,对于其中的义、法、词、文,不应有任何疑惑或犹豫。”以此消除一切人天对此教法的不信,令生起信心成就。是故有偈颂说:显示巴利原文
Apica ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti attanā uppāditabhāvaṃ appaṭijānanto purimassavanaṃ vivaranto ‘‘sammukhā paṭiggahitamidaṃ mayā tassa bhagavato catuvesārajjavisāradassa dasabaladharassa āsabhaṭṭhānaṭṭhāyino sīhanādanādino sabbasattuttamassa dhammissarassa dhammarājassa dhammādhipatino dhammadīpassa dhammasaraṇassa saddhammavaracakkavattino sammāsambuddhassa, na ettha atthe vā dhamme vā pade vā byañjane vā kaṅkhā vā vimati vā kattabbā’’ti sabbadevamanussānaṃ imasmiṃ dhamme assaddhiyaṃ vināseti, saddhāsampadaṃ uppādeti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
它能灭除不信,增长对教法的净信;
“如是我闻”,乔达摩的声闻弟子这样说。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vināsayati assaddhaṃ, saddhaṃ vaḍḍheti sāsane; Evaṃ me sutamiccevaṃ, vadaṃ gotamasāvako’’ti.
「Eka」:这是计数的限定说明。实际上,“eka”一词可出现于“其他、最胜、无伴、数目”等不同意义中。如“常我及世间,唯此为真实,余者是虚妄”等句中,取“其他”义;在“心一境性”等句中,取“最胜”义;在“独处远离”等句中,取“无伴”义;在“诸比丘,确实唯一的刹那和时节是梵行住之缘”等句中,取“数目”义。此处也应视为数目义,因此说“eka是计数的限定说明”。显示巴利原文
Ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso. Ayañhi ekasaddo aññaseṭṭhāsahāyasaṅkhyādīsu dissati. Tathā hi ayaṃ ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.27; udā. 55) aññe dissati. ‘‘Cetaso ekodibhāva’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 11; dī. ni. 1.228) seṭṭhe. ‘‘Eko vūpakaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 445; dī. ni. 1.405) asahāye. ‘‘Ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29) saṅkhyāyaṃ, idhāpi saṅkhyāyameva daṭṭhabbo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso’’ti.
「Samaya」:这是限定的说明。「Ekaṃ samayaṃ」:表示不确指的说明。在此,“samaya”一词 ——显示巴利原文
Samayanti paricchinnaniddeso. Ekaṃ samayanti aniyamitaparidīpanaṃ. Tattha samayasaddo –
于和合、刹那、时节、集合、因与见中,
于获得、断除及通达中,亦可见其使用。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Samavāye khaṇe kāle, samūhe hetudiṭṭhisu; Paṭilābhe pahāne ca, paṭivedhe ca dissati’’.
譬如,在“或许明日我等也可趁时机与和合前往亲近”这样的文句中,「samaya」意为“和合”,其用意在于获得合适的时机与条件的和合,故应理解为“缘的和合”。在“诸比丘,确实唯一的刹那与时节是梵行住之缘”等句中,「samaya」是“刹那”义,即“机会”之意。因为如来出世等正是行梵行的机会,由于能获得那样的缘,所以刹那也就是时;凡是被称为刹那与时者,便是唯一。在“热时、酷热时”等句中,「samaya」指“时节”。在“大集会于林中”等句中,「samaya」指“集合”。所谓大集会,即比丘与天神们的大聚集。在“跋陀离,那时你未通达,而世尊住在舍卫城,世尊也会知我——‘跋陀离比丘于导师教法中修学未圆满’,跋陀离,此因你亦未通达”等句中,「samaya」是“因”的意思。此处,学处的理由即称为“时”。在“当时,游行者优迦诃摩那·沙门蒙地咖住在末利夫人的、以议论时宣讲处著称的、有黑乌木单层大厅的园林中”等句中,「samaya」是“见”的意思,因坐于彼处之故。显示巴利原文
Tathā hissa ‘‘appeva nāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 1.447) samavāyo attho, yuttakālañca paccayasāmaggiñca labhitvāti hi adhippāyo, tasmā paccayasamavāyoti veditabbo . ‘‘Ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29) khaṇo, okāsoti attho. Tathāgatuppādādiko hi maggabrahmacariyassa okāso tappaccayappaṭilābhahetuttā, khaṇo eva ca samayo, yo khaṇoti ca samayoti ca vuccati, so eko yevāti hi attho. ‘‘Uṇhasamayo pariḷāhasamayo’’tiādīsu (pāci. 358) kālo. ‘‘Mahāsamayo pavanasmi’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.332) samūho. Mahāsamayoti hi bhikkhūnaṃ devatānañca mahāsannipātoti attho. ‘‘Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi, bhagavā kho sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, bhagavāpi maṃ jānissati ‘bhaddāli nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya na paripūrakārī’ti, ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.135) hetu. Sikkhāpadassa kāraṇañhi idha samayoti adhippetaṃ. ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme paṭivasatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.260) diṭṭhi. Tattha hi nisinnā titthiyā attano attano diṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ samayaṃ pavadantīti so paribbājakārāmo ‘‘samayappavādako’’ti vuccati.
现法中有何种义,来世中又有何种义,
由义现观,智者即称为贤者。”(《相应部》1.129)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo attho, yo cattho samparāyiko; Atthābhisamayā dhīro, paṇḍitoti pavuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.129) –
于诸经句中,「现观」(abhisamaya)意为「获得」。因「义现观」即指「义的证得」。在“由于正慢现观而作尽苦边际”等句中,「现观」意为「断除」。在此,「诉讼」(adhikaraṇa)、「平息」(samaya)、「止息」(vūpasamana)、「消失」(apagama)等词,皆有断除之义,亦即现观的断除义。而在“苦有逼迫义、有为义、热恼义、变异义、现观义”等句中,「现观」意为「通达」(paṭivedha)。所谓通达,从应被现观的角度而言,其本身即是现观;而现观本身即是义,故称「现观义」——这是将逼迫等应被现观的性质归为一类而说。或者,由现观或通达所了知的对象(义),即称为「现观义」;因此,那些义便专指于此。这里,「逼迫」是指苦谛对与之相伴而生的诸法施加折磨,令其不得舒展。「热恼」是指以苦苦等方式所造成的烧灼与燃烧。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu paṭilābho. Atthābhisamayāti hi atthassa adhigamāti attho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.28) pahānaṃ. Adhikaraṇaṃ samayaṃ vūpasamanaṃ apagamoti abhisamayo pahānaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho abhisamayaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 2.8) paṭivedho . Paṭivedhoti hi abhisametabbato abhisamayo, abhisamayova attho abhisamayaṭṭhoti pīḷanādīni abhisametabbabhāvena ekībhāvaṃ upanetvā vuttāni, abhisamayassa vā paṭivedhassa visayabhūto attho abhisamayaṭṭhoti tāneva tathā ekantena vuttāni. Tattha pīḷanaṃ dukkhasaccassa taṃsamaṅgino hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ. Santāpo dukkhadukkhatādivasena santappanaṃ paridahanaṃ.
在这里,“时”(samaya)具有以下含义:“和合”(samavāyo samayo)是指种种辅助条件审察、聚集、和合,故名为“时”。道与梵行于此处和合、生起,依托那些能住持它的人,这一刹那称为“时”(khaṇo samayo)。有情或有自性的法,于其中或藉由它,与生起等同时生起,或与俱生等法一同集会,这样的时段称为“时”(kālo samayo)。就胜义而言,时间只是法的运作,并非实有;然则它被假立为法运作的所依及能作,犹如依假名施设,将本不相应的事说为“缘”一般。“聚”(samūho samayo)是指诸支分的和合运作、安住,如同“集”(samudāya);其实聚即是诸支分共同安住的状态。“因”(hetu)亦名为“时”(samayo):在其他缘具足时,果即由此生起、运作,如同“集起”(samudaya)。“见”(diṭṭhi)亦名为“时”(samayo):有情以见结合,而牢固执取,于自境界中运行,犹如固着;因为有情的见结系缚,故被牢牢绑住。“证得”(paṭilābho)亦名为“时”显示巴利原文
Ettha ca sahakārīkāraṇasannijjhaṃ sameti samavetīti samavāyo samayo. Sameti samāgacchati ettha maggabrahmacariyaṃ tadādhārapuggalehīti khaṇo samayo. Sameti ettha etena vā saṃgacchati satto sabhāvadhammo vā uppādādīhi sahajātādīhi vāti kālo samayo. Dhammappavattimattatāya atthato abhūtopi hi kālo dhammappavattiyā adhikaraṇaṃ karaṇaṃ viya ca kappanāmattasiddhenānurūpena voharīyatīti. Samaṃ, saha vā avayavānaṃ ayanaṃ pavatti avaṭṭhānanti samūho samayo yathā samudāyoti. Avayavasahāvaṭṭhānameva hi samūho. Avasesapaccayānaṃ samāgame sati eti phalametasmā uppajjati pavattatīti samayo hetu yathā samudayoti. Sameti saṃyojanabhāvato sambandho eti attano visaye pavattati, daḷhaggahaṇabhāvato vā saṃyuttā ayanti pavattanti sattā yathābhinivesaṃ etenāti samayo diṭṭhi. Diṭṭhisaṃyojanena hi sattā ativiya bajjhantīti. Samiti saṅgati samodhānanti samayo paṭilābho. Samayanaṃ upasamayanaṃ apagamoti samayo pahānaṃ. Samucchedappahānabhāvato pana adhiko samayoti abhisamayo yathā abhidhammoti. Abhimukhaṃ ñāṇena sammā etabbo abhisametabboti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvo. Abhimukhabhāvena sammā eti gacchati bujjhatīti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvāvabodho. Evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe samayasaddassa pavatti veditabbā.
在解释“samaya”一词的义项时,连带提及“abhisamaya”的理由,如前所述即可了知。然而此处,由于“和合”等含义并不适用,故应取“时间”(kālo)为义。正如地点、说法者、听众等是说法的因缘,这里作为说法因缘的,亦应唯取“时间”。所以,此处的“samaya”即指时间,因而说“一时”(ekaṃ samayaṃ),意在表明:在年、季节、月、半月、夜、日、上午、正午、下午、初夜、中夜、后夜乃至片刻等种种时间差别之中,有一个特定的时间。显示巴利原文
Samayasaddassa atthuddhāre abhisamayasaddassa gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idha panassa kālo attho samavāyādīnaṃ asambhavato. Desadesakaparisā viya hi desanāya nidānabhāve kālo eva icchitabboti. Yasmā panettha samayoti kālo adhippeto, tasmā saṃvaccharautumāsaddhamāsarattidivasapubbaṇhamajjhanhikasāyanhapaṭhamayāma- majjhimayāmapacchimayāmamuhuttādīsu kālabhedabhūtesu samayesu ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti.
问:为什么这里不规定具体的时间,比如指明是哪个季节、哪一年,而只总说“一时”呢?虽然长老们完全清楚每一部经是在哪一年、哪一季、哪一月、哪半月、哪一夜或哪一天所说,也能以智慧予以准确判定;但若说成“如是我闻,于某年、某季、某月、某半月、某夜、某日……”,便不易令人乐于忆持、读诵,乃至教导他人读诵,其语亦过于繁杂。因此,才以一词总摄所有这些含义,而说为“一时”。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha aniyamitavaseneva kālo niddiṭṭho, na utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyametvā niddiṭṭhoti ce? Kiñcāpi etesu saṃvaccharādīsu samayesu yaṃ yaṃ suttaṃ yasmiṃ yasmiṃ saṃvacchare utumhi māse pakkhe rattibhāge divasabhāge vā vuttaṃ, sabbampi taṃ therassa suviditaṃ suvavatthāpitaṃ paññāya. Yasmā pana ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ asukasaṃvacchare asukautumhi asukamāse asukapakkhe asukarattibhāge asukadivasabhāge vā’’ti evaṃ vutte na sakkā sukhena dhāretuṃ vā uddisituṃ vā uddisāpetuṃ vā, bahu ca vattabbaṃ hoti, tasmā ekeneva padena tamatthaṃ samodhānetvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.
世尊在人间与天界极为昭著的生涯中,有许多各自不同的时节,例如:入胎时、诞生时、生起紧迫感时、出家时、行难行苦行时、降魔时、正等觉时、现法安乐住时、说法时、般涅槃时等等。在这诸多时节之中,经中以“一时”所表明的,正是那个被称为“说法时”的时节。又或者,在智慧所应作与悲悯所应作的事业时节中,它指的是悲悯所应作的事业之节;在自利与利他的修行时节中,它指的是利他的修行之节;在大众集会、有两事应作的时节中,它指的是说法之时;在说法与修行的时节中,它指的是说法之时。即针对这些时节中的某一个,说为“一时”。显示巴利原文
Ye vā ime gabbhokkantisamayo jātisamayo saṃvegasamayo abhinikkhamanasamayo dukkarakārikasamayo māravijayasamayo abhisambodhisamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo desanāsamayo parinibbānasamayoti evamādayo bhagavato devamanussesu ativiya pakāsā anekakālappabhedā eva samayā, tesu samayesu desanāsamayasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti. Yo vāyaṃ ñāṇakaruṇākiccasamayesu karuṇākiccasamayo, attahitaparahitappaṭipattisamayesu parahitappaṭipattisamayo, sannipatitānaṃ karaṇīyadvayasamayesu dhammakathāsamayo, desanāpaṭipattisamayesu desanāsamayo, tesu samayesu aññatarasamayaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.
问:既然如此,为何此处不像阿毗达摩那样,用表示处所的格说“yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti”(在那时,欲界善心生起),也不像其他一些经文那样说“yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi”(诸比丘,在那时,比丘远离欲、远离不善法),又不似律藏中那样,用表示工具的格说“tena samayena buddho bhagavā”(那时,佛世尊),却要使用表示相续伴随义的业格,说成“ekaṃ samayaṃ”呢?因为,在那些地方有各自相应的意义,而在这里则有不同的意义。在阿毗达摩和其他经中,有“依处”、“所缘”意义上的“所依”义,还有“以有显有”的意义——即借一种行为的存在来显示另一种行为的特征。在那里,“时”这个词意指时间和聚集,是触等诸法的所依。虽然从究竟义上说,时间并非真实存在,显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha yathā abhidhamme ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’ti (dha. sa. 1) ca ito aññesu suttapadesu ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’ti (a. ni. 4.200) ca bhummavacanena niddeso kato, vinaye ca ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’’ti (pārā. 1) karaṇavacanena niddeso kato, tathā akatvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanena niddeso katoti? Tattha tathā, idha ca aññathā atthasambhavato. Tattha hi abhidhamme ito aññesu ca suttantesu ādhāravisayasaṅkhāto adhikaraṇattho kiriyāya kiriyantaralakkhaṇasaṅkhāto bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇattho ca sambhavatīti. Adhikaraṇañhi kālattho samūhattho ca samayo tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ, tathā kālo sabhāvadhammappavattimattatāya paramatthato avijjamānopi ādhārabhāvena paññāto taṅkhaṇappavattānaṃ tato pubbe parato ca abhāvato yathā ‘‘pubbaṇhe jāto sāyanhe jāto’’tiādīsu. Samūhotipi avayavavinimutto paramatthato avijjamānopi kappanāmattasiddhena rūpena avayavānaṃ ādhārabhāvena paññāpīyati, yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā, yavo yavarāsimhi samuṭṭhito’’tiādīsu. Yasmiṃ kāle dhammapuñje ca kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva kāle dhammapuñje ca phassādayopi hontīti ayañhi tattha attho. Tathā khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassa samayassa bhāvena tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ bhāvo lakkhīyati. Yathā hi ‘‘gāvīsu duyhamānāsu gato, duddhāsu āgato’’ti ettha gāvīnaṃ dohanakiriyāya gamanakiriyā lakkhīyati, evaṃ idhāpi yasmiṃ samayeti vutte ca padatthassa sattāvirahābhāvato satīti ayamattho viññāyamāno eva hotīti samayassa sattākiriyāya cittassa uppādakiriyā phassādīnaṃ bhavanakiriyā ca lakkhīyati. Tathā yasmiṃ samaye yasmiṃ navame khaṇe yasmiṃ yonisomanasikārādihetumhi paccayasamavāye vā sati kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye khaṇe hetumhi paccayasamavāye ca phassādayopi hontīti. Tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ bhummavacanena niddeso kato.
而在律藏中,正如「以食物而住」、「以学习而住」这类说法表示「因」的意思,又如「以斧头砍」、「以锄头挖」这类说法表示「工具」的意思,那里也是同样的道理。要知道,制定学处的那个时刻,即使是法将(舍利弗)等也难以理解。世尊在听到犯戒的事情之后,就以那个时刻作为工具、作为因缘,召集比丘僧团,质问并呵责那个犯事的人;并且不超出犯事发生的时间(也就是紧接犯缘的时刻),便制定下学处,就像制定第三条波罗夷时那样。当时,世尊是观察着制定学处的因缘,才在各处安住的。因此,为了阐明这种意义,在律藏中就使用了表示工具格的表达方式。显示巴利原文
Vinaye ca ‘‘annena vasati, ajjhenena vasatī’’tiādīsu viya hetuattho, ‘‘pharasunā chindati, kudālena khaṇatī’’tiādīsu viya karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Yo hi sikkhāpadapaññattisamayo dhammasenāpatiādīhipi dubbiññeyyo, tena samayena karaṇabhūtena hetubhūtena ca vītikkamaṃ sutvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā otiṇṇavatthukaṃ puggalaṃ paṭipucchitvā vigarahitvā ca taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ otiṇṇasamayasaṅkhātaṃ kālaṃ anatikkamitvā sikkhāpadāni paññāpento tatiyapārājikādīnaṃ viya sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hetuṃ apekkhamāno tattha tattha vihāsi, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ vinaye karaṇavacanena niddeso kato.
然而,此处及相似的情形中,也有“完全相连”的意义。因为在那个时刻,伴随生起之因,这首优陀那生起了;在那一整段时间中,世尊都安住于以圣住为先导的法随观。因此,就像“诵习一个月”等说法那样,为了表明业格的含义,这里使用业格来作说明。显示巴利原文
Idha pana aññasmiñca evaṃjātike accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati. Yasmiñhi samaye saha samuṭṭhānahetunā idaṃ udānaṃ uppannaṃ, accantameva taṃ samayaṃ ariyavihārapubbaṅgamāya dhammapaccavekkhaṇāya bhagavā vihāsi, tasmā ‘‘māsaṃ ajjhetī’’tiādīsu viya upayogatthajotanatthaṃ idha upayogavacanena niddeso kato. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
考量种种具体意义时,或以处格与具格而说;
别处说“时”时用(处格),此处则以业格表述。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Taṃ taṃ atthamapekkhitvā, bhummena karaṇena ca; Aññatra samayo vutto, upayogena so idhā’’ti.
然而,古师们这样解释:“‘yasmiṃ samaye’(于某时)、‘tena samayena’(尔时)、‘ekaṃ samayaṃ’(一时)这些说法,只是言词上的差别,在一切情况下,其意义都应是处格。”因此,即便说成“ekaṃ samayaṃ”(一时),也应了知它的意义是“在某一时”(ekasmiṃ samaye)。显示巴利原文
Porāṇā pana vaṇṇayanti – ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye’’ti vā ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti vā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vā abhilāpamattabhedo esa niddeso, sabbattha bhummameva atthoti. Tasmā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vuttepi ekasmiṃ samayeti attho veditabbo.
“世尊”意为尊贵。世间对尊贵者,便称为“bhagavā”。而这位(佛陀)因为具足一切功德,是一切众生中的尊贵者,所以应知他被称为“世尊”。古人也说:显示巴利原文
Bhagavāti garu. Garuñhi loke ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vadanti. Ayañca sabbaguṇavisiṭṭhatāya sabbasattānaṃ garu, tasmā bhagavāti veditabbo. Porāṇehipi vuttaṃ –
“世尊”一词最殊胜,“世尊”一词最无上;
他具足尊贵,堪受尊敬,因此称为“世尊”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavāti vacanamuttamaṃ; Garu gāravayutto so, bhagavā tena vuccatī’’ti.
其中,表示最胜的词“seṭṭha”称为“最胜”,因其伴随最胜的德行。或说,“vuccatī”(被称作)即言说,也就是意义。所谓“世尊”一词是最胜的,意思是:以“世尊”一词所表达的意义,即是最胜的意义。所谓“世尊”一词是无上的,同样应依此理趣理解其义。“应受尊敬者”:即具足尊贵的状态,因其系于尊贵的功德,或因值得特别尊敬,故为应受尊敬者。如此,应知“世尊”一词是具足殊胜德行、于众生中最上、尊贵、应受尊敬的同义词。再者:显示巴利原文
Tattha seṭṭhavācakavacanaṃ seṭṭhanti vuttaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato. Atha vā vuccatīti vacanaṃ, attho. Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhanti bhagavāti iminā vacanena vacanīyo yo attho, so seṭṭhoti attho. Bhagavāti vacanamuttamanti etthāpi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Gāravayuttoti garubhāvayutto garuguṇayogato visesagarukaraṇārahatāya vā gāravayutto. Evaṃ guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagarugāravādhivacanaṃ bhagavāti idaṃ vacananti veditabbaṃ. Apica –
“Bhagī”指含有部分,“bhajī”指亲近,“bhāgī”指具有分享,“vibhattavā”指已分析区分。
“Akāsi bhagga”意为“他作了破坏”,“garu”指“尊贵”,“bhāgyavā”指“具足福德”。
“subhāvitattano”:以众多方法善修习自身。
“bhavantago”意为“到达有之尽头者”,因此他被称为“世尊”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhagī bhajī bhāgī vibhattavā iti, Akāsi bhagganti garūti bhāgyavā; Bahūhi ñāyehi subhāvitattano, Bhavantago so bhagavāti vuccatī’’ti. –
依《义释》(《大义释》84)所阐述的方式:显示巴利原文
Niddese (mahāni. 84) āgatanayena –
“福具足、破具足,与诸般成就相应,复以种种分悉了别;
已享有、已弃诸行,于诸有中,是故称名为世尊。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto, bhagehi ca vibhattavā; Bhattavā vantagamano, bhavesu bhagavā tato’’ti. –
应当依据这首偈颂来理解“世尊”一词的含义。此义在《清净道论》中已从一切方面加以解说,因此,应按照那里所述的方法展开解释。显示巴利原文
Imāya gāthāya ca vasena bhagavāti padassa attho veditabbo. So panāyaṃ attho sabbākārena visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.142) vutto, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva vivaritabbo.
此外,“世尊”也可理解为:因希求“分”,或因舍弃“分”。如来对于布施、持戒等波罗蜜法,以及禅那、解脱等超人法,希求、亲近、修习、多修习,故称世尊。或者,对于这些法,他怀着“怎样才能在应调伏有情的相续中生起呢”的心愿而希求、期盼,故称世尊。又或者,他舍弃了称为“分”的自在与名声,犹如丢弃唾液团一般毫无恋着,故称世尊。确实,如来对手中掌握的四洲自在——其可比转轮王吉祥、与天界主权相当——以及依转轮王成就、以七宝闪耀的名声,皆视如草芥,无恋着地舍弃,而后出家,证得正等正觉。因此,对于这些吉祥等诸“分”已舍弃,故称世尊。再有一种解释:星宿名为“分”,它们随星宿而运行转起,故称为“分”。须弥山、持双山、郁单越、雪山等器世间差别所依的庄严,由于住劫的缘故,这些“分”也被舍弃;因为超越了住在其中的有情净居天,以断除系属于它们的欲贪而舍弃。如此,由“已舍弃诸分”而称为世尊。应依此理趣理解“世尊”一词的意义。显示巴利原文
Apica bhāge vani, bhage vā vamīti bhagavā. Tathāgato hi dānasīlādipāramidhamme jhānavimokkhādiuttarimanussadhamme vani bhaji sevi bahulamakāsi, tasmā bhagavā. Atha vā teyeva ‘‘veneyyasattasantānesu kathaṃ nu kho uppajjeyyu’’nti vani abhipatthayīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhagasaṅkhātaṃ issariyaṃ yasañca vami uggiri kheḷapiṇḍaṃ viya anapekkho chaḍḍayīti bhagavā. Tathā hi tathāgato hatthagataṃ cakkavattisiriṃ devalokādhipaccasadisaṃ cātuddīpissariyaṃ, cakkavattisampattisannissayañca sattaratanasamujjalaṃ yasaṃ tiṇāyapi amaññamāno nirapekkho pahāya abhinikkhamitvā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tasmā ime siriādike bhage vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāni nāma nakkhattāni, tehi samaṃ gacchanti pavattantīti bhagā. Sineruyugandharauttarakuruhimavantādibhājanalokavisesasannissayasobhā kappaṭṭhitibhāvato, tepi bhage vami, tannivāsisattāvāsasamatikkamanato tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena pajahīti. Evampi bhage vamīti bhagavāti evamādinā nayena bhagavāti padassa attho veditabbo.
在这里,以“如是我闻”这句话,依所听闻的方式宣说法,令世尊的法身现前;以此安慰那些因见不到导师而焦躁的人,让他们知道:“这并非已经过去的老师的教法,这就是你们的老师。”正如世尊所说:“阿难,我所宣说、制定的法和律,在我离去后就是你们的老师。”而“一时世尊”这句话,则显示了世尊的色身已不复存在,成就了色身的般涅槃;以此激发那些沉醉于寿命的人心生悚惧:“像这样宣说正法、具足十力、身如金刚聚合的世尊尚且般涅槃,对其他生命又能生起什么希望呢?”同时也使他们对正法生起精进。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā cettha evaṃ me sutanti vacanena yathāsutaṃ dhammaṃ savanavasena bhāsanto bhagavato dhammasarīraṃ paccakkhaṃ karoti, tena ‘‘nayidaṃ atikkantasatthukaṃ pāvacanaṃ, ayaṃ vo satthā’’ti satthu adassanena ukkaṇṭhitaṃ janaṃ samassāseti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘yo kho, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.216; mi. pa. 4.1.1). Ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavāti vacanena tasmiṃ samaye bhagavato avijjamānabhāvaṃ dassento rūpakāyaparinibbānaṃ sādheti, tena ‘‘evaṃvidhassa nāma dhammassa desetā dasabaladharo vajirasaṅghātasamānakāyo sopi bhagavā parinibbuto, kenaññena jīvite āsā janetabbā’’ti jīvitamadamattaṃ janaṃ saṃvejeti, saddhamme cassa ussāhaṃ janeti.
「如是」表说法成就,因为它标示出随后将开演的整部经为「如是」。「我闻」表声闻成就与听闻成就,阐明了由那位具足无碍解、被世尊于五种功德中誉为第一的法藏长老亲自听闻的意义,同时也显示出「这是我亲自听闻,并非辗转传闻」之义。「一时」表时间成就,世尊住于优楼频螺的那一时间,体现了佛陀出世所带来的庄严;佛陀出世,便是最上的时间成就。「世尊」表说法者成就,因为它显示了具足功德、为众生中最上者的尊贵状态。显示巴利原文
Evanti ca bhaṇanto desanāsampattiṃ niddisati, vakkhamānassa sakalasuttassa evanti nidassanato. Me sutanti sāvakasampattiṃ savanasampattiñca niddisati, paṭisambhidāpattena pañcasu ṭhānesu bhagavatā etadagge ṭhapitena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena sutabhāvadīpanato ‘‘tañca kho mayāva sutaṃ, na anussutikaṃ, na paramparābhata’’nti imassa catthassa dīpanato. Ekaṃ samayanti kālasampattiṃ niddisati bhagavato uruvelāyaṃ viharaṇasamayabhāvena buddhuppādappaṭimaṇḍitabhāvadīpanato. Buddhuppādaparamā hi kālasampadā. Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ niddisati guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagarubhāvadīpanato.
「优楼频螺」意为「大沙聚」,即大沙堆。或者,「优楼」指沙,「频螺」指边界;为了越过边界而运来沙,因此称为优楼频螺。对此应作如是理解。显示巴利原文
Uruvelāyanti mahāvelāyaṃ, mahante vālukārāsimhīti attho. Atha vā urūti vālukā vuccati, velāti mariyādā. Velātikkamanahetu ābhatā uru uruvelāti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
往昔,佛陀尚未出世时,有一万位苦行者住于此地。他们共同制定了这样的约定:「身业与语业,他人尚可察觉,但意业则隐微难知。因此,若有人生起邪思惟,他应当自我呵责,并用钵运沙,倾泻于此,作为对他的惩罚。」此后,一旦有人生起如此邪思惟,便用钵运沙,倾倒于此。如此日积月累,便形成了一座大沙堆。后来的人围绕这座沙堆,将其作为塔庙之所。正是依据这一典故,注疏才说:「『优楼频螺』意为『大沙聚』,即大沙堆,应作如是理解。」显示巴利原文
Atīte kira anuppanne buddhe dasasahassatāpasā tasmiṃ padese viharantā ‘‘kāyakammavacīkammāni paresampi pākaṭāni honti, manokammaṃ pana apākaṭaṃ. Tasmā yo micchāvitakkaṃ vitakketi, so attanāva attānaṃ codetvā pattapuṭena vālukaṃ āharitvā imasmiṃ ṭhāne ākiratu, idamassa daṇḍakamma’’nti katikavattaṃ katvā tato paṭṭhāya yo tādisaṃ vitakkaṃ vitakketi, so tattha pattapuṭena vālukaṃ āharitvā ākirati. Evaṃ tattha anukkamena mahāvālukārāsi jāto, tato naṃ pacchimā janatā parikkhipitvā cetiyaṭṭhānamakāsi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘uruvelāyanti mahāvelāyaṃ, mahante vālukārāsimhīti attho daṭṭhabbo’’ti.
“住”这个词,通指在威仪路、天住、梵住、圣住之中,具足任何一种。在此处则应理解为:在行、住、坐、卧诸威仪中,显示他以坐的威仪相应,也显示他具足圣住。其中,因为以某种威仪路取代另一种威仪路,从而不中断地维持身体、令其持续运作,所以这里的“住”应依据威仪路住来理解其义。另外,因为世尊以天住等方式,为诸有情施行种种利益——行利益、奉献利益、引导利益、令生利益,因此也可以从“行种种利益”这一角度来理解“住”的意义。显示巴利原文
Viharatīti avisesena iriyāpathadibbabrahmaariyavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgitāparidīpanaṃ. Idha pana ṭhānanisajjāgamanasayanappabhedesu iriyāpathesu āsanasaṅkhātairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ ariyavihārasamaṅgitāparidīpanañcāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha yasmā ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavatteti, tasmā viharatīti padassa iriyāpathavihāravasenettha attho veditabbo. Yasmā pana bhagavā dibbavihārādīhi sattānaṃ vividhaṃ hitaṃ harati upaharati upaneti uppādeti, tasmā tesampi vasena vividhaṃ haratīti evamattho veditabbo.
“河”:因为流淌、流动,所以称为河。“河”的,也就是河流、溪谷的意思。“尼连禅河”:因为它的水没有污浊,本来应说为“无浊水”(nelañjalā),但将“拉”(la)音变为“罗”(ra)音,而说成了“尼连禅”(nerañjarā),意思是远离了泥、水藻、苔藓等过失的水。也有人认为:“本来应说‘青水’(nīlajalā),却变成了‘尼连禅’。”应当知道,这实际上就是这条河的名字。为了显示世尊所住的这条河岸,于是接着说“菩提树下”。在这里,“菩提”在“菩提是指四种道中的智”这句话中,指的是道智;在“证得菩提,具足胜广智慧”这句话中,指的是一切知智。世尊正是在这里证得了这两种菩提,因此这棵树也获得了“菩提树”的名称。或者,世尊以七觉支而觉悟,称为菩提;由于依靠觉悟,这棵树也获得了“菩提树”的名称。“菩提树”的“根”,意思是附近。这个“根”字,在“根,乃至须拔取像甘草根那样一点点”等句中,是指根茎、根源;在“贪是不善根”等句中,是指不共的因;在“正午时分树影全部覆蔽、无风而树叶飘落,这样的范围称为树下”等句中,就是指附近。显示巴利原文
Najjāti nadati sandatīti nadī, tassā najjā, nadiyā ninnagāyāti attho. Nerañjarāyāti nelaṃ jalamassāti ‘‘nelañjalāyā’’ti vattabbe lakārassa rakāraṃ katvā ‘‘nerañjarāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, kaddamasevālapaṇakādidosarahitasalilāyāti attho. Keci ‘‘nīlajalāyāti vattabbe nerañjarāyāti vutta’’nti vadanti. Nāmameva vā etaṃ etissā nadiyāti veditabbaṃ. Tassā nadiyā tīre yattha bhagavā vihāsi, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bodhirukkhamūle’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’nti ettha (cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 121) maggañāṇaṃ bodhīti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pappoti bodhiṃ varabhūrimedhaso’’ti ettha (dī. ni. 3.217) sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Tadubhayampi bodhiṃ bhagavā ettha pattoti rukkhopi bodhirukkhotveva nāmaṃ labhi. Atha vā satta bojjhaṅge bujjhīti bhagavā bodhi, tena bujjhantena sannissitattā so rukkhopi bodhirukkhoti nāmaṃ labhi, tassa bodhirukkhassa. Mūleti samīpe. Ayañhi mūlasaddo ‘‘mūlāni uddhareyya antamaso usīranāḷamattānipī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.195) mūlamūle dissati. ‘‘Lobho akusalamūla’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.305) asādhāraṇahetumhi. ‘‘Yāvatā majjhanhike kāle chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni patanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūla’’ntiādīsu samīpe. Idhāpi samīpe adhippeto, tasmā bodhirukkhassa mūle samīpeti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“初正觉”的意思是:最初成为正觉,也就是一切中之最初的意思。至此,法藏者在安立《自说经》的因缘时,已将时间、地点、说法者等差别悉皆清楚地显示出来。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamābhisambuddhoti paṭhamaṃ abhisambuddho hutvā, sabbapaṭhamaṃyevāti attho. Ettāvatā dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena udānadesanāya nidānaṃ ṭhapentena kāladesadesakāpadesā saha visesena pakāsitā honti.
有人问:“结集法与律时,为何要说因缘语?难道不应只结集世尊亲口所说的言教吗?”答:这是为了使教法久住、不被遗忘且令人信受。将教法与时间、地点、说法者、事缘等相系属而安立,教法便能长久住世、无有忘失并令人信受,就如同世间的判决须依于地点、时间、原由、证人等一样。正是基于此理,大迦叶尊者问道:“贤友阿难,第一《自说经》是在何处所说?”等等。而持掌法藏的阿难尊者回答时,便说了“如是我闻”等,作为这部《自说经》的因缘。显示巴利原文
Etthāha ‘‘kasmā dhammavinayasaṅgahe kayiramāne nidānavacanaṃ vuttaṃ, nanu bhagavatā bhāsitavacanasseva saṅgaho kātabbo’’ti? Vuccate – desanāya ciraṭṭhitiasammosasaddheyyabhāvasampādanatthaṃ. Kāladesadesakavatthuādīhi upanibandhitvā ṭhapitā hi desanā ciraṭṭhitikā hoti asammosā saddheyyā ca desakālakattuhetunimittehi upanibaddho viya vohāravinicchayo. Teneva ca āyasmatā mahākassapena ‘‘paṭhamaṃ, āvuso ānanda, udānaṃ kattha bhāsita’’ntiādinā desādīsu pucchāya katāya vissajjanaṃ karontena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādinā udānassa nidānaṃ bhāsitanti.
再者,阐明因缘语也是为了彰显大师的成就。如来世尊不依过去世的习行、推测、圣教、推理等,因此“正自觉者”的成就得以成立。正自觉者的智慧在一切处所皆无碍运行,于所知的诸法亦无边际,故无需依靠前世的习行等。同样,如来完全不存在对老师的执著、对法的悭吝、对教法与弟子的贪爱——即毫无“师执”,因此“诸漏尽者”的成就得以成立。彻底断尽一切烦恼者,在任何情况下都不可能现起师执等事,他的利他之行极为清净。如此,通过显示说法者已完全远离破坏正见与戒成就的究竟无明与贪爱等过失,再通过显示圆满的智慧成就与断除烦恼的成就,便建立了前两种如来无畏;进而,由于在障道法与出离法上毫无迷惑,也就建立了后两种如来无畏。因此,世尊圆满具足四种无畏以及自利利他的修行,便由因缘语显示出来。各处的因缘语,总能随顺当时在场听法众生的意乐,以切合时机与事缘而起的辩才来显示法的开示。而在本经这里,则是通过显示体证解脱之乐、对缘起的作意来配合理解。所以说:显示巴利原文
Apica satthu sampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Tathāgatassa hi bhagavato pubbaracanānumānāgamatakkābhāvato sambuddhattasiddhi. Na hi sammāsambuddhassa pubbaracanādīhi attho atthi sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya ekappamāṇattā ñeyyadhammesu. Tathā ācariyamuṭṭhidhammamacchariyasāsanasāvakānurāgābhāvato khīṇāsavattasiddhi. Na hi sabbaso parikkhīṇāsavassa katthacipi ācariyamuṭṭhiādīnaṃ sambhavoti suvisuddhassa parānuggahappavatti. Iti desakadosabhūtānaṃ diṭṭhisīlasampattidūsakānaṃ accantaṃ avijjātaṇhānaṃ abhāvasaṃsūcakehi ñāṇasampadāpahānasampadābhibyañjakehi ca sambuddhavisuddhabhāvehi purimavesārajjadvayasiddhi, tato ca antarāyikaniyyānikadhammesu sammohābhāvasiddhito pacchimavesārajjadvayasiddhīti bhagavato catuvesārajjasamannāgamo attahitaparahitappaṭipatti ca nidānavacanena pakāsitā honti, tattha tattha sampattaparisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ ṭhānuppattikappaṭibhānena dhammadesanādīpanato. Idha pana vimuttisukhappaṭisaṃvedanapaṭiccasamuppādamanasikārapakāsanenāti yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘satthu sampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti.
同样,阐明因缘语也是为了彰显教法的成就。世尊的一切行为皆为智与悲所摄护,因此绝无无意义的修行或纯粹的自利之行。正自觉者的所有身业、语业、意业,完全为了利益他人而转起。当他随顺这些行为的转起而作宣说时,它们便以现法利益、后世利益与究竟义利,恰如其分地成为对众生的教诫,因此它是“教法”,而非诗词创作。大师如此的威仪,通过因缘语,连同时间、地点、说法者、众会等,在各处被恰当地显示出来。在本经这里,则是通过正等觉、体证解脱之乐、对缘起的作意来配合理解。所以说:“为了彰显教法的成就而说因缘语。”显示巴利原文
Tathā sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Ñāṇakaruṇāpariggahitasabbakiriyassa hi bhagavato natthi niratthakā paṭipatti attahitā vā. Tasmā paresaṃyeva atthāya pavattasabbakiriyassa sammāsambuddhassa sakalampi kāyavacīmanokammaṃ yathāpavattaṃ vuccamānaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ sattānaṃ anusāsanaṭṭhena sāsanaṃ, na kabbaracanā. Tayidaṃ satthu caritaṃ kāladesadesakaparisāpadesādīhi saddhiṃ tattha tattha nidānavacanena yathārahaṃ pakāsīyati, idha pana abhisambodhivimuttisukhappaṭisaṃvedanapaṭiccasamuppādamanasikārenāti yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti.
再者,为了显示教法是衡量标准,所以先显示大师即是衡量标准——这正是叙说因缘的目的。至于此处所显示的、大师与教法作为标准性,应依前文所述之理路来理解。也就是说,通过“世尊”这一词,既显示了如来断除了贪、瞋、痴等一切烦恼垢秽与恶行过失,也显示了他是一切众生中最上的,更显示了他具足不共他人的智与悲等殊胜功德。这些含义,已由因缘语完全揭示。以上仅是略示因缘用途的梗概。显示巴利原文
Apica satthuno pamāṇabhāvappakāsanena sāsanassa pamāṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Sā cassa pamāṇabhāvadassanatā heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā. Bhagavāti hi iminā tathāgatassa rāgadosamohādisabbakilesamaladuccaritādidosappahānadīpanena , sabbasattuttamabhāvadīpanena ca anaññasādhāraṇañāṇakaruṇādiguṇavisesayogaparidīpanena, ayamattho sabbathā pakāsito hotīti idamettha nidānavacanappayojanassa mukhamattadassanaṃ.
应当了知,从“如是我闻”开始,乃至“宣说了此自说”这句为止的这段文字,便是这部《自说经》的因缘。这正是结集者在结集时所说的话语,其目的,是为了从初始就阐明:世尊是依于怎样的身行与心行之修行方式,而宣说这部《自说经》的。显示巴利原文
Taṃ panetaṃ ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti ārabhitvā yāva ‘‘imaṃ udānaṃ udānesī’’ti padaṃ, tāva imassa udānassa nidānanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ yathā paṭipanno bhagavā imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi, ādito paṭṭhāya tassa kāyikacetasikappaṭipattiyā pakāsanatthaṃ saṅgītikārehi saṅgītikāle bhāsitavacanaṃ.
或许有人会质疑:“‘此有故彼有’等语,难道不正是世尊亲口所说吗?除了大师,谁能开示缘起?”此言确实不虚。然而,就如同世尊在菩提树下,以审察法体性的方式,于心中对缘起作了意一样;其后,为了觉悟那些可被度化的亲眷,他于《缘起狮子吼经》等经中予以宣说。结集法的诸大长老,随顺他宣说时的语句与方式,将这一对缘起的作意作为事由,从而结集了世尊所说的这部《自说经》的因缘。因此,应当如此确定:前文所述,仅是结集者的话语。此后的诸经,也是这个道理。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’tiādi bhagavato eva vacanaṃ bhavituṃ arahati, na hi satthāraṃ muñcitvā añño paṭiccasamuppādaṃ desetuṃ samattho hotīti? Saccametaṃ, yathā pana bhagavā bodhirukkhamūle dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇavasena paṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasākāsi, tatheva naṃ bodhaneyyabandhavānaṃ bodhanatthaṃ paṭiccasamuppādasīhanādasuttādīsu desitassa ca vacanānaṃ desitākārassa anukaraṇavasena paṭiccasamuppādassa manasikāraṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā bhagavatā bhāsitassa imassa udānassa dhammasaṅgāhakā mahātherā nidānaṃ saṅgāyiṃsūti yathāvuttavacanaṃ saṅgītikārānameva vacananti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Ito paresupi suttantesu eseva nayo.
于此,当知经有四种安立:自意经、他意经、问缘经、事缘经。正如虽有多达百千部的众多经典,若从杂染分等安立门来看,不超出十六种;同样,所有这些经典,若从自意等经的安立来看,也不超出这四种。然而,在此自意经与事缘经之间,虽可能因兴起的意趣相续与问答相续,而与他意经、问缘经产生交错;但自意经与事缘经彼此并无交错,因此这里不适用无遗余的安立门方式。或者,因为其余三种安立皆含摄于此,从根本安立来说,便称为四种经的安立。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca attajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo pucchāvasiko aṭṭhuppattikoti cattāro suttanikkhepā veditabbā. Yathā hi anekasataanekasahassabhedānipi suttāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādipaṭṭhānanayena soḷasavidhataṃ nātivattanti, evaṃ tāni sabbānipi attajjhāsayādisuttanikkhepavasena catubbidhabhāvaṃ nātivattanti. Kāmañcettha attajjhāsayassa aṭṭhuppattiyā ca parajjhāsayapucchāvasikehi saddhiṃ saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati ajjhāsayānusandhipucchānusandhisambhavato, attajjhāsayaaṭṭhuppattīnaṃ aññamaññaṃ saṃsaggo natthīti niravaseso paṭṭhānanayo na sambhavati. Tadantogadhattā vā sambhavantānaṃ sesanikkhepānaṃ mūlanikkhepavasena cattāro suttanikkhepāti vuttaṃ.
于此释其词义:「安立」即放置;经的安立为「经安立」,意思是经的宣说。又,「被放置者」称为「安立」,经本身即是安立,故为「经安立」。自己的意趣为「自意趣」,以此作为原因而说此经,故名「自意趣经」;或者说,此经以自己之意趣为因,故名。于「他意趣经」,同理。依于问而成为「问缘」;此经具有问缘,故为「问缘经」。作为经之宣说所依事之义的生起,为「义生起」;义生起即是「事缘」;此经具有事缘,故为「事缘经」。再者,经依此而被安置,故此为「安立」,即自意趣等本身。然而,在此义释中:自己的意趣为「自意趣」;他人的意趣为「他意趣」;被问者为「问」,即所应问之义。依问而起的受法者之语为「问缘」,为配合「安立」一词,而以阳性词说为「问缘经」。同样,义生起本身即是「事缘经」。于此,应如是了知词义。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – nikkhipanaṃ nikkhepo, suttassa nikkhepo suttanikkhepo, suttadesanāti attho. Nikkhipīyatīti vā nikkhepo, suttaṃ eva nikkhepo suttanikkhepo. Attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, so assa atthi kāraṇabhūtoti attajjhāsayo, attano ajjhāsayo etassāti vā attajjhāsayo. Parajjhāsayepi eseva nayo. Pucchāya vaso pucchāvaso, so etassa atthīti pucchāvasiko. Suttadesanāya vatthubhūtassa atthassa uppatti atthuppatti, atthuppatti eva aṭṭhuppatti, sā etassa atthīti aṭṭhuppattiko. Atha vā nikkhipīyati suttaṃ etenāti nikkhepo, attajjhāsayādi eva. Etasmiṃ pana atthavikappe attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo. Paresaṃ ajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo. Pucchīyatīti pucchā, pucchitabbo attho. Pucchanavasena pavattaṃ dhammappaṭiggāhakānaṃ vacanaṃ pucchāvasaṃ, tadeva nikkhepasaddāpekkhāya pucchāvasikoti pulliṅgavasena vuttaṃ. Tathā atthuppattiyeva aṭṭhuppattikoti evamettha attho veditabbo.
在此,由于不观待他人根器成熟等因素,自意经单独成为经之安立是合理的,因为其说法唯依自己的意趣而发起,是为令法性安立。然而,他意经与问缘经,是以他人的意趣与请问作为说法生起之因,当它们生起时,为何不摄于事缘中?或者,问缘经与事缘经是随顺他意而说,为何不摄于他意经中?不应如此责难。因为,他人之修愿、问难等分别因缘所生的说法生起之因,被取为事缘,所以他意经与问缘经另外别立。例如《梵网经》《法嗣经》等,以称赞、讥毁、利养等事生起为说法之缘,称为事缘;无人请问,唯以意趣为缘而说者,为他意经;依问而说者,为问缘经。此义甚明。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca paresaṃ indriyaparipākādikāraṇanirapekkhattā attajjhāsayassa visuṃ suttanikkhepabhāvo yutto kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva dhammatantiṭhapanatthaṃ pavattitadesanattā, parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ pana paresaṃ ajjhāsayapucchānaṃ desanāpavattihetubhūtānaṃ uppattiyaṃ pavattitānaṃ kathamaṭṭhuppattiyā anavarodho, pucchāvasikaaṭṭhuppattipubbakānaṃ vā parajjhāsayānurodhena pavattitānaṃ kathaṃ parajjhāsaye anavarodhoti? Na codetabbametaṃ. Paresañhi abhinīhāraparipucchādivinicchayādivinimuttasseva suttantadesanākāraṇuppādassa aṭṭhuppattibhāvena gahitattā parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi brahmajāladhammadāyādasuttādīnaṃ vaṇṇāvaṇṇaāmisuppādādidesanānimittaṃ aṭṭhuppatti vuccati, paresaṃ pucchāya vinā ajjhāsayameva nimittaṃ katvā desito parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasena desito pucchāvasikoti pākaṭoyamatthoti.
其中,最初的三部《菩提经》、《目支邻陀经》、《舍寿行经》、《审察经》、《戏论想经》,这些优陀那的安立是自意趣。《虎虎经》、《婆罗门生经》、《跋希耶经》,这些优陀那的安立是问缘。《王经》、《恭敬经》、《沐浴经》、《行乞食者经》、《工匠经》、《牧牛经》、《孙陀利迦经》、《母经》、《破僧经》、《井经》、《如来出现经》、《牟尼行经》、《巴吒厘村经》、两部《达婆经》,这些优陀那的安立是事缘。《巴利雷耶经》、《爱经》、《龙萨马拉经》、《毗舍佉经》,这些优陀那的安立是自意趣与他意趣。其余五十一经的安立是他意趣。应如此了知这些优陀那依自意趣等而有安立上的差别。显示巴利原文
Tattha paṭhamādīni tīṇi bodhisuttāni mucalindasuttaṃ, āyusaṅkhārossajjanasuttaṃ, paccavekkhaṇasuttaṃ, papañcasaññāsuttanti imesaṃ udānānaṃ attajjhāsayo nikkhepo. Huhuṅkasuttaṃ, brāhmaṇajātikasuttaṃ, bāhiyasuttanti imesaṃ udānānaṃ pucchāvasiko nikkhepo. Rājasuttaṃ, sakkārasuttaṃ, ucchādanasuttaṃ, piṇḍapātikasuttaṃ, sippasuttaṃ, gopālasuttaṃ, sundarikasuttaṃ , mātusuttaṃ, saṅghabhedakasuttaṃ, udapānasuttaṃ, tathāgatuppādasuttaṃ, moneyyasuttaṃ, pāṭaligāmiyasuttaṃ, dvepi dabbasuttānīti etesaṃ udānānaṃ aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo. Pālileyyasuttaṃ, piyasuttaṃ, nāgasamālasuttaṃ, visākhāsuttañcāti imesaṃ udānānaṃ attajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo ca nikkhepo. Sesānaṃ ekapaññāsāya suttānaṃ parajjhāsayo nikkhepo. Evametesaṃ udānānaṃ attajjhāsayādivasena nikkhepaviseso veditabbo.
在此,凡是世尊当面对比丘们宣说的优陀那,那些比丘便依所说之经,以言语熟习、以心意随观,并告知法藏者。至于世尊未当面为比丘们宣说的优陀那,后来世尊也会再为法藏者宣说。如此,具寿阿难尊者将这一切汇集一处而持守,教导比丘们。后来在第一次结集时,便将其结集,统称为《优陀那》。应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yāni udānāni bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ sammukhā bhāsitāni, tāni tehi yathābhāsitasuttāni vacasā paricitāni manasānupekkhitāni dhammabhaṇḍāgārikassa kathitāni. Yāni pana bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ asammukhā bhāsitāni, tānipi aparabhāge bhagavatā dhammabhaṇḍāgārikassa puna bhāsitāni. Evaṃ sabbānipi tāni āyasmā ānando ekajjhaṃ katvā dhārento bhikkhūnañca vācento aparabhāge paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle udānantveva saṅgahaṃ āropesīti veditabbaṃ.
在「tena kho pana samayena」等句中,「tena samayena」是处所义的具格,「kho pana」为小品词,意为「于彼时」。那么,是于何时?即世尊住于优楼频螺,尼连禅河畔,菩提树下,初成正觉之时。于彼时。「Sattāhaṃ」即七个日夜,这是表示彻底连续关联义的目的格。因为世尊在那七日中,无有间断、完全以果等至之乐而安住,故依彻底连续关联,说为目的格「sattāhaṃ」。「Ekapallaṅkena」:从吹舍佉月满月之日,太阳尚未西沉时,在无败最胜金刚座上结跏趺坐以来,一次也不曾起身,即以那单一的结跏趺坐而安住。显示巴利原文
Tena kho pana samayenātiādīsu tena samayenāti ca bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, kho panāti nipāto, tasmiṃ samayeti attho. Kasmiṃ pana samaye? Yaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā uruvelāyaṃ viharati najjā nerañjarāya tīre bodhirukkhamūle paṭhamābhisambuddho. Tasmiṃ samaye. Sattāhanti satta ahāni sattāhaṃ, accantasaṃyogatthe etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Yasmā bhagavā taṃ sattāhaṃ nirantaratāya accantameva phalasamāpattisukhena vihāsi, tasmā sattāhanti accantasaṃyogavasena upayogavacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Ekapallaṅkenāti visākhāpuṇṇamāya anatthaṅgateyeva sūriye aparājitapallaṅkavare vajirāsane nisinnakālato paṭṭhāya sakimpi anuṭṭhahitvā yathāābhujitena ekeneva pallaṅkena .
“领受解脱之乐”的意思是:正领受着解脱之乐——也就是果等至之乐,而坐。其中,“解脱”有五种:彼分解脱、镇伏解脱、正断解脱、止息解脱、出离解脱。在这五种解脱中,凡是由布施应施物等种种功德支分,以及由名色差别等种种观慧支分,在尚未退失该支分的期间,从种种相对立的事物中脱离出来,那种脱离与舍断——例如:由布施从悭吝、贪等中脱离;由持戒从杀生等中脱离;由确立名色从有身见中脱离;由把握缘从无因见、不平等因见中脱离;进而其后,由度疑清净从疑惑不定的状态中脱离;由观察聚灭从“我、我所”的执取中脱离;由分别道与非道之清净从误认非道为道的想中脱离;由见到生起从断见中脱离;由见到衰灭从常见中脱离;由见到怖畏从于可怖畏事生起无怖畏想中脱离;由见过患从乐想中脱离;由厌离随观从喜乐想中脱离;由欲解脱智从不想解脱的状态中脱离;由舍智从不能舍的状态中脱离;由随顺智从与法住、涅槃相违逆的状态中脱离;由种姓智从以诸行为相的状态中脱离——这便称为“彼分解脱”。显示巴利原文
Vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti vimuttisukhaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvediyamāno nisinno hotīti attho. Tattha vimuttīti tadaṅgavimutti, vikkhambhanavimutti, samucchedavimutti, paṭippassaddhivimutti, nissaraṇavimuttīti pañca vimuttiyo. Tāsu yaṃ deyyadhammapariccāgādīhi tehi tehi guṇaṅgehi nāmarūpaparicchedādīhi vipassanaṅgehi ca yāva tassa tassa aṅgassa aparihānivasena pavatti, tāva taṃtaṃpaṭipakkhato vimuccanato vimuccanaṃ pahānaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ ? Dānena macchariyalobhādito, sīlena pāṇātipātādito, nāmarūpavavatthānena sakkāyadiṭṭhito, paccayapariggahena ahetuvisamahetudiṭṭhīhi, tasseva aparabhāgena kaṅkhāvitaraṇena kathaṃkathībhāvato, kalāpasammasanena ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti gāhato, maggāmaggavavatthānena amagge maggasaññāya, udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā, vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā, bhayadassanena sabhaye abhayasaññāya, ādīnavadassanena assādasaññāya, nibbidānupassanena abhiratisaññāya, muccitukamyatāñāṇena amuccitukamyatāya, upekkhāñāṇena anupekkhāya, anulomena dhammaṭṭhitiyaṃ nibbāne ca paṭilomabhāvato, gotrabhunā saṅkhāranimittabhāvato vimuccanaṃ, ayaṃ tadaṅgavimutti nāma. Yaṃ pana upacārappanābhedena samādhinā yāvassa aparihānivasena pavatti, tāva kāmacchandādīnaṃ nīvaraṇānañceva, vitakkādīnañca paccanīkadhammānaṃ, anuppattisaññitaṃ vimuccanaṃ, ayaṃ vikkhambhanavimutti nāma. Yaṃ catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato ariyassa santāne yathārahaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 277; vibha. 628) nayena vuttassa samudayapakkhiyassa kilesagaṇassa puna accantaṃ appavattibhāvena samucchedappahānavasena vimuccanaṃ, ayaṃ samucchedavimutti nāma. Yaṃ pana phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddhattaṃ kilesānaṃ, ayaṃ paṭippassaddhivimutti nāma. Sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭattā pana sabbasaṅkhāravimuttaṃ nibbānaṃ, ayaṃ nissaraṇavimutti nāma. Idha pana bhagavato nibbānārammaṇā phalavimutti adhippetā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti vimuttisukhaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvediyamāno nisinno hotīti attho’’ti.
“解脱”,是指由于止息诸随烦恼而令心得解脱的状态;或者,可以理解为如此解脱的心本身。由彼解脱所生、或与之相应的乐,即是“解脱之乐”。依据“尊者,世尊所说的存在于寂静乐中的那种舍”这句话,这里的舍也应当视为乐。正如《迷惑冰消》中所说:“然而舍由于寂静的缘故,便被说成即是乐。”因为世尊入的是第四禅的阿拉汉果等至,而非其他。又或者,如同在“其等的止息是乐”等文句中所说的那样,诸行之苦的止息便称为乐;同样地,由于在究竟果中获得了止息一切烦恼之苦的状态,所以这里的“止息解脱”本身便应视为乐。这种解脱之乐,可依道心路过程中以及异时生起的果心转起差别,分为两种。因为在每一个圣道的无间之后,便会生起作为其各自异熟、且以涅槃为所缘的两个或三个果心,这是由于出世间善心为无间异熟的缘故。当那速行回合中生起圣道时,若有两个随顺心,则第三个是种姓心,第四个是道心,此后便有三个果心;若有三个随顺心,则第四个是种姓心,第五个是道心,此后便有两个果心。就这样,以第四或第五个速行心作为安显示巴利原文
Vimuttīti ca upakkilesehi paṭippassaddhivasena cittassa vimuttabhāvo, cittameva vā tathā vimuttaṃ veditabbaṃ, tāya vimuttiyā jātaṃ sampayuttaṃ vā sukhaṃ vimuttisukhaṃ. ‘‘Yāyaṃ, bhante, upekkhā sante sukhe vuttā bhagavatā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.88) vacanato upekkhāpi cettha sukhamicceva veditabbā. Tathā ca vuttaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 232). Bhagavā hi catutthajjhānikaṃ arahattasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, na itaraṃ. Atha vā ‘‘tesaṃ vūpasamo sukho’’tiādīsu yathā saṅkhāradukkhūpasamo sukhoti vuccati, evaṃ sakalakilesadukkhūpasamabhāvato aggaphale labbhamānā paṭippassaddhivimutti eva idha sukhanti veditabbā. Tayidaṃ vimuttisukhaṃ maggavīthiyaṃ kālantareti phalacittassa pavattivibhāgena duvidhaṃ hoti. Ekekassa hi ariyamaggassa anantarā tassa tasseva vipākabhūtāni nibbānārammaṇāni tīṇi dve vā phalacittāni uppajjanti anantaravipākattā lokuttarakusalānaṃ. Yasmiñhi javanavāre ariyamaggo uppajjati, tattha yadā dve anulomāni, tadā tatiyaṃ gotrabhu, catutthaṃ maggacittaṃ, tato paraṃ tīṇi phalacittāni honti. Yadā pana tīṇi anulomāni, tadā catutthaṃ gotrabhu, pañcamaṃ maggacittaṃ, tato paraṃ dve phalacittāni honti. Evaṃ catutthaṃ pañcamaṃ appanāvasena pavattati, na tato paraṃ bhavaṅgassa āsannattā. Keci pana ‘‘chaṭṭhampi cittaṃ appetī’’ti vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāsu (visuddhi. 2.811) paṭikkhittaṃ. Evaṃ maggavīthiyaṃ phalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kālantare phalaṃ pana phalasamāpattivasena pavattaṃ, nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa uppajjamānañca eteneva saṅgahitaṃ. Sā panāyaṃ phalasamāpatti atthato lokuttarakusalānaṃ vipākabhūtā nibbānārammaṇā appanāti daṭṭhabbā.
谁入这些等至,谁不入呢?一切凡夫都不入,因为未曾证得。同样地,低位圣者不入上位的等至,上位的圣者也不入下位的等至,因为转入余者相续时,前位便已止息。那些圣者们只入各自相应的果。然而有些人说:“入流者与一来者不入果等至,唯有上二种能入,因为他们在定上修习圆满。”这种说法并无根据,因为凡夫也能入自己证得的世间定与等至。又何必在此推求理由呢?在《无碍解道》中,对“哪些十种行舍观依观而生起?哪些十种种姓法依观而生起?”这些问题的解答里,也提到了“为入流果等至、为了一来果等至”等,这便说明那些圣者入果等至的事。因此,于此应达成结论:一切圣者皆入各自相应的果。显示巴利原文
Ke taṃ samāpajjanti, ke na samāpajjantīti? Sabbepi puthujjanā na samāpajjanti anadhigatattā. Tathā heṭṭhimā ariyā uparimaṃ, uparimāpi ariyā heṭṭhimaṃ na samāpajjantiyeva puggalantarabhāvūpagamanena paṭippassaddhabhāvato. Attano eva phalaṃ te te ariyā samāpajjanti. Keci pana ‘‘sotāpannasakadāgāmino phalasamāpattiṃ na samāpajjanti, uparimā dveyeva samāpajjanti samādhismiṃ paripūrakāribhāvato’’ti vadanti. Taṃ akāraṇaṃ puthujjanassāpi attanā paṭiladdhalokiyasamādhisamāpajjanato. Kiṃ vā ettha kāraṇacintāya? Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ ‘‘katamā dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti (paṭi. ma. 1.57), katame dasa gotrabhudhammā vipassanāvasena uppajjantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.60) imesaṃ pañhānaṃ vissajjane sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāya sakadāgāmiphalasamāpattatthāyāti tesampi ariyānaṃ phalasamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā sabbepi ariyā yathāsakaṃ phalaṃ samāpajjantīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
那么,他们为何入果等至?为的是现法安乐住。正如国王享受王权之乐,天人享受天界之乐,圣者们心想:“我们将享受出世间乐”,于是划定时间,在想要入的刹那便入果等至。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana te samāpajjantīti? Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ. Yathā hi rājāno rajjasukhaṃ, devatā dibbasukhaṃ anubhavanti, evaṃ ariyā ‘‘lokuttarasukhaṃ anubhavissāmā’’ti addhānaparicchedaṃ katvā icchitakkhaṇe phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjanti.
那么,如何是入?如何是住?如何是出?首先,它的入由两种方式生起:不作意涅槃以外的任何所缘,及作意涅槃。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Kathañcassā samāpajjanaṃ, kathaṃ ṭhānaṃ, kathaṃ vuṭṭhānanti? Dvīhi tāva ākārehi assā samāpajjanaṃ hoti nibbānato aññassa ārammaṇassa amanasikārā, nibbānassa ca manasikārā. Yathāha –
贤友,无相心解脱等至有两种缘:不作意一切相,及作意无相界。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dve kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā, sabbanimittānañca amanasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā manasikāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458).
但在这里,入的次第是这样的:想要入果等至的圣弟子,应独处静处,以观察诸行生灭等方法修观。当他这样随顺渐次而观时,紧接在以诸行为所缘的种姓智之后,心便依果等至而安止于灭。因为心倾向于果等至,所以即使是有学圣者,此时也只生起果,不生起道。若有人主张:“入流者为入自己的果等至而增长观慧,便会成为一来者;一来者成为不来者。”则应这样告诉他们:“倘若如此,不来者岂不是会变成阿拉汉,阿拉汉变成独觉佛,独觉佛变成正自觉者?这就有大过失了。”因此,观慧是随其信解和意愿而成就的,所以有学圣者只生起果,不生起道。而且,对他而言,若是依初禅道证得的,便生起初禅之果;若是依第二禅等某一道证得的,便只生起相应于第二禅等的果。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha samāpajjanakkamo – phalasamāpattitthikena ariyasāvakena rahogatena paṭisallīnena udayabbayādivasena saṅkhārā vipassitabbā. Tassevaṃ pavattānupubbavipassanasseva saṅkhārārammaṇagotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ phalasamāpattivasena nirodhe cittamappeti, phalasamāpattininnabhāvena ca sekkhassāpi phalameva uppajjati, na maggo. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘sotāpanno attano phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjissāmīti vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā sakadāgāmī hoti, sakadāgāmī ca anāgāmī’’ti. Te vattabbā – evaṃ sante anāgāmī arahā bhavissati, arahā ca paccekabuddho, paccekabuddho ca sambuddhoti āpajjeyya, tasmā yathābhinivesaṃ yathājjhāsayaṃ vipassanā atthaṃ sādhetīti sekkhassāpi phalameva uppajjati, na maggo. Phalampi tassa sace anena paṭhamajjhāniko maggo adhigato, paṭhamajjhānikameva uppajjati. Sace dutiyādīsu aññatarajjhāniko, dutiyādīsu aññatarajjhānikamevāti.
但为何在这里,种姓智不像道智的前行智那样,以涅槃为所缘呢?因为果智并不能导向出离。只有圣道之法才是导向出离的,正如所说:“哪些法是导向出离的?四种无漏的圣道。”因此,道智绝对导向出离,以从两边出起的方式而转起;作为它的无间缘,前行智必定已从诸行相中出起,所以它(前行智)以涅槃为所缘是合理的。然而,果智是修习圣道的异熟而生起的,它们不能断除烦恼,不导向出离,本质上没有出起。因此,它们的前行智在任何时候都不可能以涅槃为所缘——因为在两种情况下,随顺智的情形并不相符。在圣道心路中,随顺智极其锐利,能突破长久以来未曾突破的粗重贪蕴等,作为世间观智的极致,它顺应道智而生起;但在果等至的心路中,由于那些烦恼早已被各自相应的道断除,随顺智在这里已无事可为,纯粹只是作为圣者们成就果等至之乐的预备工作而生起。所以,它没有任何出起的可能。也正因为如此,在其之后的种姓智,由于从诸行相中出起,才能够以涅槃为所缘。如此成立后,那些为了自己受用果等至,而依生灭等随观诸行的有学圣者,在观智的次第之后,只生起果。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha gotrabhuñāṇaṃ maggañāṇapurecārikaṃ viya nibbānārammaṇaṃ na hotīti? Phalañāṇānaṃ aniyyānikabhāvato. Ariyamaggadhammāyeva hi niyyānikā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘katame dhammā niyyānikā? Cattāro ariyamaggā apariyāpannā’’ti (dha. sa. 1295). Tasmā ekanteneva niyyānikabhāvassa ubhato vuṭṭhānabhāvena pavattamānassa anantarapaccayabhūtena ñāṇena nimittato vuṭṭhiteneva bhavitabbanti tassa nibbānārammaṇatā yuttā, na pana ariyamaggassa bhāvitattā tassa vipākabhāvena pavattamānānaṃ kilesānaṃ asamucchindanato aniyyānikattā avuṭṭhānasabhāvānaṃ phalañāṇānaṃ purecārikañāṇassa kadācipi nibbānārammaṇatā ubhayattha anulomañāṇānaṃ atulyākārato. Ariyamaggavīthiyañhi anulomañāṇāni anibbiddhapubbānaṃ thūlathūlānaṃ lobhakkhandhādīnaṃ sātisayaṃ padālanena lokiyañāṇena ukkaṃsapāramippattāni maggañāṇānukūlāni uppajjanti, phalasamāpattivīthiyaṃ pana tāni tāni tena tena maggena tesaṃ tesaṃ kilesānaṃ samucchinnattā tattha nirussukkāni kevalaṃ ariyānaṃ phalasamāpattisukhasamaṅgibhāvassa parikammamattāni hutvā uppajjantīti na tesaṃ kutoci vuṭṭhānasambhavo, yato tesaṃ pariyosāne ñāṇaṃ saṅkhāranimittaṃ vuṭṭhānato nibbānārammaṇaṃ siyā. Evañca katvā sekkhassa attano phalasamāpattivaḷañjanatthāya udayabbayādivasena saṅkhāre sammasantassa vipassanāñāṇānupubbāya phalameva uppajjati, na maggoti ayañca attho samatthito hoti. Evaṃ tāva phalasamāpattiyā samāpajjanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
贤友,无相心解脱的安住,有这三种缘:不作意一切相、作意无相界,以及先前的预备行。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tayo kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā ṭhitiyā, sabbanimittānaṃ amanasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā manasikāro, pubbe ca abhisaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458) –
然而,依此语句,它有三种安住方式。其中,“事前的预备行”是指在等至之前所作的时间限定。正因为限定了“我将于某某时出定”,所以在那个时间尚未到来之时,便不会有出定。显示巴利原文
Vacanato panassā tīhākārehi ṭhānaṃ hoti. Tattha pubbe ca abhisaṅkhāroti samāpattito pubbe kālaparicchedo. ‘‘Asukasmiṃ nāma kāle vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti paricchinnattā hissā yāva so kālo nāgacchati, tāva vuṭṭhānaṃ na hoti.
“贤友,无相心解脱的出定有两个缘:作意于一切相,以及不作意于无相界。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Dve kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā vuṭṭhānassa, sabbanimittānañca manasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā amanasikāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458) –
然而,依此语句,它有两种出定方式。其中,“一切相”即指色相、受相、想相、行相、识相。虽然并非一时作意所有这些相,但这是从总括的角度而说的。因此,通过作意那作为有分所缘的境,便从果等至中出定。应当如此了知其出定。而此处的入定与出定,正是属于阿罗汉果的状态。显示巴利原文
Vacanato panassā dvīhākārehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Tattha sabbanimittānanti rūpanimittavedanāsaññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇanimittānaṃ. Kāmañca na sabbānevetāni ekato manasi karoti, sabbasaṅgāhikavasena panevaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ bhavaṅgassa ārammaṇaṃ, tassa manasikaraṇena phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti evaṃ assā vuṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tayidaṃ evamidha samāpajjanavuṭṭhānaṃ arahattaphalabhūtaṃ –
“止息了不安”:躁动不安已得止息。“以不死为所缘”:所缘即不死的涅槃。“是善妙的”:这是美好的。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Paṭippassaddhadarathaṃ, amatārammaṇaṃ subhaṃ;
“舍离了世间欲贪”:舍离了对世间欲乐的执取。“寂静”:它自身即是寂静。“是最上沙门果”:这是最殊胜的沙门果。显示巴利原文
Vantalokāmisaṃ santaṃ, sāmaññaphalamuttamaṃ’’.
就这样,他感受了如所宣说、极其快乐的解脱之乐。因此说:“‘感受解脱之乐’的意思是:他安坐之中感受着解脱之乐,也就是果等至之乐。”显示巴利原文
Iti vuttaṃ sātātisātaṃ vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti vimuttisukhaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvediyamāno nisinno hotīti attho’’ti.
“那时”(atha)是表示话题转换的助词,“确然”(kho)用于填充语句。其中,以话题转换义而言,“那时”一词表示在感受解脱之乐之后,转向了另一个内容。那是什么呢?就是作意缘起。或者,“那时”也可以表示“之后”的意义,由此显示出即将说出的“在那七日消逝后”的意思。“那七日”指结跏趺座的七日,“消逝后”即过去之后,从那个定——也就是阿罗汉果定——中出定。不过,此处有些人于确立之后,应依次说明七个七日,他们对此作了详细阐述。但我们将在后面,以与《犍度》经文和这部《优陀那》圣典不相冲突的方式来解说。“夜晚”(rattiyā)一词用属格,表示部分与整体的关系;“第一”(paṭhamaṃ)一词用宾格,表示与整个时段相续结合的意义。因为世尊在那一整夜里,于整个初夜分都专心地投入了同样的作意。显示巴利原文
Athāti adhikāratthe nipāto. Khoti padapūraṇe. Tesu adhikāratthena athāti iminā vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedanato aññaṃ adhikāraṃ dasseti. Ko panesoti? Paṭiccasamuppādamanasikāro. Athāti vā pacchāti etasmiṃ atthe nipāto, tena ‘‘tassa sattāhassa accayenā’’ti vakkhamānameva atthaṃ joteti. Tassa sattāhassāti pallaṅkasattāhassa. Accayenāti apagamena. Tamhā samādhimhāti arahattaphalasamādhito. Idha pana ṭhatvā paṭipāṭiyā satta sattāhāni dassetabbānīti keci tāni vitthārayiṃsu. Mayaṃ pana tāni khandhakapāṭhena imissā udānapāḷiyā avirodhadassanamukhena parato vaṇṇayissāma. Rattiyāti avayavasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Paṭhamanti accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Bhagavā hi tassā rattiyā sakalampi paṭhamaṃ yāmaṃ teneva manasikārena yutto ahosīti.
“缘起”即指缘的法。因为无明等作为缘的法,就是缘起。若问“这如何能知?”依据世尊的话语。世尊这样说过:“因此,阿难,这就是老死的因、源、集、缘,也就是生……乃至这就是行的缘,也就是无明。”(《长部》2.105等处)如此,无明等被说为因。正如有十二缘,便有十二缘起。显示巴利原文
Paṭiccasamuppādanti paccayadhammaṃ. Avijjādayo hi paccayadhammā paṭiccasamuppādo. Kathamidaṃ jānitabbanti ce? Bhagavato vacanena. Bhagavatā hi ‘‘tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu, etaṃ nidānaṃ, esa samudayo, esa paccayo jarāmaraṇassa, yadidaṃ jāti…pe… saṅkhārānaṃ, yadidaṃ avijjā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.105 ādayo) evaṃ avijjādayo hetūti vuttā. Yathā dvādasa paccayā dvādasa paṭiccasamuppādāti.
在这里,其词义解释如下:“互相依靠,使之面对面,不排斥诸因缘的聚合,而一起生起,故称缘起。”或者:“依靠(paṭicca)指应被了知的缘,具足缘的意义;达到缘而不离开它,如此相关地产生,就是缘起。”而且应注意,这里的“缘起”并非仅仅指“依靠缘而生起”的状态,而是指能够生起果的因,这一“因”与“生起”一词的通常所指不同。又或者说:“智者应当了知它,故称‘所应了知’(paṭicco);它自身正确地生起,故称‘生起’(samuppādo)。这个既是所应了知、又是生起的事物,便叫做缘起。”——应当这样来理解此处的意义。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – aññamaññaṃ paṭicca paṭimukhaṃ katvā kāraṇasamavāyaṃ appaṭikkhipitvā sahite uppādetīti paṭiccasamuppādo. Atha vā paṭicca paccetabbaṃ paccayārahataṃ paccayaṃ paṭigantvā na vinā tena sambandhassa uppādo paṭiccasamuppādo . Paṭiccasamuppādoti cettha samuppādapadaṭṭhānavacanaviññeyyo phalassa uppādanasamatthatāyutto hetu, na paṭiccasamuppattimattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Atha vā paccetuṃ arahanti naṃ paṇḍitāti paṭicco, sammā sayameva vā uppādetīti samuppādo, paṭicco ca so samuppādo cāti paṭiccasamuppādoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
所谓“随顺”,是指以“无明缘行”等方式所说的无明等缘起法,由它能完成自身所应作之事,故称为随顺。又或,从起始至终了,依流转次第而说,即为顺次,因此称为随顺,即此随顺之义。“他以善心作意”,是指他恭敬地作意。对于任一缘法如何成为某一缘生法的缘,无论是因缘或是其他诸缘,他都以观照的方式,完全正确、无有遗漏、无有残余地安立于心中。这便是其义。为简要说明世尊如何以心随顺缘起,经中遂说:“即此有故彼有,此生起故彼生起。”显示巴利原文
Anulomanti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā nayena vutto avijjādiko paccayākāro attanā kattabbakiccakaraṇato anulomoti vuccati. Atha vā ādito paṭṭhāya antaṃ pāpetvā vuttattā pavattiyā vā anulomato anulomo, taṃ anulomaṃ. Sādhukaṃ manasākāsīti sakkaccaṃ manasi akāsi. Yo yo paccayadhammo yassa yassa paccayuppannadhammassa yathā yathā hetupaccayādinā paccayabhāvena paccayo hoti, taṃ sabbaṃ aviparītaṃ aparihāpetvā anavasesato paccavekkhaṇavasena citte akāsīti attho. Yathā pana bhagavā paṭiccasamuppādānulomaṃ manasākāsi, taṃ saṅkhepena tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘iti imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
于此,“iti”即“如是”,意为以此方式。“此有故彼有”:当无明等这些缘存在时,便会生起行等这些果。“此生起故彼生起”:由于无明等这些缘的生起,行等这些果便随之生起。而通过第二、第三经所云“此无故彼无,此灭故彼灭”,则揭示了此缘起特相中的决定性:唯有此缘存在时,彼果方有,无此缘则无彼果;唯有此缘生起,彼果方生,并非无缘而生;唯有此缘未灭,彼果方不灭,并非从灭中得灭。因此应知,此特相即内在地含具决定性,此处所说的缘起即是如此。此处所说之“灭”,是指通过证得对无明等的离贪,令其于未来不生、不起运作。正如所说:“由无明无余离贪而灭,则有行灭”等等。而“灭后之灭”,则以生灭的状态而言“此灭故彼灭”。显示巴利原文
Tattha itīti evaṃ, anena pakārenāti attho. Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotīti imasmiṃ avijjādike paccaye sati idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ hoti. Imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatīti imassa avijjādikassa paccayassa uppādā idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ uppajjatīti attho. Imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatīti avijjādīnaṃ abhāve saṅkhārādīnaṃ abhāvassa avijjādīnaṃ nirodhe saṅkhārādīnaṃ nirodhassa ca dutiyatatiyasuttavacanena etasmiṃ paccayalakkhaṇe niyamo dassito hoti – imasmiṃ sati eva, nāsati. Imassuppādā eva, nānuppādā. Anirodhā eva, na nirodhāti. Tenetaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ antogadhaniyamaṃ idha paṭiccasamuppādassa vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nirodhoti ca avijjādīnaṃ virāgādhigamena āyatiṃ anuppādo appavatti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādi. Nirodhanirodhī ca uppādanirodhībhāvena vutto ‘‘imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti.
由此,他开显了如下之义:所谓“生起”,即是“无灭”,在此处也被称为“存在”。因为“此有故彼有”这一特相,当以另一种方式表述为“由此生起故彼生起”时,后者便成了对前者的简别。因此,说“此有”并非仅就持续存在的状态而言,而是指未被道所灭的状态,这是可以了知的。再者,由于宣说“此无故彼无,此灭故彼灭”这两种所举特相的解说时,仅以“由无明的完全离贪而灭尽,故有行灭”等方式说明了灭,故而“不存在”也就是灭,由此显示了与不存在相违的存在,即是无灭。以那称为无灭的存在,来简别生起。因此,这里并非指单纯的存在即名生起,而是指那种称为无灭的存在,这便是所开显的义理。如此,这两种特相的说法,应当理解为以相互简别与所简别的关系而成立其义。显示巴利原文
Tenetaṃ dasseti – anirodho uppādo nāma, so cettha atthibhāvotipi vuccatīti. ‘‘Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti idameva hi lakkhaṇaṃ pariyāyantarena ‘‘imassa uppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vadantena parena purimaṃ visesitaṃ hoti. Tasmā na dharamānataṃyeva sandhāya ‘‘imasmiṃ satī’’ti vuttaṃ, atha kho maggena aniruddhabhāvañcāti viññāyati. Yasmā ca ‘‘imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti dvidhāpi uddiṭṭhassa lakkhaṇassa niddesaṃ vadantena ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādinā nirodho eva vutto, tasmā natthibhāvopi nirodho evāti natthibhāvaviruddho atthibhāvo anirodhoti dassitaṃ hoti. Tena anirodhasaṅkhātena atthibhāvena uppādaṃ viseseti. Tato na idha atthibhāvamattaṃ uppādoti attho adhippeto, atha kho anirodhasaṅkhāto atthibhāvo cāti ayamattho vibhāvitoti. Evametaṃ lakkhaṇadvayavacanaṃ aññamaññavisesanavisesitabbabhāvena sātthakanti veditabbaṃ.
那么,被称作“存在”和“生起”的这个“无灭”是什么呢?它就是未被断除的状态,以及由于断除未生果的适性而成为不适宜生果的状态。也就是说,应当被断除的不善法,是未被圣道彻底铲除的状态;而不应被断除的善法和无记法,在有漏者那里,则是那些结缚未被灭尽的状态。正是由于随眠未被铲除,有结缚的诸蕴的转起便是缘起。正如这样所说的:显示巴利原文
Ko panāyaṃ anirodho nāma, yo ‘‘atthibhāvo, uppādo’’ti ca vuccatīti? Appahīnabhāvo ca, anibbattitaphalārahatāpahānehi phalānuppādanārahatā ca. Ye hi pahātabbā akusalā dhammā, tesaṃ ariyamaggena asamugghāṭitabhāvo ca. Ye pana na pahātabbā kusalābyākatā dhammā, yāni tesu saṃyojanāni akhīṇāsavānaṃ tesaṃ aparikkhīṇatā ca. Asamugghāṭitānusayatāya hi sasaṃyojanā khandhappavatti paṭiccasamuppādo. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
“诸比丘,愚人被无明所遮蔽,又与渴爱相应,这个身体便得以聚集而生起。那愚人的无明未被断除,那渴爱也未被灭尽。为什么呢?诸比丘,愚人没有为了彻底灭尽苦而正确地修习梵行,因此在身体毁坏之后,他仍会投生到新的身体;既然投生到了新的身体,他就无法从生、老死等之中解脱出来。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāya ca, bhikkhave, avijjāya nivutassa bālassa yāya ca taṇhāya sampayuttassa ayaṃ kāyo samudāgato, sā ceva avijjā bālassa appahīnā, sā ca taṇhā aparikkhīṇā. Taṃ kissa hetu? Na, bhikkhave, bālo acari brahmacariyaṃ sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tasmā bālo kāyassa bhedā kāyūpago hoti, so kāyūpago samāno na parimuccati jātiyā jarāmaraṇenā’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.19).
然而,对于漏尽者,由于无明不存在,行便不存在;由于渴爱与取不存在,有与生便不可能有,因此轮回的断灭将会显现出来。所以他说:显示巴利原文
Khīṇasaṃyojanānaṃ pana avijjāya abhāvato saṅkhārānaṃ, taṇhupādānānaṃ abhāvato upādānabhavānaṃ asambhavoti vaṭṭassa upacchedo paññāyissatīti. Tenevāha –
颇求那,由六触处的无余离贪而灭尽,则有触灭;由触灭,则有受灭……显示巴利原文
‘‘Channaṃ tveva, phagguṇa, phassāyatanānaṃ asesavirāganirodhā phassanirodho, phassanirodhā vedanānirodho’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.12).
实际上,从证得最上道直至般涅槃,六处等并非完全不转起,但由于“不存在”而称为灭,由于结缚已尽而称为灭。再者,即使是久远所造的业,由于未生果、未断其食,仍被称为堪能生果,但它并非已生果,也并非已断其食。能生果的缘——无明、行等,应依前述方式了知:它们堪能生果的状态即是“不灭”。如此,正是以这种不灭的状态,若无它,果便不能生起;那个因即使已过去,也通过“此有”一词表达出来。因此,对于未住于梵行者,那种尚未达到不转起法性的缘生,不执取时间的差异,仅以不退转而说为“由此生起”。或者,在其他缘和合时,即便因不现行,也如同现行一般;更何况因现行时,那种朝向生果的状态就叫作“由此生起”。因为正是由那种状态而生起果,处于那种状态的因以能生果的样态现起,便可称为“生起”;即使因存在,若不在那种状态,也不称为生起,所以那种朝向生果的状态才称为“生起”。显示巴利原文
Na hi aggamaggādhigamato uddhaṃ yāva parinibbānā saḷāyatanādīnaṃ appavatti. Atha kho natthitā nirodhasaddavacanīyatā khīṇasaṃyojanatāti nirodho vutto. Apica cirakatampi kammaṃ anibbattitaphalatāya appahīnāhāratāya ca phalārahaṃ santaṃ eva nāma hoti, na nibbattitaphalaṃ , nāpi pahīnāhāranti. Phaluppattipaccayānaṃ avijjāsaṅkhārādīnaṃ vuttanayeneva phalārahabhāvo anirodhoti veditabbo. Evaṃ aniruddhabhāveneva hi yena vinā phalaṃ na sambhavati, taṃ kāraṇaṃ atītantipi imasmiṃ satīti iminā vacanena vuttaṃ. Tatoyeva ca avusitabrahmacariyassa appavattidhammataṃ anāpanno paccayuppādo kālabhedaṃ anāmasitvā anivattanāya eva imassa uppādāti vutto. Atha vā avasesapaccayasamavāye avijjamānassapi vijjamānassa viya pageva vijjamānassa yā phaluppattiabhimukhatā, sā imassa uppādāti vuttā. Tathā hi tato phalaṃ uppajjatīti tadavatthaṃ kāraṇaṃ phalassa uppādanabhāvena uṭṭhitaṃ uppatitaṃ nāma hoti, na vijjamānampi atadavatthanti tadavatthatā uppādoti veditabbo.
此处,以“有”一词,仅就存在而说缘性,显示缘起的无功用。以“生起”一词,阐明生起的法性、非一切时存在,以及朝向生果的状态,显示缘起的无常。又以“有,非无”、“从生起,非从灭”这样的处格与从格表述,成就因、集、生、源等义,显示缘起的因义等。其中,处格具因义,应如此理解:当某法存在时,与之不相离的果的存在便被了知,即依此而转起,例如:“若财物不施予穷人,贫穷便增长”,以及“谷物成熟时,食物丰足便生起”。从格亦具因义,是就果的根源与本性而转起,例如:“从羯罗蓝生阿浮陀,从阿浮陀生闭尸”,以及“从雪山流出恒河,从狮子的喉咙生湖泊”。当无明等存在时,由于不相离性,行等的存在便被了知;又由无明等,行等得以生起、被造作,因此无明等是行等的根源与本性。所以,为彰显此义,才在因义上以处格与从格说明:“此有故彼有,由此生起故彼生起”。显示巴利原文
Tattha satīti iminā vijjamānatāmattena paccayabhāvaṃ vadanto abyāpārataṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa dasseti. Uppādāti uppattidhammataṃ asabbakālabhāvitaṃ phaluppattiabhimukhatañca dīpento aniccataṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa dasseti. ‘‘Sati, nāsati, uppādā, na nirodhā’’ti pana hetuatthehi bhummanissakkavacanehi samatthitaṃ nidānasamudayajātipabhavabhāvaṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa dasseti. Hetuatthatā cettha bhummavacane yassa bhāve tadavinābhāviphalassa bhāvo lakkhīyati, tattha pavattiyā veditabbā yathā ‘‘adhanānaṃ dhane ananuppadīyamāne dāliddiyaṃ vepullaṃ agamāsī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.91) ca ‘‘nipphannesu sassesu subhikkhaṃ jāyatī’’ti ca. Nissakkavacanassāpi hetuatthatā phalassa pabhave pakatiyañca pavattito yathā ‘‘kalalā hoti abbudaṃ, abbudā jāyatī pesī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.235) ca ‘‘himavatā gaṅgā pabhavanti, siṅgato saro jāyatī’’ti ca. Avijjādibhāve ca tadavinābhāvena saṅkhārādibhāvo lakkhīyati, avijjādīhi ca saṅkhārādayo pabhavanti pakariyanti cāti te tesaṃ pabhavo pakati ca, tasmā tadatthadīpanatthaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sati imassa uppādā’’ti hetuatthe bhummanissakkaniddesā katāti.
此处,以‘此有故彼有,此生起故彼生起’略说的缘起,其详细开示即是‘无明缘行’等,因此应知,如上所说的‘存在’与‘生起’,正是那些缘生法的缘性。因为,经中以‘唯在有,非在无;唯从生起,非从灭’等具有内在决定性意义的文句所称说的、称为‘不灭’的那个存在,以及称为‘不退转自性’的那个生起,或者那个朝向生起的状态,离此之外,并没有其他名为‘缘性’的东西。因此应知,如上所说的存在与生起,即是缘性。即使在《发趣论》中提到的因等二十四缘,也应知是此缘性的种种差别。如此,为了显示世尊如何详细地随顺缘起而作意,才说了‘即此无明缘行’等。显示巴利原文
Yasmā cettha ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti saṅkhepena uddiṭṭhassa paṭiccasamuppādassa ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādiko niddeso, tasmā yathāvutto atthibhāvo uppādo ca tesaṃ tesaṃ paccayuppannadhammānaṃ paccayabhāvoti viññāyati. Na hi aniruddhatāsaṅkhātaṃ atthibhāvaṃ uppādañca anivattasabhāvatāsaṅkhātaṃ udayāvatthatāsaṅkhātaṃ vā ‘‘sati eva, nāsati, uppādā eva, na nirodhā’’ti antogadhaniyamehi vacanehi abhihitaṃ muñcitvā añño paccayabhāvo nāma atthi, tasmā yathāvutto atthibhāvo uppādo ca paccayabhāvoti veditabbaṃ. Yepi paṭṭhāne āgatā hetuādayo catuvīsati paccayā, tepi etasseva paccayabhāvassa visesāti veditabbā. Iti yathā vitthārena anulomaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasi akāsi, taṃ dassetuṃ, ‘‘yadidaṃ avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在此,‘yadidaṃ’是语助词,意为‘那个’。在‘无明缘’等句中:对于不应知的身恶行等,它去认知,故称无明;对于应知的身善行等,它不去认知,故称无明;它令诸法不颠倒的自性不被了知,故称无明;它在无有边际的轮回、诸有等中驱驰众生,故称无明;它在不存在的对象上驱驰,在存在的对象上却不驱驰,故称无明;它是明的对立面,故称无明。应知此无明依‘于苦无知’等,分为四种。‘缘’的意思是:依止于此,果不离此而生起并转起;或者,缘是助益之义。无明即是缘,为无明缘,因此说‘以无明为缘’。‘行’的意思是:它们造作,故为行,指世间善与不善的思,应知依福行、非福行、不动行而分为三种。‘识’的意思是:它了别,故为识,依世间异熟识而有三十二种。‘名’的意思是:它朝向,故为名,指受等三蕴。‘色’的意思是:它变坏,故为色,包括大种色及眼等所造色。‘处’的意思是:它扩展,并将扩展的轮回之苦引向有情,故为处。‘触’的意思是:它触对,故为触。‘受’的意思是:它感受,故为受。此二者依门而有六种,若取显示巴利原文
Tattha yadidanti nipāto, tassa yo ayanti attho. Avijjāpaccayātiādīsu avindiyaṃ kāyaduccaritādiṃ vindatīti avijjā, vindiyaṃ kāyasucaritādiṃ na vindatīti avijjā, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvaṃ aviditaṃ karotīti avijjā, antavirahite saṃsāre bhavādīsu satte javāpetīti avijjā, avijjamānesu javati vijjamānesu na javatīti avijjā, vijjāya paṭipakkhāti avijjā, sā ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādinā catubbidhā veditabbā. Paṭicca na vinā phalaṃ eti uppajjati ceva pavattati cāti paccayo, upakārakattho vā paccayo. Avijjā ca sā paccayo cāti avijjāpaccayo, tasmā avijjāpaccayā. Saṅkharontīti saṅkhārā, lokiyakusalākusalacetanā, sā puññāpuññāneñjābhisaṅkhāravasena tividhā veditabbā. Vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ, taṃ lokiyavipākaviññāṇavasena dvattiṃsavidhaṃ. Namatīti nāmaṃ, vedanādikkhandhattayaṃ. Ruppatīti rūpaṃ, bhūtarūpaṃ cakkhādiupādārūpañca. Āyatati āyatañca saṃsāradukkhaṃ nayatīti āyatanaṃ. Phusatīti phasso. Vedayatīti vedanā. Idampi dvayaṃ dvāravasena chabbidhaṃ, vipākavasena gahaṇe chattiṃsavidhaṃ. Paritassatīti taṇhā, sā kāmataṇhādivasena saṅkhepato tividhā, vitthārato aṭṭhuttarasatavidhā ca. Upādīyatīti upādānaṃ, taṃ kāmupādānādivasena catubbidhaṃ. Bhavati bhāvayati cāti bhavo, so kammūpapattibhedato duvidho. Jananaṃ jāti. Jīraṇaṃ jarā. Maranti tenāti maraṇaṃ. Socanaṃ soko. Paridevanaṃ paridevo. Dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ, uppādaṭṭhitivasena dvedhā khaṇatīti dukkhaṃ. Dumanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Bhuso āyāso upāyāso. Sambhavantīti nibbattanti. Na kevalañca sokādīhiyeva, atha kho sabbapadehi ‘‘sambhavantī’’ti padassa yojanā kātabbā. Evañhi ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantī’’ti paccayapaccayuppannavavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Esa nayo sabbattha.
在其中:无明以‘无知’为相,以‘迷惑’为味(作用),以‘遮蔽’为现起(现状),以‘诸漏’为足处(近因)。诸行以‘造作’为相,以‘努力积聚’为味,以‘策动安排’为现起,以‘无明’为足处。识以‘了知’为相,以‘作为先行’为味,以‘结生’为现起,以‘诸行’为足处,或以‘所依与所缘’为足处。名以‘朝向所缘’为相,以‘与相应法结合’为味,以‘不可分离’为现起,以‘识’为足处。色以‘被破坏’为相,以‘离散’为味,以‘不偏向的状态’为现起,以‘识’为足处。六处以‘作为处所’为相,以‘看等作用’为味,以‘成为所依和门的状态’为现起,以‘名色’为足处。触以‘接触’为相,以‘冲击’为味,以‘根、境、识三者和合’为现起,以‘六处’为足处。受以‘领纳体验’为相,以‘享用所缘之味’为味,以‘苦与乐’为现起,以‘触’为足处。爱以‘作为因的本性’为相,以‘感到欢喜’为味,以‘永不满足的状态’为现起,以‘受’为足处。取以‘执取’为相,以‘不放手’为味,以‘与爱紧密结合的固执和邪见’为现起,以‘爱’为足处。有以‘业与业果’为相,以‘令存在、令生起’为味,以‘善、不善、无记’为现起,以显示巴利原文
Tattha aññāṇalakkhaṇā avijjā, sammohanarasā, chādanapaccupaṭṭhānā, āsavapadaṭṭhānā. Abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇā saṅkhārā, āyūhanarasā, saṃvidahanapaccupaṭṭhānā, avijjāpadaṭṭhānā. Vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ viññāṇaṃ, pubbaṅgamarasaṃ, paṭisandhipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, saṅkhārapadaṭṭhānaṃ, vatthārammaṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ vā. Namanalakkhaṇaṃ nāmaṃ, sampayogarasaṃ, avinibbhogapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, viññāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ, vikiraṇarasaṃ, appaheyyabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, viññāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ saḷāyatanaṃ, dassanādirasaṃ, vatthudvārabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, nāmarūpapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Phusanalakkhaṇo phasso, saṅghaṭṭanaraso, saṅgatipaccupaṭṭhāno, saḷāyatanapadaṭṭhāno. Anubhavanalakkhaṇā vedanā, visayarasasambhogarasā, sukhadukkhapaccupaṭṭhānā, phassapadaṭṭhānā. Hetubhāvalakkhaṇā taṇhā, abhinandanarasā, atittibhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā, vedanāpadaṭṭhānā. Gahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ upādānaṃ, amuñcanarasaṃ, taṇhādaḷhattadiṭṭhipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, taṇhāpadaṭṭhānaṃ. Kammakammaphalalakkhaṇo bhavo, bhavanabhāvanaraso, kusalākusalābyākatapaccupaṭṭhāno, upādānapadaṭṭhāno. Tattha tattha bhave paṭhamābhinibbattilakkhaṇā jāti, niyyātanarasā, atītabhavato idhuppannapaccupaṭṭhānā, dukkhavicittatāpaccupaṭṭhānā vā. Khandhaparipākalakkhaṇā jarā, maraṇūpanayanarasā, yobbanavināsapaccupaṭṭhānā. Cutilakkhaṇaṃ maraṇaṃ , visaṃyogarasaṃ, gativippavāsapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Antonijjhānalakkhaṇo soko, cetaso nijjhānaraso, anusocanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Lālappanalakkhaṇo paridevo, guṇadosaparikittanaraso, sambhamapaccupaṭṭhāno. Kāyapīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ dukkhaṃ, duppaññānaṃ domanassakaraṇarasaṃ, kāyikābādhapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Cittapīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ domanassaṃ, manovighātanarasaṃ, mānasabyādhipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Cittaparidahanalakkhaṇo upāyāso, nitthunanaraso, visādapaccupaṭṭhāno. Evamete avijjādayo lakkhaṇāditopi veditabbāti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana sabbākārasampannaṃ vinicchayaṃ icchantena sammohavinodaniyā (vibha. aṭṭha. 225) vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāya gahetabbo.
“Evanti”(如是)一词,是对前述内容的例证,由此表明纯以无明等为因,而非以大自在天的创造等为因。“Etassa”(此),指如前所述。“Kevalassa”(纯一),指无混杂的,或整体的。“Dukkhakkhandhassa”(苦蕴),指苦的积聚,非指有情,亦非指命者,更非指美妙、乐等。“Samudayo hoti”(集起),即产生、出现。显示巴利原文
Evanti niddiṭṭhassa nidassanaṃ, tena avijjādīheva kāraṇehi, na issaranimmānādīhīti dasseti. Etassāti yathāvuttassa. Kevalassāti asammissassa sakalassa vā. Dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkhasamūhassa, na sattassa, nāpi jīvassa, nāpi subhasukhādīnaṃ. Samudayo hotīti nibbatti sambhavati.
“Etamatthaṃ viditvā”(了知此义后):即那位遵循“以无明等为缘,诸行等纯一苦蕴便集起”之理,于一切相状完全了知此义后。“Tāyaṃ velāyaṃ”(于彼时):即在通达此义的那一刻。“Imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi”(说出此感兴语):由于贯通了所了知的义理,并明晰了因及因所生之法,为彰显此通达之威力,便发出以“yadā have pātubhavantī”等为起始、与喜悦相应、由智慧所引生的感兴语;亦即说出心中欢喜之语。显示巴利原文
Etamatthaṃviditvāti yvāyaṃ avijjādivasena saṅkhārādikassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotīti vutto, sabbākārena etamatthaṃ viditvā. Tāyaṃ velāyanti tāyaṃ tassa atthassa viditavelāyaṃ. Imaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti imaṃ tasmiṃ atthe vidite hetuno ca hetusamuppannadhammassa ca pajānanāya ānubhāvadīpakaṃ ‘‘yadā have pātubhavantī’’tiādikaṃ somanassasampayuttañāṇasamuṭṭhānaṃ udānaṃ udānesi, attamanavācaṃ nicchāresīti vuttaṃ hoti.
其义释如下:“yadā”(当…时),指某个时刻。“have”为不变词,此处作“确实”解。然而,有人将“have”解释为“于战场中”,并引“当以般若之武器与魔作战时”(法句经 40)之句,认为是指与烦恼魔交战之时,此是其意趣。“Pātubhavanti”(显现),即生起。“Dhammā”(诸法),指能成就顺缘起之理通达的菩提分法;或者,“pātubhavanti”是令其明显,即通过现观而变得明确、显著;“dhammā”则指四圣谛法。“Ātāpo”(热勤),即精进,因它具有烧灼烦恼的意义。“Ātāpino”(具热勤者),指具备正勤精进的人。“Jhāyato”(修禅那者),指通过所缘禅那与相禅那而修习的人。“Brāhmaṇassa”(婆罗门的),指已舍断诸恶、诸漏已尽的漏尽者。“Athassa kaṅkhā vapayanti sabbā”(那时,他的一切疑惑皆灭):那时,对于这位如此显现法的人,那些疑惑——诸如“尊者,谁在触?”佛陀说:“此问非理”等——皆悉灭去。显示巴利原文
Tassattho – yadāti yasmiṃ kāle. Haveti byattanti imasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Keci pana ‘‘haveti āhave yuddhe’’ti atthaṃ vadanti, ‘‘yodhetha māraṃ paññāvudhenā’’ti (dha. pa. 40) vacanato kilesamārena yujjhanasamayeti tesaṃ adhippāyo. Pātubhavantīti uppajjanti. Dhammāti anulomapaccayākārapaṭivedhasādhakā bodhipakkhiyadhammā. Atha vā pātubhavantīti pakāsenti, abhisamayavasena byattā pākaṭā honti. Dhammāti catuariyasaccadhammā, ātāpo vuccati kilesasantāpanaṭṭhena vīriyaṃ. Ātāpinoti sammappadhānavīriyavato. Jhāyatoti ārammaṇūpanijjhānena lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena jhāyantassa. Brāhmaṇassāti bāhitapāpassa khīṇāsavassa. Athassa kaṅkhā vapayanti sabbāti athassa evaṃ pātubhūtadhammassa yā etā ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, phusatīti. No kallo pañhoti bhagavā avocā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.12) nayena, ‘‘katamaṃ nu kho, bhante, jarāmaraṇaṃ, kassa ca panidaṃ jarāmaraṇanti. No kallo pañhoti bhagavā avocā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.35) nayena paccayākāre kaṅkhā vuttā, yā ca paccayākārasseva appaṭividdhattā ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) soḷasa kaṅkhā āgatā. Tā sabbā vapayanti apagacchanti nirujjhanti. Kasmā? Yato pajānāti sahetudhammaṃ, yasmā avijjādikena hetunā sahetukaṃ imaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ kevalaṃ dukkhakkhandhadhammaṃ pajānāti aññāsi paṭivijjhīti.
那么,他的菩提分法或四圣谛法,于何时「显现」——即生起或令其明显?是在观智与道智之时。其中,与观智相应的念等菩提分法及观智本身,依各自所缘境,以彼分断的方式,暂时舍断净想等,以身随观等修习为门,各别生起;而在道刹那,它们同以涅槃为所缘,以正断的方式断除对立之法,为成就对四圣谛的无痴通达,唯于一时俱起。如是,于此应先知,菩提分法是以「生起」之义而说为「显现」。显示巴利原文
Kadā panassa bodhipakkhiyadhammā catusaccadhammā vā pātubhavanti uppajjanti pakāsenti vā? Vipassanāmaggañāṇesu . Tattha vipassanāñāṇasampayuttā satiādayo vipassanāñāṇañca yathārahaṃ attano visayesu tadaṅgappahānavasena subhasaññādike pajahantā kāyānupassanādivasena visuṃ visuṃ uppajjanti, maggakkhaṇe pana te nibbānamālambitvā samucchedavasena paṭipakkhe pajahantā catūsupi ariyasaccesu asammohappaṭivedhasādhanavasena sakideva uppajjanti. Evaṃ tāvettha bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ uppajjanaṭṭhena pātubhāvo veditabbo.
至于圣谛法,世间圣谛在观刹那,通过成为观智的所缘而「显现」;出世间圣谛,则以心倾向于彼的方式,及于道刹那,灭谛通过所缘现观、一切圣谛皆通过作用现观而显著,因此应以「令明显」之义了知「显现」。显示巴利原文
Ariyasaccadhammānaṃ pana lokiyānaṃ vipassanākkhaṇe vipassanāya ārammaṇakaraṇavasena, lokuttarānaṃ tadadhimuttatāvasena, maggakkhaṇe nirodhasaccassa ārammaṇābhisamayavasena, sabbesampi kiccābhisamayavasena pākaṭabhāvato pakāsanaṭṭhena pātubhāvo veditabbo.
如是,世尊虽以一切方式令一切法于自智中显现,然因以缘起为门而安立观修,且缘起之行相极为微细、甚深、极难见,故于审察此缘起后,生起强烈喜悦,伴随对敌对法之正断的阐明,即于此处诵出此感兴语,彰显其通达缘起之威力。显示巴利原文
Iti bhagavā satipi sabbākārena sabbadhammānaṃ attano ñāṇassa pākaṭabhāve paṭiccasamuppādamukhena vipassanābhinivesassa katattā nipuṇagambhīrasududdasatāya paccayākārassa taṃ paccavekkhitvā uppannabalavasomanasso paṭipakkhasamucchedavibhāvanena saddhiṃ attano tadabhisamayānubhāvadīpakamevettha udānaṃ udānesīti.
“Ayampi udāno vutto bhagavatā iti me sutaṃ”(此感兴语亦为世尊所说,如是我闻)这段巴利语仅见于某些写本。其中,ayampi 中的 pi 字,如同 idampi buddhe ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ(此亦为佛之殊胜宝)、ayampi pārājiko hotīti(此亦为波罗夷)等用法,具有总集之义,以此总括下文。“Vutto”(所说)一词有“理发”“播种”“整平”“生活营生”“解脱状态”“圣典”等含义。例如,在“kāpaṭiko māṇavo daharo vuttasiro”(诈伪的年轻婆罗门,剃了发的头)(中部 2.426)等句中,即以“理发”之义出现。显示巴利原文
Ayampiudāno vutto bhagavatā iti me sutanti ayaṃ pāḷi kesuciyeva potthakesu dissati. Tattha ayampīti pisaddo ‘‘idampi buddhe ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ, ayampi pārājiko hotī’’tiādīsu viya sampiṇḍanattho, tena uparimaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Vuttoti ayaṃ vuttasaddo kesohāraṇavappanavāpasamīkaraṇajīvitavuttipamuttabhāvapāvacanabhāvena pavattana ajjhenakathanādīsu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘kāpaṭiko māṇavo daharo vuttasiro’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.426) kesohāraṇe āgato.
“Gāvo tassa pajāyanti, khette vuttaṃ virūhati”(他的牛群繁殖,田中所种生长)等句中,是以“播种”之义出现。“如以犁具善整平之田”等句中,是以“整平”之义出现。“不以邪命活命”等句中,是以“生活营生”之义出现。“彼之诸漏已尽……如解脱之月”等句中,是以“解脱状态”之义出现。而“如是我闻,一时世尊……所说”(evaṃ me sutaṃ, ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā... vutto)等处,是以“圣典”之义出现。此处亦然。显示巴利原文
‘‘Gāvo tassa pajāyanti, khette vuttaṃ virūhati;
“Vuttānaṃ phalamasnāti, yo mittānaṃ na dubbhatī”这句偈颂的意思是:享受所种之果的人,即是不欺骗朋友的人。
显示巴利原文 Vuttānaṃ phalamasnāti, yo mittānaṃ na dubbhatī’’ti. –
在“Ādīsu”(本生 2.22.19)等句中,意为“播种”。在“No ca kho paṭivutta”(波罗夷 289)等句中,是以八杖等工具“平整”的意思。在“Pannalomo paradattavutto migabhūtena cetasā viharāmī”(律藏·小品 332)等句中,指“生活与谋生方式”。在“Paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto abhabbo haritattāyā”(波罗夷 92)等句中,指“从束缚中解脱的状态”。在“Gītaṃ vuttaṃ samīhitaṃ”(长部 1.285)等句中,意为“以圣典言教的方式流传”。在“Vutto pārāyaṇo”等句中,意为“请求、提问”。在“Vuttaṃ kho panetaṃ bhagavatā ‘dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā’”(中部 1.30)等句中,意为“言说”。此处亦然。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu (jā. 2.22.19) vappane. ‘‘No ca kho paṭivutta’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 289) aṭṭhadaṇḍakādīhi vāpasamīkaraṇe. ‘‘Pannalomo paradattavutto migabhūtena cetasā viharāmī’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 332) jīvitavuttiyaṃ. ‘‘Paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto abhabbo haritattāyā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 92) bandhanato pamuttabhāve. ‘‘Gītaṃ vuttaṃ samīhita’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.285) pāvacanabhāvena pavattite. ‘‘Vutto pārāyaṇo’’tiādīsu ajjhene. ‘‘Vuttaṃ kho panetaṃ bhagavatā ‘dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā’’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.30) kathane. Idhāpi kathane eva daṭṭhabbo, tena ayampi udāno bhāsitoti attho. Itīti evaṃ. Me sutanti padadvayassa attho nidānavaṇṇanāyaṃ sabbākārato vuttoyeva. Pubbe ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti nidānavasena vuttoyeva hi attho idha nigamanavasena ‘‘iti me suta’’nti puna vutto. Vuttasseva hi atthassa puna vacanaṃ nigamananti. Itisaddassa atthuddhāro evaṃ-saddena samānatthatāya ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti ettha viya, atthayojanā ca itivuttakavaṇṇanāya amhehi pakāsitāyevāti tattha vuttanayeneva veditabboti.
第二菩提经注释显示巴利原文
2. Dutiyabodhisuttavaṇṇanā
2 第二经中的“逆”:即如“无明灭则行灭”等所说,单以无明等为条件的缘起理路,当其以不再生起的灭而息灭时,由于不再有需要执行的作用,因此称为“逆”。或者,因其逆向于运行,故称“逆”。然而,这里并非从末端或中间开始追溯到开头,所以不可用其他含义来理解此处的“逆”。而“逆”这个词,也像“日月运行错乱”等用法一样,是抽象中性词的表达方式。“此无时,彼则无”:当此(无明等缘)没有时——即被圣道断除时——此(行等果)便没有,不会转起。“此灭故彼灭”:当此(无明等缘)息灭时——由于圣道使其达到了不再生起的法性——此(行等果)便息灭,不会转起。于此,正如“此有故彼有,此生故彼生”中,显示了‘唯此有而非无,唯此生而非灭’的内在必然性;同样地,此处也显示了‘唯此无而非有,唯此灭而非生’的内在必然性特征,应如此理解。此处其余当说的,依第一菩提经注释所说的方法即可明了。显示巴利原文
2. Dutiye paṭilomanti ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādinā nayena vutto avijjādikoyeva paccayākāro anuppādanirodhena nirujjhamāno attano kattabbakiccassa akaraṇato paṭilomoti vuccati. Pavattiyā vā vilomanato paṭilomo, antato pana majjhato vā paṭṭhāya ādiṃ pāpetvā avuttattā ito aññenatthenettha paṭilomatā na yujjati. Paṭilomanti ca ‘‘visamaṃ candasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu viya bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso. Imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hotīti imasmiṃ avijjādike paccaye asati maggena pahīne idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ na hoti nappavattati. Imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatīti imassa avijjādikassa paccayassa nirodhā maggena anuppattidhammataṃ āpāditattā idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ nirujjhati, nappavattatīti attho. Idhāpi yathā ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti ettha ‘‘imasmiṃ satiyeva, nāsati, imassa uppādā eva, na nirodhā’’ti antogadhaniyamatā dassitā. Evaṃ imasmiṃ asatiyeva, na sati, imassa nirodhā eva, na uppādāti antogadhaniyamatālakkhaṇā dassitāti veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paṭhamabodhisuttavaṇṇanāya vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ.
如此,先将世尊逆观缘起的方式略说示出,现为详细阐明,故说“无明灭则行灭”等语。此处,“无明灭”:指由圣道而令无明彻底灭尽,即由阿拉汉道以断除随眠的方式,将无明完全拔除的意思。虽然在下分道断除无明时,也是以彻底拔除的方式断除,但并非毫无剩余地断尽。因为,导向恶趣的无明是由初道断除的;同样,只要在这世间某处以及一切卑劣生存地中会成为再生之缘的那一分无明,则依次由第二、第三道断除,但其余部分不断。唯阿拉汉道方能将无明毫无剩余地断尽。“行灭”:指诸行不再生起的灭。然而,为了显示当诸行如此灭尽后,行灭则识灭、识等灭则名色等也随之灭尽,故在说了“行灭则识灭”等之后,总结道“如是,整个苦蕴便灭尽”。此处需要说明的道理,与前面所述一致。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ yathā bhagavā paṭilomapaṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasi akāsi, taṃ saṅkhepena dassetvā idāni vitthārena dassetuṃ ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha avijjānirodhāti ariyamaggena avijjāya anavasesanirodhā, anusayappahānavasena aggamaggena avijjāya accantasamugghāṭatoti attho. Yadipi heṭṭhimamaggehi pahīyamānā avijjā accantasamugghāṭavaseneva pahīyati, tathāpi na anavasesato pahīyati. Apāyagāminiyā hi avijjā paṭhamamaggena pahīyati. Tathā sakideva imasmiṃ loke sabbattha ca anariyabhūmiyaṃ upapattipaccayabhūtā avijjā yathākkamaṃ dutiyatatiyamaggehi pahīyati, na itarāti. Arahattamaggeneva hi sā anavasesaṃ pahīyatīti. Saṅkhāranirodhoti saṅkhārānaṃ anuppādanirodho hoti. Evaṃ niruddhānaṃ pana saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇādīnañca nirodhā nāmarūpādīni niruddhāni eva hontīti dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho’’tiādiṃ vatvā ‘‘evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
再者,此处虽只说“无明灭则行灭,行灭则识灭”,其实到此已将整个苦蕴无余灭尽的意思说出来了。不过,如同在顺观中,为了显示“由于某个缘法存在,某个缘生法就不灭而转起”这一意义,而说“以无明为缘,行生起……乃至……苦蕴集起”;在此,则是为了从相反的方面显示“当某个缘法不存在时,那个缘生法便灭去、不再转起”,故说“无明灭则行灭,行灭则识灭……乃至……苦蕴灭”。这并不像顺观那样,是为了显示涵盖三时的苦蕴之灭,因为此处所要表明的是:通过修习圣道,使本来应当于未来生起的苦蕴不再生起,并由修习圣道而灭尽。这一差别也应当了解。显示巴利原文
Apicettha kiñcāpi ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho’’ti ettāvatāpi sakalassa dukkhakkhandhassa anavasesato nirodho vutto hoti, tathāpi yathā anulome yassa yassa paccayadhammassa atthitāya yo yo paccayuppannadhammo na nirujjhati pavattati evāti imassa atthassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ tappaṭipakkhato tassa tassa paccayadhammassa abhāve so so paccayuppannadhammo nirujjhati nappavattatīti dassanatthaṃ idha ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana anulome viya kālattayapariyāpannassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodhadassanatthaṃ. Anāgatasseva hi ariyamaggabhāvanāya asati uppajjanārahassa dukkhakkhandhassa ariyamaggabhāvanāya nirodho icchitoti ayampi viseso veditabbo.
“了知此义已”:是指对于前面所说的“由无明灭故而诸行灭,乃至苦蕴灭”这一义理,从一切方面了知。“宣说此优陀那”:即在了知此义之时,宣说了这首优陀那,以彰显觉悟无明等诸缘灭尽的威力,正如“无明灭则行灭”等所开示的内容。显示巴利原文
Etamatthaṃ viditvāti yvāyaṃ ‘‘avijjānirodhādivasena saṅkhārādikassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti vutto, sabbākārena etamatthaṃ viditvā. Imaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti imasmiṃ atthe vidite ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’ti evaṃ pakāsitassa avijjādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ khayassa avabodhānubhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti attho.
这里的要义是:由于已经觉知、了知、证悟了无明等诸缘的灭尽——即不再生起之灭,因此,依前所述之理,对于精勤禅修的婆罗门,前述种种菩提分法或四谛法便得以显现、生起,或变得明晰。同时,由于先前未能如实了达缘之灭尽而可能生起的前述种种疑惑,这一切也全都消散、灭尽了。其余的解释与前面所说相同。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yasmā avijjādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ anuppādanirodhasaṅkhātaṃ khayaṃ avedi aññāsi paṭivijjhi, tasmā etassa vuttanayena ātāpino jhāyato brāhmaṇassa vuttappakārā bodhipakkhiyadhammā catusaccadhammā vā pātubhavanti uppajjanti pakāsenti vā. Atha yā paccayanirodhassa sammā aviditattā uppajjeyyuṃ pubbe vuttappabhedā kaṅkhā, tā sabbāpi vapayanti nirujjhantīti. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
3. 《第三菩提经》注释显示巴利原文
3. Tatiyabodhisuttavaṇṇanā
3 第三经中,「anulomapaṭilomaṃ」(顺逆),即顺与逆,指依前文所说的顺的方式与逆的方式,这是其义。但是,前面两部经中,不是也以顺的方式和逆的方式说明了缘起的作意吗?为何这里又再以这两种方式作意而说呢?因为在此是依这两种方式作意的第三次。那么,如何是以两种方式作意呢?难道可以不分先后,同时作意缘起的顺与逆吗?不应这样理解,以为“他将两者合在一起作意”,而是依次第进行的。世尊首先以顺的方式作意缘起,然后宣说了与之相应的第一首优陀那;第二次又以逆的方式作意缘起,然后宣说了相应的优陀那;到了第三次,则时而顺、时而逆地作意,以此方式完成了顺逆的作意。因此说:「anulomapaṭilomaṃ即顺与逆,依前所说的顺的方式与逆的方式。」这便显出其作意已纯熟、有力且达到自在。在此,应依“我将顺作意”、“我将逆作意”、“我将顺逆作意”这三种意欲的前行,来区别这三次作意。显示巴利原文
3. Tatiye anulomapaṭilomanti anulomañca paṭilomañca, yathāvuttaanulomavasena ceva paṭilomavasena cāti attho. Nanu ca pubbepi anulomavasena paṭilomavasena ca paṭiccasamuppāde manasikārappavatti suttadvaye vuttā, idha kasmā punapi tadubhayavasena manasikārappavatti vuccatīti? Tadubhayavasena tatiyavāraṃ tattha manasikārassa pavattitattā. Kathaṃ pana tadubhayavasena manasikāro pavattito? Na hi sakkā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ anulomapaṭilomaṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa manasikāraṃ pavattetunti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘tadubhayaṃ ekajjhaṃ manasākāsī’’ti, atha kho vārena. Bhagavā hi paṭhamaṃ anulomavasena paṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasi karitvā tadanurūpaṃ paṭhamaṃ udānaṃ udānesi. Dutiyampi paṭilomavasena taṃ manasi karitvā tadanurūpameva udānaṃ udānesi. Tatiyavāre pana kālena anulomaṃ kālena paṭilomaṃ manasikaraṇavasena anulomapaṭilomaṃ manasi akāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anulomapaṭilomanti anulomañca paṭilomañca, yathāvuttaanulomavasena ceva paṭilomavasena cā’’ti. Iminā manasikārassa paguṇabalavabhāvo ca vasībhāvo ca pakāsito hoti. Ettha ca ‘‘anulomaṃ manasi karissāmi, paṭilomaṃ manasi karissāmi, anulomapaṭilomaṃ manasi karissāmī’’ti evaṃ pavattānaṃ pubbābhogānaṃ vasena nesaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo.
其中,「avijjāya tveva」(即于无明)的意思是:唯指无明本身。「asesavirāganirodhā」(完全离贪灭尽):指通过名为离贪的道——即最上道——彻底灭尽,也就是毫无残余、不再生起的断除,这是其义。「saṅkhāranirodho」(行之灭):指一切行毫无剩余、不再生起的灭尽。因为以前三道圣道,某些行灭尽,某些行却未灭尽,这是由于无明仅被部分灭尽;而通过最上道,由于无明被彻底、毫无剩余地灭尽,故没有任何行不灭尽。显示巴利原文
Tattha avijjāya tvevāti avijjāya tu eva. Asesavirāganirodhāti virāgasaṅkhātena maggena asesanirodhā, aggamaggena anavasesaanuppādappahānāti attho. Saṅkhāranirodhoti sabbesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ anavasesaṃ anuppādanirodho. Heṭṭhimena hi maggattayena keci saṅkhārā nirujjhanti, keci na nirujjhanti avijjāya sāvasesanirodhā. Aggamaggena panassā anavasesanirodhā na keci saṅkhārā na nirujjhantīti.
「了知此义已」:对于前面所说的,即以无明等为缘而有行等苦蕴之集,以及因无明等的集与灭而有苦蕴之灭,从一切方面了知此义之后。「宣说此优陀那」:即宣说了此优陀那,由此彰显圣道的威力;此圣道即是以其作用与所缘作用,了知了那名为苦蕴之集与灭的义理。显示巴利原文
Etamatthaṃviditvāti yvāyaṃ avijjādivasena saṅkhārādikassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo nirodho ca avijjādīnaṃ samudayā nirodhā ca hotīti vutto, sabbākārena etamatthaṃ viditvā. Imaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti idaṃ yena maggena yo dukkhakkhandhassa samudayanirodhasaṅkhāto attho kiccavasena ārammaṇakiriyāya ca vidito, tassa ariyamaggassa ānubhāvadīpakaṃ vuttappakāraṃ udānaṃ udānesīti attho.
在此,其简要义为:当诸法真实地显现于精勤禅修的婆罗门时,这位婆罗门便以那些已生起的菩提分法,或以现观四谛法的圣道,凭此圣道驱散魔军而安住——他如是驱散、摧毁、粉碎那些如经中所说“贪欲是你的第一军……”的魔军。如何呢?“犹如太阳照亮虚空”:正如太阳升起,以自身的光芒朗照虚空,同时消散黑暗而住;同样,那位漏尽婆罗门也以那些法,或以圣道,在现观诸谛的同时驱散魔军,安住不动。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā ātāpino jhāyato brāhmaṇassa, tadā so brāhmaṇo tehi uppannehi bodhipakkhiyadhammehi yassa vā ariyamaggassa catusaccadhammā pātubhūtā , tena ariyamaggena vidhūpayaṃ tiṭṭhati mārasenaṃ, ‘‘kāmā te paṭhamā senā’’tiādinā (su. ni. 438; mahāni. 28; cūḷani. nandamāṇavapucchāniddesa 47) nayena vuttappakāraṃ mārasenaṃ vidhūpayanto vidhamento viddhaṃsento tiṭṭhati. Kathaṃ? Sūriyova obhāsayamantalikkhaṃ, yathā sūriyo abbhuggato attano pabhāya antalikkhaṃ obhāsentova andhakāraṃ vidhamento tiṭṭhati, evaṃ sopi khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo tehi dhammehi tena vā ariyamaggena saccāni paṭivijjhantova mārasenaṃ vidhūpayanto tiṭṭhatīti.
如此,世尊宣说的这三首优陀那:第一首表明了知缘起相,第二首表证得缘尽,第三首表圣道的威力。这三首优陀那是在三个时分所宣说。于哪一夜?从成正觉后的第七夜。世尊于毗舍佉月圆之夜,初夜分随念宿命;中夜分清净天眼;后夜分将智慧投向缘起,以种种方式观察三界诸行。当他思惟“黎明今将升起”时,便成就了正等觉——就在获得一切知智的同时,黎明升起。此后,他便以结跏趺坐于菩提树下度过了七日。至第七夜,在三个时分中,如前所述地作意缘起后,便依次宣说了这些优陀那。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavatā paṭhamaṃ paccayākārapajānanassa, dutiyaṃ paccayakkhayādhigamassa, tatiyaṃ ariyamaggassa ānubhāvappakāsanāni imāni tīṇi udānāni tīsu yāmesu bhāsitāni. Katarāya rattiyā? Abhisambodhito sattamāya rattiyā. Bhagavā hi visākhapuṇṇamāya rattiyā paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussaritvā majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhetvā pacchimayāme paṭiccasamuppāde ñāṇaṃ otāretvā nānānayehi tebhūmakasaṅkhāre sammasitvā ‘‘idāni aruṇo uggamissatī’’ti sammāsambodhiṃ pāpuṇi, sabbaññutappattisamanantarameva ca aruṇo uggacchīti. Tato teneva pallaṅkena bodhirukkhamūle sattāhaṃ vītināmento sampattāya pāṭipadarattiyā tīsu yāmesu vuttanayena paṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasi karitvā yathākkamaṃ imāni udānāni udānesi.
然而,在《犍度》中,因于三处皆提到“于缘起顺逆作意”(见《大品》1),故《犍度注释》中说:“在三个时分中,如此作意后,第一首优陀那是以缘起相观察,第二首是以涅槃观察,第三首是以道观察——世尊如此宣说了这些优陀那。”这并无矛盾。因为世尊除了在“宝屋”中度过的那七日外,在其余六次七日中,他时或省察诸法,大部分时间安住于感受“解脱之乐”中;而在宝屋的七日里,他纯粹安住于深入阿毗达摩。显示巴利原文
Khandhake pana tīsupi vāresu ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādaṃ anulomapaṭilomaṃ manasākāsī’’ti (mahāva. 1) āgatattā khandhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘tīsupi yāmesu evaṃ manasi katvā paṭhamaṃ udānaṃ paccayākārapaccavekkhaṇavasena, dutiyaṃ nibbānapaccavekkhaṇavasena, tatiyaṃ maggapaccavekkhaṇavasenāti evaṃ imāni bhagavā udānāni udānesī’’ti vuttaṃ, tampi na virujjhati. Bhagavā hi ṭhapetvā ratanagharasattāhaṃ sesesu chasu sattāhesu antarantarā dhammaṃ paccavekkhitvā yebhuyyena vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī vihāsi, ratanagharasattāhe pana abhidhammaparicayavaseneva vihāsīti.
4. 《虎虎经注疏》显示巴利原文
4. Huṃhuṅkasuttavaṇṇanā
4 关于第四个词“在阿阇波罗尼拘律树”(ajapālanigrodhe):据传,牧羊人走进其树荫下坐卧,此树因此得名“阿阇波罗尼拘律树”。另有一说:“由于有些无法诵读吠陀的年老婆罗门,在那里建起带围墙的住所共同居住,所以产生了‘阿阇波罗尼拘律树’的名称。”此处词义解释为——“阿阇波”(ajapā)指“不念诵者”,即不会诵咒之人;这些阿阇波在此“取用”(lanti)住所,故称“阿阇波罗”(ajapāla)。又有一说:由于此树在正午时分庇护走进树荫的羊群,所以惯常以“阿阇波罗”称呼它。无论依哪种说法,此名都指这棵树。这里的“在阿阇波罗尼拘律树”是处格,实指树之附近,表示“靠近那里”之意。显示巴利原文
4. Catutthe ajapālanigrodheti tassa kira chāyāyaṃ ajapālā gantvā nisīdanti, tenassa ‘‘ajapālanigrodho’’tveva nāmaṃ udapādi. Keci pana ‘‘yasmā tattha vede sajjhāyituṃ asamatthā mahallakabrāhmaṇā pākāraparikkhepayuttāni nivesanāni katvā sabbe vasiṃsu, tasmā ajapālanigrodhoti nāmaṃ jāta’’nti vadanti. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – na japantīti ajapā, mantānaṃ anajjhāyakāti attho, ajapā lanti ādiyanti nivāsaṃ etthāti ajapāloti. Yasmā vā majjhanhike samaye anto paviṭṭhe aje attano chāyāya pāleti rakkhati, tasmā ‘ajapālo’tissa nāmaṃ rūḷhanti apare. Sabbathāpi nāmametaṃ tassa rukkhassa, tassa samīpe. Samīpatthe hi etaṃ bhummaṃ ‘‘ajapālanigrodhe’’ti.
“领受解脱之乐”(Vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī)是指,他在那里一边审察法,一边感受解脱之乐而安坐。此树位于菩提树的东方。这里所说的“七日”,并非紧接结跏趺坐七日的那个七日,因为世尊在结跏趺坐七日之后,又于菩提树附近度过另外三个七日。显示巴利原文
Vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti tatrapi dhammaṃ vicinanto vimuttisukhañca paṭisaṃvedento nisīdi. Bodhirukkhato puratthimadisābhāge esa rukkho hoti. Sattāhanti ca idaṃ na pallaṅkasattāhato anantarasattāhaṃ. Bhagavā hi pallaṅkasattāhato aparānipi tīṇi sattāhāni bodhisamīpeyeva vītināmesi.
这里的次第讲述如下:据说,世尊证得无上正等觉后,以同一结跏趺座安坐了整整七日。有天神心生疑念:“世尊不坐起,莫非另有成佛之法?”至第八日,世尊从等至起身,了知天神所疑,为散其疑,便腾空示现双神变,除其疑虑。随后,世尊从跏趺座起身,稍移向偏东的北方站立,目不转睛地注视那座跏趺座及菩提树——正是他于四不可数劫及十万劫中所积波罗蜜得以成就之处——如此度过七日,该处便被称为“不眨眼支提”。接着,在跏趺座与站立处之间,有一条东西走向的宝石经行处,世尊在其上经行七日,该处便被称为“宝石经行支提”。其后,诸天在西方化作一座宝屋,世尊于宝屋内结跏趺坐,详细审察阿毗达摩藏,特别是具足无量理趣的《发趣论》,度过七日,该处便被称为“宝屋支提”。如此,在菩提树附近度过四个七日之后,于第五个七日,世尊从菩提树前往阿阇波罗尼拘律树,在该树下结跏趺坐。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – bhagavati kira sammāsambodhiṃ patvā sattāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisinne ‘‘na bhagavā vuṭṭhāti, kinnu kho aññepi buddhattakarā dhammā atthī’’ti ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ kaṅkhā udapādi. Atha bhagavā aṭṭhame divase samāpattito vuṭṭhāya devatānaṃ kaṅkhaṃ ñatvā kaṅkhāvidhamanatthaṃ ākāse uppatitvā yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ dassetvā tāsaṃ kaṅkhaṃ vidhametvā pallaṅkato īsakaṃ pācīnanissite uttaradisābhāge ṭhatvā cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca upacitānaṃ pāramīnaṃ balādhigamaṭṭhānaṃ pallaṅkaṃ bodhirukkhañca animisehi cakkhūhi olokayamāno sattāhaṃ vītināmesi, taṃ ṭhānaṃ animisacetiyaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Atha pallaṅkassa ca ṭhitaṭṭhānassa ca antarā puratthimato ca pacchimato ca āyate ratanacaṅkame caṅkamanto sattāhaṃ vītināmesi, taṃ ratanacaṅkamacetiyaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Tato pacchimadisābhāge devatā ratanagharaṃ māpayiṃsu , tattha pallaṅkena nisīditvā abhidhammapiṭakaṃ visesato anantanayaṃ samantapaṭṭhānaṃ vicinanto sattāhaṃ vītināmesi, taṃ ṭhānaṃ ratanagharacetiyaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Evaṃ bodhisamīpeyeva cattāri sattāhāni vītināmetvā pañcame sattāhe bodhirukkhato ajapālanigrodhaṃ upasaṅkamitvā tassa mūle pallaṅkena nisīdi.
「从那个定中起来」:世尊按预定时限从果等至定中出定。出定之后,世尊这样坐着时,有一位婆罗门走到他面前请问问题。因此经中说:「那时,有一位……」等等。其中,「有一位」是指不知姓名、不为人知的一位婆罗门。「有哼声习性者」:据说此人喜好吉兆,我慢极重,由于慢与嗔,每当看到不合意的事物,便厌恶地发出「哼、哼」的声音而行,故称「有哼声习性者」,也有读作「huhukkajātika」的。「婆罗门」是指从种姓上属于婆罗门。显示巴利原文
Tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhāsīti tato phalasamāpattisamādhito yathākālaparicchedaṃ vuṭṭhahi, vuṭṭhahitvā ca pana tattha evaṃ nisinne bhagavati eko brāhmaṇo taṃ gantvā pañhaṃ pucchi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho aññataro’’tiādi. Tattha aññataroti nāmagottavasena anabhiññāto apākaṭo eko. Huṃhuṅkajātikoti so kira diṭṭhamaṅgaliko mānathaddho mānavasena kodhavasena ca sabbaṃ avokkhajātikaṃ passitvā jigucchanto ‘‘huṃhu’’nti karonto vicarati, tasmā ‘‘huṃhuṅkajātiko’’ti vuccati, ‘‘huhukkajātiko’’tipi pāṭho. Brāhmaṇoti jātiyā brāhmaṇo.
「到世尊那里」:指世尊所坐的方向,此处的具格是表处所。或者,指应从哪个方向去接近世尊,他就从那个方向接近。再者,此处的具格是表原因,意思是:天神与人由于什么原因应去接近世尊,他便由于那个原因而去接近。那么,是什么原因应当去接近世尊呢?就像有大神力的医师,为被种种病苦逼迫的身体患病的大众治病一样,被种种烦恼病逼迫的心灵患病的天神与人,为了治疗烦恼病,以听法、问问题等因缘去接近世尊。因此,这位婆罗门也是想断除自己的疑惑而去接近的。显示巴利原文
Yena bhagavāti yassaṃ disāyaṃ bhagavā nisinno. Bhummatthe hi etaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ . Yena vā disābhāgena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo, tena disābhāgena upasaṅkami. Atha vā yenāti hetuatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, yena kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti attho. Kena ca kāraṇena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo? Nānappakārarogadukkhābhipīḷitattā āturakāyehi mahājanehi mahānubhāvo bhisakko viya rogatikicchanatthaṃ, nānāvidhakilesabyādhipīḷitattā āturacittehi devamanussehi kilesabyādhitikicchanatthaṃ dhammassavanapañhapucchanādikāraṇehi bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo. Tena ayampi brāhmaṇo attano kaṅkhaṃ chinditukāmo upasaṅkami.
「走近后」:表明接近动作的完成。或者,指他到了那个地方之后,更进一步走到了比那地方更加靠近世尊的邻近处。「欣然交谈」:指平等地、正确地喜悦。世尊与他,他与世尊,彼此以“尊者是否堪忍、是否足以维持生命”等方式作了款待,从而正当进行的喜悦。「可欣悦的」:指值得欣悦、能引生欣悦的。「谈论」:即交谈。「可忆念的」:指应被记持、应被善士施行,或者在其他时候应被思惟的谈论。在作完了可欣悦、可忆念的谈论之后。「一面」:是中性名词的表述,指在一边,也就是避开了过近的对面等六种坐的过失之后,在一处地方。「说了这话」:说了如下的、将要说的“怎样才算”等话语。显示巴利原文
Upasaṅkamitvāti upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā yaṃ ṭhānaṃ upasaṅkami, tatopi bhagavato samīpabhūtaṃ āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ upagantvāti attho. Sammodīti samaṃ sammā vā modi, bhagavā cānena, sopi bhagavatā ‘‘kacci bhoto khamanīyaṃ kacci yāpanīya’’ntiādinā paṭisanthārakaraṇavasena samappavattamodo ahosi. Sammodanīyanti sammodanārahaṃ sammodajananayoggaṃ. Kathanti kathāsallāpaṃ. Sāraṇīyanti saritabbayuttaṃ sādhujanehi pavattetabbaṃ, kālantare vā cintetabbaṃ. Vītisāretvāti niṭṭhāpetvā. Ekamantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso. Ekasmiṃ ṭhāne, atisammukhādike cha nisajjadose vajjetvā ekasmiṃ padeseti attho. Etadavocāti etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.
其中,“怎样才算”是问以什么为标准。“nu”是表疑惑的虚词。“kho”是添词。“尊”是婆罗门因种姓而生的称呼。正如所说:“若有所积蓄,便名为好尊称者。”(《中部·行乞清净经》等)“乔达摩”是以姓氏称呼世尊。然而,这位婆罗门并非初次遇见世尊,又如何知道他的姓氏呢?他并非初次相见。世尊在六年精勤修行时,曾与随侍的五比丘一起游方;后来舍弃了那样的苦行,在优楼频螺的将军村独自托钵游行。那时,这位婆罗门就曾见过世尊并交谈。因此,他记得先前五比丘所称呼的世尊姓氏,便以“乔达摩尊者”来称世尊。或者说,自世尊出离,于阿奴摩河畔出家以来,“沙门乔达摩”便如日月一般广为人知,所以他为何知道世尊姓氏,也就无需特别探究了。显示巴利原文
Tattha kittāvatāti kittakena pamāṇena. Nūti saṃsayatthe nipāto. Khoti padapūraṇe. Bhoti brāhmaṇānaṃ jātisamudāgataṃ ālapanaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhovādi nāma so hoti, sace hoti sakiñcano’’ti (ma. ni. 2.457; dha. pa. 396). Gotamāti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ brāhmaṇo sampatisamāgato bhagavato gottaṃ jānātīti? Nāyaṃ sampatisamāgato, chabbassāni padhānakaraṇakāle upaṭṭhahantehi pañcavaggiyehi saddhiṃ caramānopi, aparabhāge taṃ vataṃ chaḍḍetvā uruvelāyaṃ senanigame eko adutiyo hutvā piṇḍāya caramānopi tena brāhmaṇena diṭṭhapubbo ceva sallapitapubbo ca. Tena so pubbe pañcavaggiyehi gayhamānaṃ bhagavato gottaṃ anussaranto, ‘‘bho gotamā’’ti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati. Yato paṭṭhāya vā bhagavā mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhamanto anomanadītīre pabbajito, tato pabhuti ‘‘samaṇo gotamo’’ti cando viya sūriyo viya ca pākaṭo paññāto, na tassa gottajānane kāraṇaṃ gavesitabbaṃ.
“能作婆罗门的”是指那些能使人成为婆罗门的法,也就是成就婆罗门性的法。这里,“怎样才算”是问那些使人成为婆罗门的法的标准,“而哪些又是”则是问这些法的具体内容。显示巴利原文
Brāhmaṇakaraṇāti brāhmaṇaṃ karontīti brāhmaṇakaraṇā, brāhmaṇabhāvakarāti attho. Ettha ca kittāvatāti etena yehi dhammehi brāhmaṇo hoti, tesaṃ dhammānaṃ parimāṇaṃ pucchati. Katame ca panāti iminā tesaṃ sarūpaṃ pucchati.
“了知此义后”:世尊了知他所问问题的究竟义后,在那时诵出了这首感兴偈,而并非为那位婆罗门说法。为什么呢?因为他不是堪受法者。实际上,那位婆罗门听了此偈后,并未证得谛现观。如同对此婆罗门,向邪命外道优波迦宣说佛德时也是如此。因为在转法轮之前的时期,世尊所说的话,即使有他人听闻,也仅是习行分,而非有学分,亦非抉择分,就如同为提谓、波利两位商人授皈依时那样。这是法性。显示巴利原文
Etamatthaṃ viditvāti etaṃ tena puṭṭhassa pañhassa sikhāpattaṃ atthaṃ viditvā tāyaṃ velāyaṃ imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi, na pana tassa brāhmaṇassa dhammaṃ desesi. Kasmā? Dhammadesanāya abhājanabhāvato. Tathā hi tassa brāhmaṇassa imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā na saccābhisamayo ahosi. Yathā ca imassa, evaṃ upakassa ājīvakassa buddhaguṇappakāsanaṃ. Dhammacakkappavattanato hi pubbabhāge bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ paresaṃ suṇantānampi tapussabhallikānaṃ saraṇadānaṃ viya vāsanābhāgiyameva jātaṃ, na sekkhabhāgiyaṃ, na nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ. Esā hi dhammatāti.
「真正的婆罗门」:是指由于排除了恶法而成为婆罗门,而不是那种由于信奉吉兆、带着发出“哼”声等垢秽恶法,仅凭出身便自认有婆罗门性的人。这样的婆罗门,因排除了恶法、舍断了哼声,故称「无哼声者」;因无贪等垢秽,故称「无垢者」;因心系于修习,故称「调御者」(意为以戒禁防而心得制御,故名调御者);以称为四道智的诸明达到行蕴灭尽的涅槃,或已到达诸明的终极,故称「明达终极者」;因道的梵行已经完成,故称「已住梵行者」。他可以如法地宣说梵论,即可以依法依理地自称“我是婆罗门”。对于他,在整个有情的世间,于任何处所、任何所缘上,已无贪增盛、瞋增盛、痴增盛、慢增盛、见增盛这些增盛,也就是说,他已将这些毫无剩余地断除。显示巴利原文
Tattha yo brāhmaṇoti yo bāhitapāpadhammatāya brāhmaṇo, na diṭṭhamaṅgalikatāya huṃhuṅkārakasāvādipāpadhammayutto hutvā kevalaṃ jātimattakena brahmaññaṃ paṭijānāti. So brāhmaṇo bāhitapāpadhammattā huṃhuṅkārappahānena nihuṃhuṅko, rāgādikasāvābhāvena nikkasāvo, bhāvanānuyogayuttacittatāya yatatto, sīlasaṃyamena vā saṃyatacittatāya yatatto, catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātehi vedehi antaṃ saṅkhārapariyosānaṃ nibbānaṃ, vedānaṃ vā antaṃ gatattā vedantagū. Maggabrahmacariyassa vusitattā vusitabrahmacariyo, dhammena so brahmavādaṃ vadeyya ‘‘brāhmaṇo aha’’nti etaṃ vādaṃ dhammena ñāyena vadeyya. Yassa sakalalokasannivāsepi kuhiñci ekārammaṇepi rāgussado, dosussado, mohussado, mānussado, diṭṭhussadoti ime ussadā natthi, anavasesaṃ pahīnāti attho.
第五、《婆罗门经》注疏显示巴利原文
5. Brāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
5 「在舍卫城」:即在这座名为舍卫城的城市。此城因建于名叫萨婆吒的仙人住处,故得名「舍卫城」,如同迦甘迪、摩甘迪的命名方式。这是擅长文字者的说法。然而注疏师们说:“人们所受用的一切,在这里无不有,因此称为舍卫城。”而且,当商队聚集时,问:“这里有什么货物?”回答:“什么都有。”依此说法,也称为舍卫城。显示巴利原文
5. Pañcame sāvatthiyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tañhi savatthassa nāma isino nivāsaṭṭhāne māpitattā sāvatthīti vuccati, yathā kākandī, mākandīti. Evaṃ tāva akkharacintakā. Aṭṭhakathācariyā pana bhaṇanti – yaṃkiñci manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ sabbamettha atthīti sāvatthi. Satthasamāyoge ca kimettha bhaṇḍamatthīti pucchite sabbamatthītipi vacanaṃ upādāya sāvatthīti.
一切时中一切资具,悉皆聚集于舍卫城;以此一切具足之义,故得名为舍卫城。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbadā sabbūpakaraṇaṃ, sāvatthiyaṃ samohitaṃ;
「在彼舍卫城中」(tassaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ)是表示近处的处所格。「祇园」(Jetavane):战胜了自己的敌人,所以称为「祇多」;或者由国王战胜敌人所生,所以叫「祇多」;或者为了吉祥而取这个名字,所以叫「祇多」。「园」(vana):能让有情喜悦,也就是以自己的成就激发众生对自己的恭敬;或者指树木,有种种花香悦意,有杜鹃等鸟类的和鸣,有微风摇曳的树枝新叶如手,仿佛向众生招手说“来享用我吧”,所以称为园。「祇多的园」就是祇园。这个园由祇多王子种植、培育、守护,他即是园主,所以称为祇园。在那祇园中。显示巴利原文
Tasmā sabbamupādāya, sāvatthīti pavuccatī’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.14);
“在舍卫城”——这是表示邻近的处所格。
“祇园”:因为战胜了自己的敌人,所以称为“祇多”;或是因为在国王战胜了敌人之后出生,所以称为“祇多”;又或是为了吉祥而取了这个名字,所以称为“祇多”。
“能令生起喜爱,故名为园”,意思是:以自身的成就令众生对自己生起敬爱。
或者,“园”意为“乞请”:园中有种种花香和鸣、令人陶醉的杜鹃等鸟类的鸣叫,微风吹拂的树枝嫩叶宛如招手,仿佛在向众生乞请:“来吧,请享用我吧。”
祇多的园,就是祇园。由于此园是由祇多王子种植、培育和守护的,他即是园主,因此称为“祇园”。在那祇园中。显示巴利原文
Tassaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ, samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Jetavaneti attano paccatthike jinātīti jeto, raññā vā paccatthikajane jite jātoti jeto, maṅgalakamyatāya vā tassa evaṃ nāmameva katanti jeto. Vanayatīti vanaṃ, attano sampattiyā sattānaṃ attani bhattiṃ karoti uppādetīti attho. Vanuke iti vā vanaṃ, nānāvidhakusumagandhasammodamattakokilādivihaṅgavirutālāpehi mandamārutacalitarukkhasākhāpallavahatthehi ca ‘‘etha maṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti pāṇino yācati viyāti attho. Jetassa vanaṃ jetavanaṃ. Tañhi jetena kumārena ropitaṃ saṃvaddhitaṃ paripālitaṃ. Sova tassa sāmī ahosi, tasmā jetavananti vuccati, tasmiṃ jetavane.
“在给孤独长者的园中”:依父母所取的名字,这位大长者名为须达多;然而,由于他具足一切欲乐、远离垢秽与悭吝、具足悲悯等功德,并且恒常施食给无依无靠的人,因此被称为“给孤独”。
有情——特别是出家众——来到这里便生起喜悦,所以称为“园”;或因花果等景致秀丽,以及具足不远不近等五种坐卧具的支分,令来自各处的人们欢喜、极为欢喜、不厌烦地安住,所以称为“园”;又因这座园具有如此的成就,即使四处游走的人们被它吸引进入内部也心生喜悦,所以称为“园”。
此园是给孤独居士从祇多王子手中,用十八亿金币铺地买下,再用十八亿金币建造坐卧具,又用十八亿金币完成大寺院,总共以五十四亿金币的布施,奉献给以佛陀为首的僧团,因此称为“给孤独长者的园”。在那给孤独长者的园中。显示巴利原文
Anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmeti mātāpitūhi gahitanāmavasena sudatto nāma so mahāseṭṭhi, sabbakāmasamiddhitāya pana vigatamalamaccheratāya karuṇādiguṇasamaṅgitāya ca niccakālaṃ anāthānaṃ piṇḍaṃ deti, tasmā anāthapiṇḍikoti vuccati. Āramanti ettha pāṇino visesena pabbajitāti ārāmo, pupphaphalādisobhāya nātidūranāccāsannatādipañcavidhasenāsanaṅgasampattiyā ca tato tato āgamma ramanti abhiramanti anukkaṇṭhitā hutvā vasantīti attho. Vuttappakārāya vā sampattiyā tattha tattha gatepi attano abbhantaraṃyeva ānetvā rametīti ārāmo. So hi anāthapiṇḍikena gahapatinā jetassa rājakumārassa hatthato aṭṭhārasahi hiraññakoṭīhi koṭisanthārena kiṇitvā aṭṭhārasahi hiraññakoṭīhi senāsanāni kārāpetvā aṭṭhārasahi hiraññakoṭīhi vihāramahaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā evaṃ catupaññāsahiraññakoṭipariccāgena buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa niyyātito, tasmā ‘‘anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmo’’ti vuccati. Tasmiṃ anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
在这里,“祇园”一词是称扬前主的,“给孤独长者的园”则是称扬后主的。两者都是为了彰显二人布施的殊胜,令希求功德者于未来效法先例。其中,祇多通过建造门楼殿堂等,将卖地所得的十八亿金币以及无数亿价值的树木作为布施;给孤独则布施了五十四亿金币。如此称述他们的布施,表明“希求功德者就是这样造作功德的”,说法者也藉此鼓励其他希求功德者效法先例。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘jetavane’’ti vacanaṃ purimasāmiparikittanaṃ, ‘‘anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme’’ti pacchimasāmiparikittanaṃ. Ubhayampi dvinnaṃ pariccāgavisesaparidīpanena puññakāmānaṃ āyatiṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanatthaṃ. Tattha hi dvārakoṭṭhakapāsādakaraṇavasena bhūmivikkayaladdhā aṭṭhārasa hiraññakoṭiyo anekakoṭiagghanakā rukkhā ca jetassa pariccāgo, catupaññāsa koṭiyo anāthapiṇḍikassa. Iti tesaṃ pariccāgaparikittanena ‘‘evaṃ puññakāmā puññāni karontī’’ti dassento dhammabhaṇḍāgāriko aññepi puññakāme tesaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjane niyojetīti.
于此,可能会生起这样的疑问:若世尊住于舍卫城,则不应说“在祇园”;若住于祇园,则不应说“在舍卫城”,因为世尊不可能同一时间住于两处。然而不应如此看待,难道我们此前不曾说过“这是表示近处的处所格”吗?由此,祇园位于舍卫城附近,世尊住于彼处时,便被记述为“住于舍卫城,在祇园”。其中,举出“舍卫城”是为了标示托钵的聚落,其余文字则是为了标示适合出家人居住的处所。显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā – yadi tāva bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, ‘‘jetavane’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Atha jetavane viharati, ‘‘sāvatthiya’’nti na vattabbaṃ. Na hi sakkā ubhayattha ekaṃ samayaṃ viharitunti. Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, nanu avocumhā ‘‘samīpatthe etaṃ bhummavacana’’nti. Tasmā yadidaṃ sāvatthiyā samīpe jetavanaṃ, tattha viharanto ‘‘sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane’’ti vutto. Gocaragāmanidassanatthaṃ hissa sāvatthivacanaṃ, pabbajitānurūpanivāsaṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ sesavacananti.
“具寿舍利弗”等句中,“具寿”是亲切的称呼。“ca”字是并列连接词。因是名为“色舍利”的婆罗门女之子,故名“舍利弗”。“大目犍连”是尊称,因为在种种殊胜功德上卓越超群,这位目犍连便称为“大目犍连”。“离婆多”是指住在枳树林的离婆多,并非疑离婆多。确实有一天,世尊端坐于四众弟子中央说法,宛若被红布围绕的金柱,如被珊瑚旗环绕的金山,如被九万只天鹅随行的持国天鹅王,又如被七宝闪耀的四部军队围绕的转轮王,更被大比丘僧团所簇拥,恰似被众星捧至天宇正中的月亮。那时,这些上首弟子与大弟子们,为了顶礼世尊的双足,纷纷前来。显示巴利原文
Āyasmā ca sāriputtotiādīsu āyasmāti piyavacanaṃ. Casaddo samuccayattho. Rūpasāriyā nāma brāhmaṇiyā puttoti sāriputto. Mahāmoggallānoti pūjāvacanaṃ. Guṇavisesehi mahanto moggallānoti hi mahāmoggallāno. Revatoti khadiravanikarevato, na kaṅkhārevato. Ekasmiñhi divase bhagavā rattasāṇiparikkhitto viya suvaṇṇayūpo, pavāḷadhajaparivārito viya suvaṇṇapabbato, navutihaṃsasahassaparivārito viya dhataraṭṭho haṃsarājā, sattaratanasamujjalāya caturaṅginiyā senāya parivārito viya cakkavatti rājā, mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivuto gaganamajjhe candaṃ uṭṭhāpento viya catunnaṃ parisānaṃ majjhe dhammaṃ desento nisinno hoti. Tasmiṃ samaye ime aggasāvakā mahāsāvakā ca bhagavato pāde vandanatthāya upasaṅkamiṃsu.
“世尊召唤比丘们”意为:世尊让围绕自己而坐的比丘们看到那些正在前来的尊者后,开口说话。世尊见到这些具足戒、定、慧等功德,成就最上寂静、具足最上威仪的尊者走近,心生欢喜,为了称扬他们殊胜的功德,而对比丘们说:“比丘们,这些婆罗门来了,比丘们,这些婆罗门来了。”这重复是出于欢喜,也可以理解为出于称赞,两者都合理。“当世尊这样说”是指当世尊称那些尊者为“婆罗门”时。当时,在集会中坐着一位名字与种姓都不显著的比丘,他出生于婆罗门家族——确实是从拥有巨大财富的大婆罗门家出家的。据说他这样想:“世间人说,唯有父母两方家系都清净并且完成了婆罗门学习的人,才是婆罗门,而不是通过其他方式;然而世尊却称这些尊者为婆罗门。我应当问世尊婆罗门的特徵。”世尊当时之所以称那些长老为“婆罗门”,正是为了这个目的。因为“婆罗门”(brāhmaṇa)一词,据词源可解释为“去除恶”(Brahmaṃ aṇatīti)。而圣者们因为已经消除了诸恶,成为婆罗门。这已有说过:“‘已消除诸恶者,是为婆罗门;行平等行者,称为沙门。’(法句经显示巴利原文
Bhikkhū āmantesīti attānaṃ parivāretvā nisinnabhikkhū te āgacchante dassetvā abhāsi. Bhagavā hi te āyasmante sīlasamādhipaññādiguṇasampanne paramena upasamena samannāgate paramāya ākappasampattiyā yutte upasaṅkamante passitvā pasannamānaso tesaṃ guṇavisesaparikittanatthaṃ bhikkhū āmantesi ‘‘ete, bhikkhave, brāhmaṇā āgacchanti, ete, bhikkhave, brāhmaṇā āgacchantī’’ti. Pasādavasena etaṃ āmeḍitaṃ, pasaṃsāvasenātipi vattuṃ yuttaṃ. Evaṃ vutteti evaṃ bhagavatā te āyasmante ‘‘brāhmaṇā’’ti vutte. Aññataroti nāmagottena apākaṭo, tassaṃ parisāyaṃ nisinno eko bhikkhu. Brāhmaṇajātikoti brāhmaṇakule jāto. So hi uḷārabhogā brāhmaṇamahāsālakulā pabbajito. Tassa kira evaṃ ahosi ‘‘ime lokiyā ubhatosujātiyā brāhmaṇasikkhānipphattiyā ca brāhmaṇo hoti, na aññathāti vadanti, bhagavā ca ete āyasmante brāhmaṇāti vadati, handāhaṃ bhagavantaṃ brāhmaṇalakkhaṇaṃ puccheyya’’nti etadatthameva hi bhagavā tadā te there ‘‘brāhmaṇā’’ti abhāsi. Brahmaṃ aṇatīti brāhmaṇoti hi jātibrāhmaṇānaṃ nibbacanaṃ. Ariyā pana bāhitapāpatāya brāhmaṇā. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘bāhitapāpoti brāhmaṇo, samacariyā samaṇoti vuccatī’’ti (dha. pa. 388). Vakkhati ca ‘‘bāhitvā pāpake dhamme’’ti.
“了知此义”是指了知这“婆罗门”一词在究竟意义上的特徵,也就是达到顶点的义理后。“他诵出此优陀那”是指他诵出了这首表明究竟婆罗门身份的优陀那(感兴语)。显示巴利原文
Etamatthaṃ viditvāti etaṃ brāhmaṇasaddassa paramatthato sikhāpattamatthaṃ jānitvā. Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ paramatthabrāhmaṇabhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
在这里,“消除了”(bāhitvā)的意思是驱逐出去、从自己的心相续中取出,以断除和舍断的方式弃除。“诸恶法”是指那些低劣的法:从恶行来说,指三种恶行的法;从心生起来说,指十二种不善心的生起;从业道来说,指十种不善业道;从转起的种种差别来说,指一切品类众多的不善法。“那些恒常具念而行者”是指由于获得强盛的念力,于一切时对色等六种所缘恒住于念,成为具念者,以四威仪而行的人。这里因为提到了“念”,应当了知同时也包含了正知。“已尽诸结者”是指以四圣道断除了十种结,因而诸结已尽的人。“佛陀”是指由于觉悟了四谛而成为佛陀的人。而这种佛陀又有声闻佛陀、独觉佛、正自觉者三种,其中在这里指的是声闻佛陀。“他们就是这世间的婆罗门”的意思是:他们以最胜义而被称为“婆罗门”,是法上的圣种姓所生,或是已经成就婆罗门果位的世尊的亲生子——在这有情世间中,从究竟意义上才叫作婆罗门,并不仅仅由于种姓家族,也不仅仅由于蓄发等外表手段。如此,在这两部经中,阐述了实现婆罗门身份的诸法,使其达到阿显示巴利原文
Tattha bāhitvāti bahi katvā, attano santānato nīharitvā samucchedappahānavasena pajahitvāti attho. Pāpake dhammeti lāmake dhamme, duccaritavasena tividhaduccaritadhamme, cittuppādavasena dvādasākusalacittuppāde, kammapathavasena dasākusalakammapathe, pavattibhedavasena anekabhedabhinne sabbepi akusaladhammeti attho. Ye caranti sadā satāti ye sativepullappattatāya sabbakālaṃ rūpādīsu chasupi ārammaṇesu satatavihāravasena satā satimanto hutvā catūhi iriyāpathehi caranti. Satiggahaṇeneva cettha sampajaññampi gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Khīṇasaṃyojanāti catūhipi ariyamaggehi dasavidhassa saṃyojanassa samucchinnattā parikkhīṇasaṃyojanā. Buddhāti catusaccasambodhena buddhā. Te ca pana sāvakabuddhā, paccekabuddhā , sammāsambuddhāti tividhā, tesu idha sāvakabuddhā adhippetā. Teve lokasmi brāhmaṇāti te seṭṭhatthena brāhmaṇasaṅkhāte dhamme ariyāya jātiyā jātā, brāhmaṇabhūtassa vā bhagavato orasaputtāti imasmiṃ sattaloke paramatthato brāhmaṇā nāma, na jātigottamattehi, na jaṭādhāraṇādimattena vāti attho. Evaṃ imesu dvīsu suttesu brāhmaṇakarā dhammā arahattaṃ pāpetvā kathitā, nānajjhāsayatāya pana sattānaṃ desanāvilāsena abhilāpanānattena desanānānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
6. 大迦叶经注疏显示巴利原文
6. Mahākassapasuttavaṇṇanā
6 第六部经中,“在王舍城”:即以此命名的城市。因为这座城曾为大曼陀多王、大典尊等所占据,故称“王舍城”。又因“难为敌国攻克,成为其住处,故名王舍城”等其他方式解释。总之,这是那座城市的名字。这座城在佛陀时代及转轮王时代是城市,其余时间则空废,为夜叉所占据,成为他们的住处。“在竹林栗鼠饲养处”:竹林是那座精舍的名字。据说,该精舍以十八肘高的围墙围绕,内有适合佛陀居住的大香房,并配有殿堂、楼阁、洞窟、讲堂、经行道、门屋等,外被竹林环绕,显出青色光泽,令人心旷神怡,因此称为“竹林”。又因那里曾给栗鼠投放食物,故称“栗鼠饲养处”。传说过去有一位国王进入那片园林游玩,醉酒后白日躺下入睡,随从们以为“国王已睡”,便受花果等吸引,四散离去。此时,由于酒味,从一棵树洞中爬出一条黑蛇,朝国王而来。树神看到后,心想“我要救国王性命”,便化作一只栗鼠,在国王耳边发出声音。国王醒来,黑蛇便退了回去。国王见后,知道此栗鼠救了自己的命,便在那……显示巴利原文
6. Chaṭṭhe rājagaheti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tañhi mahāmandhātumahāgovindādīhi pariggahitattā ‘‘rājagaha’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Durabhibhavanīyattā paṭirājūnaṃ gahabhūtanti rājagaha’’ntiādinā aññenettha pakārena vaṇṇayanti. Kintehi? Nāmametaṃ tassa nagarassa. Taṃ panetaṃ buddhakāle cakkavattikāle ca nagaraṃ hoti, sesakāle suññaṃ yakkhapariggahitaṃ tesaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Veḷuvane kalandakanivāpeti veḷuvananti tassa vihārassa nāmaṃ. Taṃ kira aṭṭhārasahatthubbedhena pākārena parikkhittaṃ buddhassa bhagavato vasanānucchavikāya mahatiyā gandhakuṭiyā aññehi ca pāsādakuṭileṇamaṇḍapacaṅkamadvārakoṭṭhakādīhi paṭimaṇḍitaṃ bahi veḷūhi parikkhittaṃ ahosi nīlobhāsaṃ manoramaṃ, tena ‘‘veḷuvana’’nti vuccati. Kalandakānañcettha nivāpaṃ adaṃsu, tasmā ‘‘kalandakanivāpo’’ti vuccati. Pubbe kira aññataro rājā taṃ uyyānaṃ kīḷanatthaṃ paviṭṭho surāmadamatto divāseyyaṃ upagato supi, parijanopissa ‘‘sutto rājā’’ti pupphaphalādīhi palobhiyamāno ito cito ca pakkāmi. Atha surāgandhena aññatarasmā rukkhasusirā kaṇhasappo nikkhamitvā rañño abhimukho āgacchati. Taṃ disvā rukkhadevatā ‘‘rañño jīvitaṃ dassāmī’’ti kalandakavesena gantvā kaṇṇamūle saddamakāsi. Rājā paṭibujjhi, kaṇhasappo nivatto. So taṃ disvā ‘‘imāya kāḷakāya mama jīvitaṃ dinna’’nti kāḷakānaṃ nivāpaṃ tattha paṭṭhapesi, abhayaghosañca ghosāpesi. Tasmā tato paṭṭhāya taṃ ‘‘kalandakanivāpa’’nti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Kalandakāti hi kāḷakānaṃ nāmaṃ, tasmiṃ veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
“大迦叶”:因具足戒蕴等大功德,故为伟大的迦叶,称为大迦叶;再者,相对于童迦叶长老,这位大长老特称“大迦叶”。“在毕钵罗窟”:据说该窟门边有一棵毕钵罗树,因此此窟被称为“毕钵罗窟”。在那毕钵罗窟中。“患病者”:他有病,是为患病者,即生病之意。“痛苦者”:他身上生起了身苦,故为痛苦者,即遭受痛苦之意。“重病者”:即病得很重,他以正念正知忍受了那场重病。那时,世尊知道了这件事,便来到那里,诵说觉支护卫经,长老的病便因此止息。此事在《觉支相应》中也有记载。显示巴利原文
Mahākassapoti mahantehi sīlakkhandhādīhi samannāgatattā mahanto kassapoti mahākassapo, apica kumārakassapattheraṃ upādāya ayaṃ mahāthero ‘‘mahākassapo’’ti vuccati. Pippaliguhāyanti tassā kira guhāya dvārasamīpe eko pippalirukkho ahosi, tena sā ‘‘pippaliguhā’’ti paññāyittha. Tassaṃ pippaliguhāyaṃ. Ābādhikoti ābādho assa atthīti ābādhiko, byādhikoti attho. Dukkhitoti kāyasannissitaṃ dukkhaṃ sañjātaṃ assāti dukkhito, dukkhappattoti attho. Bāḷhagilānoti adhimattagelañño, taṃ pana gelaññaṃ sato sampajāno hutvā adhivāsesi. Athassa bhagavā taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā tattha gantvā bojjhaṅgaparittaṃ abhāsi, teneva therassa so ābādho vūpasami. Vuttañhetaṃ bojjhaṅgasaṃyutte –
那时,尊者大迦叶住在毕钵罗窟,患病、痛苦、病得很重。那时,世尊在傍晚时分从独处禅坐中起来,前往尊者大迦叶那里。到了之后,在铺设好的座位上坐下。坐下后,世尊对尊者大迦叶说:“迦叶,你还能忍受吗?还能维持吗?苦受在减退,而不是在增长吗?看得出减退,而不是增长吗?”“尊者,我无法忍受,无法维持。尊者,我的苦受非常剧烈,在增长,没有减退;看得出增长,没有减退。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā mahākassapo pippaliguhāyaṃ viharati ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṃ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yenāyasmā mahākassapo tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā…pe… etadavoca – ‘kacci te, kassapa, khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci dukkhā vedanā paṭikkamanti, no abhikkamanti, paṭikkamosānaṃ paññāyati no abhikkamo’ti? ‘Na me, bhante, khamanīyaṃ, na yāpanīyaṃ, bāḷhā me bhante, dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti no paṭikkamanti, abhikkamosānaṃ paññāyati no paṭikkamo’ti.
“迦叶,这七觉支是我所善说,若能修习、多修习,便能导向证智、正觉与涅槃。哪七种呢?念觉支,迦叶,是我所善说,修习、多修习后,能导向证智、正觉与涅槃……舍觉支,迦叶,是我所善说,修习、多修习后,能导向证智、正觉与涅槃。迦叶,这七觉支确是我所善说,修习、多修习后,能导向证智、正觉与涅槃。”“世尊,确实是觉支!善逝,确实是觉支!”显示巴利原文
‘‘‘Sattime, kassapa, bojjhaṅgā mayā sammadakkhātā bhāvitā bahulīkatā abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattanti. Katame satta? Satisambojjhaṅgo kho, kassapa, mayā sammadakkhāto bhāvito bahulīkato abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati…pe… upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo kho, kassapa, mayā sammadakkhāto bhāvito bahulīkato abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati. Ime kho, kassapa, satta bojjhaṅgā mayā sammadakkhātā bhāvitā bahūlīkatā abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattantī’ti. ‘Taggha bhagavā bojjhaṅgā, taggha, sugata, bojjhaṅgā’’’ti.
世尊说了这番话。尊者大迦叶心满意足,对世尊所说深生欢喜。尊者大迦叶便从此病中痊愈,尊者大迦叶的那个病也就这样被断除了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā mahākassapo bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandi. Vuṭṭhahi cāyasmā mahākassapo tamhā ābādhā, tathā pahīno cāyasmato mahākassapassa so ābādho ahosī’’ti.
因此,经中说:“那时,尊者大迦叶过了一段时间,从那个病中痊愈了。”显示巴利原文
Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo aparena samayena tamhā ābādhā vuṭṭhāsī’’ti.
“他那时就住在寺院里”:先前在生病期间,他食用同住比丘们带来的团食,便安住在寺院。病愈时,他生起这样的念头:“我何不进入王舍城乞食呢?”“约五百位天女”:指帝释天王的五百位侍女,都是长着鸡脚的天女。“她们努力”:她们心想:“我们要供养长老团食”,于是准备了五百份团食,用金钵盛着,站在半路,说道:“尊者,请接受这份团食,请摄受我们吧!”就这样致力于供养团食。因此,经文说:“为尊者大迦叶获得团食”。显示巴利原文
Etadahosīti pubbe gelaññadivasesu saddhivihārikehi upanītaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjitvā vihāre eva ahosi. Athassa tamhā ābādhā vuṭṭhitassa etaṃ ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ rājagahaṃ piṇḍāya paviseyya’’nti parivitakko ahosi. Pañcamattāni devatāsatānīti sakkassa devarañño paricārikā pañcasatā kakuṭapādiniyo accharāyo. Ussukkaṃ āpannāni hontīti therassa piṇḍapātaṃ dassāmāti pañcapiṇḍapātasatāni sajjetvā suvaṇṇabhājanehi ādāya antarāmagge ṭhatvā, ‘‘bhante, imaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ gaṇhatha, saṅgahaṃ no karothā’’ti vadamānā piṇḍapātadāne yuttappayuttāni honti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āyasmato mahākassapassa piṇḍapātappaṭilābhāyā’’ti.
据说,帝释天王知道了长老的心念,便派遣那些天女去,说道:“你们去供养大迦叶长老团食,然后为自己建立一个依怙吧。”他这样思惟:“若这些天女都去,或许长老会接受其中某一位手中的团食,那对她便有长远的利益与安乐。”长老拒绝了她们。她们恳求说:“尊者,请接受我的团食,请接受我的团食吧!”长老说:“你们走吧,你们是已造过福、有大受用的,我要摄受那些贫苦的人。”她们又说:“尊者,请不要舍弃我们,请摄受我们吧!”长老再次拒绝,她们仍不离去,继续恳求。长老说:“你们难道不知自己是谁吗?走开!”随即弹了响指。那些天女听到长老的响指声,惊恐得不敢停留,逃回了天界。因此,经文说:“拒绝了约五百位天女后”。显示巴利原文
Sakko kira devarājā therassa cittappavattiṃ ñatvā tā accharāyo uyyojesi ‘‘gacchatha tumhe ayyassa mahākassapattherassa piṇḍapātaṃ datvā attano patiṭṭhaṃ karothā’’ti. Evaṃ hissa ahosi ‘‘imāsu sabbāsu gatāsu kadāci ekissāpi hatthato piṇḍapātaṃ thero paṭiggaṇheyya, taṃ tassā bhavissati dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti. Paṭikkhipi thero, ‘‘bhante , mayhaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ gaṇhatha, mayhaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadantiyo ‘‘gacchatha tumhe katapuññā mahābhogā, ahaṃ duggatānaṃ saṅgahaṃ karissāmī’’ti vatvā, ‘‘bhante, mā no nāsetha, saṅgahaṃ no karothā’’ti vadantiyo punapi paṭikkhipitvā punapi apagantuṃ anicchamānā yācantiyo ‘‘na attano pamāṇaṃ jānātha, apagacchathā’’ti vatvā accharaṃ pahari. Tā therassa accharāsaddaṃ sutvā santajjitā ṭhātuṃ asakkontiyo palāyitvā devalokameva gatā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pañcamattāni devatāsatāni paṭikkhipitvā’’ti.
“在午前的时候”:指午前的一个时刻。“穿好下衣”:依寺院更衣的方式,将下衣牢固地穿好。“拿了钵与衣”:披好袈裟,手持钵。“为了团食而入”:为乞食而进入。“贫民巷”:穷苦人所住的地方。“穷巷”:因财富衰耗而可怜的人所住之处。“织工巷”:织工们居住的地方。“世尊看见了”:是怎样看见的呢?世尊坐在竹林精舍里,以天眼观察:“我的法子迦叶的病已痊愈,现在在做什么呢?”就这样看见了。显示巴利原文
Pubbaṇhasamayanti pubbaṇhe ekaṃ samayaṃ, ekasmiṃ kāle. Nivāsetvāti vihāranivāsanaparivattanavasena nivāsanaṃ daḷhaṃ nivāsetvā. Pattacīvaramādāyāti cīvaraṃ pārupitvā pattaṃ hatthena gahetvā. Piṇḍāya pāvisīti piṇḍapātatthāya pāvisi. Daliddavisikhāti duggatamanussānaṃ vasanokāso. Kapaṇavisikhāti bhogapārijuññappattiyā dīnamanussānaṃ vāso. Pesakāravisikhāti tantavāyavāso. Addasā kho bhagavāti kathaṃ addasa? ‘‘Ābādhā vuṭṭhito mama putto kassapo kinnu kho karotī’’ti āvajjento veḷuvane nisinno eva bhagavā dibbacakkhunā addasa.
「了知此义」是说,了知了这一义理:大迦叶尊者拒绝了五百位天女呈上、具足种种羹汤与菜肴的天界团食,而奉行护持贫苦人的修行。如此了知此义之后,「宣说此优陀那」是说,他宣说了这首优陀那,此优陀那透过开显最上少欲等,彰显了漏尽者如如之威德。显示巴利原文
Etamatthaṃviditvāti yāyaṃ āyasmato mahākassapassa pañcahi accharāsatehi upanītaṃ anekasūpaṃ anekabyañjanaṃ dibbapiṇḍapātaṃ paṭikkhipitvā kapaṇajanānuggahappaṭipatti vuttā, etamatthaṃ jānitvā. Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ paramappicchatādassanamukhena khīṇāsavassa tādībhāvānubhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
「不养他人」:养他人者名为“养他人”,不养他人即是“不养他人”。因为没有需要自己养育的任何他人,所以是无侣、独一的意思。这显示了长老易养的特质。长老确实仅以遮身之衣、果腹之食养活自身,成为最上少欲而住,不养育任何亲戚朋友等,因为他在一切处皆无执著。或者,由于不需由他人来养育,故为“不养他人”。一个人若只依止某一位施主而获得四资具,那只是专一受用,并不称为“不养他人”。而长老依照《法句经》“如蜂从花”偈所说,只凭脚力行乞,于诸家中常如新来,以杂合之食维生。因此,世尊以月喻之道称赞他。
「不被知」:即被充分了知,因真实功德而声名远播;或由于这种不养他人的状态,以少欲知足而为人所知。又或者说,“不被知”是因彻底断除渴爱,没有为了利养、恭敬、名声而让人知道自己,所以不为人知。未离欲的恶欲者,则会以欺诈、希求敬重的方式显露自己。
「已调御」:由于以六支舍调伏诸根,达到最上的调御,所以是已调御。
「住立于坚实中」:安住于解脱的坚实。显示巴利原文
Tattha anaññaposinti aññaṃ posetīti aññaposī, na aññaposī anaññaposī, attanā posetabbassa aññassa abhāvena adutiyo, ekakoti attho. Tena therassa subharataṃ dasseti. Thero hi kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena ca piṇḍapātena attānameva posento paramappiccho hutvā viharati, aññaṃ ñātimittādīsu kañci na poseti katthaci alaggabhāvato. Atha vā aññena aññatarena posetabbatāya abhāvato anaññaposī. Yo hi ekasmiṃyeva paccayadāyake paṭibaddhacatupaccayo so anaññaposī nāma na hoti ekāyattavuttito . Thero pana ‘‘yathāpi bhamaro puppha’’nti (dha. pa. 49) gāthāya vuttanayena jaṅghābalaṃ nissāya piṇḍāya caranto kulesu niccanavo hutvā missakabhattena yāpeti. Tathā hi naṃ bhagavā candūpamappaṭipadāya thomesi. Aññātanti abhiññātaṃ, yathābhuccaguṇehi patthaṭayasaṃ, teneva vā anaññaposibhāvena appicchatāsantuṭṭhitāhi ñātaṃ. Atha vā aññātanti sabbaso pahīnataṇhatāya lābhasakkārasilokanikāmanahetu attānaṃ jānāpanavasena na ñātaṃ. Avītataṇho hi pāpiccho kuhakatāya sambhāvanādhippāyena attānaṃ jānāpeti. Dantanti chaḷaṅgupekkhāvasena indriyesu uttamadamanena dantaṃ. Sāre patiṭṭhitanti vimuttisāre avaṭṭhitaṃ, asekkhasīlakkhandhādike vā sīlādisāre patiṭṭhitaṃ. Khīṇāsavaṃ vantadosanti kāmāsavādīnaṃ catunnaṃ āsavānaṃ anavasesaṃ pahīnattā khīṇāsavaṃ. Tato eva rāgādidosānaṃ sabbaso vantattā vantadosaṃ. Tamahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇanti taṃ yathāvuttaguṇaṃ paramatthabrāhmaṇaṃ ahaṃ brāhmaṇanti vadāmīti. Idhāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva desanānānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
阿迦罗婆迦经注释。显示巴利原文
7. Ajakalāpakasuttavaṇṇanā
7 第七,在名为波婆的力士王城中。「在阿迦罗婆迦支提」:因为那个地方被名为阿迦罗婆迦的夜叉所占据,人们尊崇那里,于是它得了“阿迦罗婆迦”这个名字。据说,那个夜叉是把山羊捆成束,连同成束的山羊一起接受祭品,而不用别的方式,因此被称为“阿迦罗婆迦”。又有人说:他像引诱山羊一样引诱众生,所以叫“阿迦罗婆迦”。听说众生去献祭,当他发出羊叫声的时候献上祭品,他就欢喜,因此被称为“阿迦罗婆迦”。那个夜叉有大威神力,粗暴凶恶,且长住那里,所以人们崇敬那个地方,时常去献祭。因此经中说“在阿迦罗婆迦支提”。
「在阿迦罗婆迦夜叉的住所」:指那个夜叉的宫殿。显示巴利原文
7. Sattame pāvāyanti evaṃnāmake mallarājūnaṃ nagare. Ajakalāpake cetiyeti ajakalāpakena nāma yakkhena pariggahitattā ‘‘ajakalāpaka’’nti laddhanāme manussānaṃ cittīkataṭṭhāne . So kira yakkho aje kalāpe katvā bandhanena ajakoṭṭhāsena saddhiṃ baliṃ paṭicchati, na aññathā, tasmā ‘‘ajakalāpako’’ti paññāyittha. Keci panāhu – ajake viya satte lāpetīti ajakalāpakoti. Tassa kira sattā baliṃ upanetvā yadā ajasaddaṃ katvā baliṃ upaharanti, tadā so tussati, tasmā ‘‘ajakalāpako’’ti vuccatīti. So pana yakkho ānubhāvasampanno kakkhaḷo pharuso tattha ca sannihito, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ manussā cittiṃ karonti, kālena kālaṃ baliṃ upaharanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ajakalāpake cetiye’’ti. Ajakalāpakassa yakkhassa bhavaneti tassa yakkhassa vimāne.
那时,据说世尊想要调伏那个夜叉。傍晚时分,他独处无伴,持衣钵来到阿迦罗婆迦夜叉的住所门前,向守门人请求入内。守门人说:“尊者,阿迦罗婆迦夜叉性情极为粗暴,于沙门、婆罗门皆无恭敬,因此您自便吧,我若去向他通报,恐不合适。”说完,他便以风一般迅速赶往正在参加夜叉集会的阿迦罗婆迦处。世尊进入住所,在阿迦罗婆迦的凉亭中已铺设好的座位上坐下。夜叉的妃嫔们前来亲近世尊,顶礼后立于一旁。世尊为她们适时开示法义。因此经文说:“在波婆,安住于阿迦罗婆迦支提的阿迦罗婆迦夜叉的住所。”显示巴利原文
Tadā kira satthā taṃ yakkhaṃ dametukāmo sāyanhasamaye eko adutiyo pattacīvaraṃ ādāya ajakalāpakassa yakkhassa bhavanadvāraṃ gantvā tassa dovārikaṃ bhavanapavisanatthāya yāci. So ‘‘kakkhaḷo, bhante, ajakalāpako yakkho, samaṇoti vā brāhmaṇoti vā gāravaṃ na karoti, tasmā tumhe eva jānātha, mayhaṃ pana tassa anārocanaṃ na yutta’’nti tāvadeva yakkhasamāgamaṃ gatassa ajakalāpakassa santikaṃ vātavegena agamāsi. Satthā antobhavanaṃ pavisitvā ajakalāpakassa nisīdanamaṇḍape paññattāsane nisīdi. Yakkhassa orodhā satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhaṃsu. Satthā tāsaṃ kālayuttaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ kathesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pāvāyaṃ viharati ajakalāpake cetiye ajakalāpakassa yakkhassa bhavane’’ti.
那时,萨陀山夜叉与雪山夜叉正从阿迦罗婆迦住所的上方,前去参加夜叉集会。当他们发现自己无法顺利前行时,便思惟:“这是什么缘故?”见世尊正坐在阿迦罗婆迦的住所里。于是他们便前往那里,顶礼世尊,禀告说:“尊者,我们要去参加夜叉集会了。”随后右绕离去。在夜叉集会中,他们见到阿迦罗婆迦夜叉后,欢喜地对他说:“贤友阿迦罗婆迦,你真是有大福德!在你的住所中,正坐着这位含天世间在内的最上人——世尊。快去亲近侍奉世尊,听闻正法吧!”他听了他们的话,心想:“这些家伙在说那个秃头沙门坐在我住所里。”顿时被忿怒压倒,想道:“今天我要与这个沙门交战。”便从夜叉集会中站起,抬起右脚,踩向那座约有六十由旬大的山巅,山巅顿时碎裂,崩为两半。此处其余应讲说的内容,当依《阿罗婆迦经注释》中所说而了知。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ samaye sātāgirahemavatā ajakalāpakassa bhavanamatthakena yakkhasamāgamaṃ gacchantā attano gamane asampajjamāne ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kāraṇa’’nti āvajjentā satthāraṃ ajakalāpakassa bhavane nisinnaṃ disvā tattha gantvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ‘‘mayaṃ, bhante, yakkhasamāgamaṃ gamissāmā’’ti āpucchitvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā gatā yakkhasannipāte ajakalāpakaṃ disvā tuṭṭhiṃ pavedayiṃsu ‘‘lābhā te, āvuso, ajakalāpaka, yassa te bhavane sadevake loke aggapuggalo bhagavā nisinno, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṃ payirupāsassu, dhammañca suṇāhī’’ti. So tesaṃ kathaṃ sutvā ‘‘ime tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa mama bhavane nisinnabhāvaṃ kathentī’’ti kodhābhibhūto hutvā ‘‘ajja mayhaṃ tena samaṇena saddhiṃ saṅgāmo bhavissatī’’ti cintetvā yakkhasannipātato uṭṭhahitvā dakkhiṇaṃ pādaṃ ukkhipitvā saṭṭhiyojanamattaṃ pabbatakūṭaṃ akkami, taṃ bhijjitvā dvidhā ahosi. Sesaṃ ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ āḷavakasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.246) āgatanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
阿迦罗婆迦夜叉的集会,与阿罗婆迦夜叉的集会相似,唯除了问难、解答,以及从住处三次出离与进入这些情节。因为阿迦罗婆迦夜叉一来便想:“我正要用这些手段把这个沙门赶走!”于是兴起了旋风等九种暴雨,却完全无法通过这些令世尊有丝毫动摇。他又幻化出拿着各种兵器、极为怖畏恐怖的鬼众,与那些鬼众一起走近世尊,整夜来回走动,施以种种骚扰,却连让世尊从坐处移动一根毫毛都做不到。仅仅是“这个沙门不经我允许就进入我的住处坐下”这一忿怒,就令他炽燃不已。那时,世尊了知他内心的活动,心想:“譬如弄破一条恶犬鼻中的胆汁,只会令它更加暴恶;同样地,这个夜叉对我坐在这里心生嗔恼。我何不现在外出呢?”便自行从住处出来,坐在露天处。因此经文说:「那时,世尊于黑夜的暗冥中,坐在露天处。」显示巴利原文
Ajakalāpakassa samāgamo hi āḷavakasamāgamasadisova ṭhapetvā pañhakaraṇaṃ vissajjanaṃ bhavanato tikkhattuṃ nikkhamanaṃ pavesanañca. Ajakalāpako hi āgacchantoyeva ‘‘etehiyeva taṃ samaṇaṃ palāpessāmī’’ti vātamaṇḍalādike navavasse samuṭṭhāpetvā tehi bhagavato calanamattampi kātuṃ asakkonto nānāvidhappaharaṇahatthe ativiya bhayānakarūpe bhūtagaṇe nimminitvā tehi saddhiṃ bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā antanteneva caranto sabbarattiṃ nānappakāraṃ vippakāraṃ katvāpi bhagavato kiñci kesaggamattampi nisinnaṭṭhānato calanaṃ kātuṃ nāsakkhi. Kevalaṃ pana ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo maṃ anāpucchā mayhaṃ bhavanaṃ pavisitvā nisīdatī’’ti kodhavasena pajjali. Athassa bhagavā cittappavattiṃ ñatvā ‘‘seyyathāpi nāma caṇḍassa kukkurassa nāsāya pittaṃ bhindeyya, evaṃ so bhiyyosomattāya caṇḍataro assa, evamevāyaṃ yakkho mayi idha nisinne cittaṃ padūseti, yaṃnūnāhaṃ bahi nikkhameyya’’nti sayameva bhavanato nikkhamitvā abbhokāse nisīdi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavā rattandhakāratimisāyaṃ abbhokāse nisinno hotī’’ti.
其中的「黑夜之暗冥」,是指夜间的黑暗与昏昧,也就是眼识无法生起的那种浓重黑暗。据说,那时正有具足四支的黑暗笼罩。「云神」则洒落着点点细雨。这时,夜叉心想:「我要用这声音来威吓这位沙门,把他赶走。」于是来到世尊近前,发出了「akkulo」等恐吓之声。因此经文说:「尔时,阿迦罗婆迦夜叉……」等。其中,「怖畏」是指心被惊摄;「惊悚」是指大腿僵直、身体战栗的状态;「毛发竖立」是指全身汗毛倒竖的状态。这三个词都为显示怖畏的生起。「走近」:为何这夜叉怀着如此意图走近,难道他之前没有制造过自己能制造的扰害吗?确实制造过。但他这样想:「在精舍中,当那位沙门处于安稳、坚固的地方时,我丝毫奈何不了他;现在他到了外面,我这样威吓之后就能把他赶走。」因为此夜叉将自己的住处误认作「坚固之地」,以为「那位沙门只是因为待在那里才不害怕的」。显示巴利原文
Tattha rattandhakāratimisāyanti rattiyaṃ andhakaraṇatamasi, cakkhuviññāṇuppattivirahite bahalandhakāreti attho. Caturaṅgasamannāgato kira tadā andhakāro pavattīti. Devoti megho ekamekaṃ phusitakaṃ udakabinduṃ pāteti. Atha yakkho ‘‘iminā saddena tāsetvā imaṃ samaṇaṃ palāpessāmī’’ti bhagavato samīpaṃ gantvā ‘‘akkulo’’tiādinā taṃ bhiṃsanaṃ akāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho ajakalāpako’’tiādi. Tattha bhayanti cittutrāsaṃ, chambhitattanti ūrutthambhakasarīrassa chambhitabhāvaṃ. Lomahaṃsanti lomānaṃ pahaṭṭhabhāvaṃ, tīhipi padehi bhayuppattimeva dasseti. Upasaṅkamīti kasmā panāyaṃ evamadhippāyo upasaṅkami, nanu pubbe attanā kātabbaṃ vippakāraṃ akāsīti? Saccamakāsi, taṃ panesa ‘‘antobhavane khemaṭṭhāne thirabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitassa na kiñci kātuṃ asakkhi, idāni bahi ṭhitaṃ evaṃ bhiṃsāpetvā palāpetuṃ sakkā’’ti maññamāno upasaṅkami. Ayañhi yakkho attano bhavanaṃ ‘‘thirabhūmī’’ti maññati, ‘‘tattha ṭhitattā ayaṃ samaṇo na bhāyatī’’ti ca.
三遍「akkulo pakkulo」而作「akkulapakkulika」——他出于恐吓的意图,三次发出「akkulo pakkulo」这样的声音。这其实是一个模拟音。当时,那夜叉像是要把须弥山掀起、把大地翻转过来一般,奋力发出巨大的吼声,如同百道霹雳同时炸响,又像域象的叫声、狮子的狮吼、夜叉的哀嚎、鬼魅的狂笑、阿修罗的拍手声,以及天王帝释的金刚霹雳之声。这声音因其深沉、遍满与恐怖,仿佛在嘲弄并压过一切其他声响,如同坏劫时大风轮所发的巨响,仿佛要将凡夫的心脏震裂一般,是一种极为怖畏的咆哮,音节含混不清。他心想:「用这声音吓跑这位沙门。」就这样三次发出自己的夜叉吼声。每次这样的声音发出,群山皆有崖石崩落;从大林之王开始,一切树木、蔓藤、灌丛的叶、花、果都纷纷凋谢;纵广三万由旬的喜马拉雅山王也震动、剧烈震动、处处震动;从地居天往上,大部分天神也生起了怖畏、惊悚和毛发竖立,更不用说人类了。其余的无足、二足、四足众生,也如同大地震裂时那样,现起极大的惊恐。显示巴利原文
Tikkhattuṃ ‘‘akkulo pakkulo’’ti akkulapakkulikaṃ akāsīti tayo vāre ‘‘akkulo pakkulo’’ti bhiṃsāpetukāmatāya evarūpaṃ saddaṃ akāsi. Anukaraṇasaddo hi ayaṃ. Tadā hi so yakkho sineruṃ ukkhipanto viya mahāpathaviṃ parivattento viya ca mahatā ussāhena asanisatasaddasaṅghāṭaṃ viya ekasmiṃ ṭhāne puñjīkataṃ hutvā viniccharantaṃ disāgajānaṃ hatthigajjitaṃ, kesarasīhānaṃ sīhaninnādaṃ , yakkhānaṃ hiṃkārasaddaṃ, bhūtānaṃ aṭṭahāsaṃ, asurānaṃ apphoṭanaghosaṃ , indassa devarañño vajiranigghātanigghosaṃ, attano gambhīratāya vipphārikatāya bhayānakatāya ca avasesasaddaṃ avahasantamiva abhibhavantamiva ca kappavuṭṭhānamahāvātamaṇḍalikāya vinigghosaṃ puthujjanānaṃ hadayaṃ phālentaṃ viya mahantaṃ paṭibhayanigghosaṃ abyattakkharaṃ tikkhattuṃ attano yakkhagajjitaṃ gajji ‘‘etena imaṃ samaṇaṃ bhiṃsāpetvā palāpessāmī’’ti. Yaṃ yaṃ niccharati, tena tena pabbatā papaṭikaṃ muñciṃsu, vanappatijeṭṭhake upādāya sabbesu rukkhalatāgumbesu pattaphalapupphāni sīdayiṃsu, tiyojanasahassavitthatopi himavantapabbatarājā saṅkampi sampakampi sampavedhi, bhummadevatā ādiṃ katvā yebhuyyena devatānampi ahudeva bhayaṃ chambhitattaṃ lomahaṃso, pageva manussānaṃ. Aññesañca apadadvipadacatuppadānaṃ mahāpathaviyā undriyanakālo viya mahatī vibhiṃsanakā ahosi, sakalasmiṃ jambudīpatale mahantaṃ kolāhalaṃ udapādi. Bhagavā pana taṃ saddaṃ ‘‘kimī’’ti amaññamāno niccalo nisīdi, ‘‘mā kassaci iminā antarāyo hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi.
然而,因为这声音是以「akkula pakkula」这样的形式传入众生耳中的,所以便以模拟它的方式说为「akkula pakkula」。又因那位夜叉在发出那声吼叫时,有「akkulapakkula」的作为,因此概括为「作了akkulapakkulika」。有些论师说:「这个声音,是将‘ākulabyākula’这两个词以异名的方式说成了‘akkulo bakkulo’,如同用‘ekaṃ ekaka’来表达‘一个一个’那样。」第一次生起,即由初生而直接产生的,名为「ākula」,意为「混乱」等义;为其加上ka音并缩短元音后,就成了「akkula」。而第二次生起,则名为「bakkula」。这里的「kula」一词,意为「种类」,如同「kolaṃkola」等词中的用法。依前面所说的意图来运用词句,第一个词指胎生的狮子、虎等;第二个词指卵生的毒蛇、黑蛇等。因此,夜叉用这两个词表达这样的意思:如同狮子等,或如同毒蛇等一般,「我就是来取你性命的。」这是另一种说法。还有另外一些论师保留了不同解释。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana so saddo ‘‘akkula pakkula’’ iti iminā ākārena sattānaṃ sotapathaṃ agamāsi, tasmā tassa anukaraṇavasena ‘‘akkulo pakkulo’’ti, yakkhassa ca tassaṃ nigghosanicchāraṇāyaṃ akkulapakkulakaraṇaṃ atthīti katvā ‘‘akkulapakkulikaṃ akāsī’’ti saṅgahaṃ āropayiṃsu. Keci pana ‘‘ākulabyākula iti padadvayassa pariyāyābhidhānavasena akkulo bakkuloti ayaṃ saddo vutto’’ti vadanti yathā ‘‘ekaṃ ekaka’’nti. Yasmā ekavāraṃ jāto paṭhamuppattivaseneva nibbattattā ākuloti ādiattho ākāro, tassa ca kakārāgamaṃ katvā rassattaṃ katanti. Dve vāre pana jāto bakkulo, kulasaddo cettha jātipariyāyo kolaṃkolotiādīsu viya. Vuttaadhippāyānuvidhāyī ca saddappayogoti paṭhamena padena jalābujasīhabyagghādayo, dutiyena aṇḍajaāsīvisakaṇhasappādayo vuccanti, tasmā sīhādiko viya āsīvisādiko viya ca ‘‘ahaṃ te jīvitahārako’’ti imaṃ atthaṃ yakkho padadvayena dassetīti aññe. Apare pana ‘‘akkhulo bhakkhulo’’ti pāḷiṃ vatvā ‘‘akkhetuṃ khepetuṃ vināsetuṃ ulati pavattetīti akkhulo, bhakkhituṃ khādituṃ ulatīti bhakkhulo. Ko paneso? Yakkharakkhasapisācasīhabyagghādīsu aññataro yo koci manussānaṃ anatthāvaho’’ti tassa atthaṃ vadanti. Idhāpi pubbe vuttanayeneva adhippāyayojanā veditabbā.
“沙门,那个鬼要吃掉你!”:夜叉变化出一个巨大恐怖的身相,站在世尊面前,指着自己说:“喂,沙门!那个吃你肉的鬼就在这里!”显示巴利原文
Esote, samaṇa, pisācoti ‘‘ambho, samaṇa, tava pisitāsano pisāco upaṭṭhito’’ti mahantaṃ bheravarūpaṃ abhinimminitvā bhagavato purato ṭhatvā attānaṃ sandhāya yakkho vadati.
“彻知此义理后”:指了知那夜叉正以身、语所行的骚扰;也由此彻知世尊于世间法中毫无染污——这正是他不可战胜的原因。于是,就在遭受骚扰的时刻,宣说了这个优陀那:完全不把骚扰放在心上,为阐明法之威力——不计较的缘由——而宣说此优陀那。显示巴利原文
Etamatthaṃviditvāti etaṃ tena yakkhena kāyavācāhi pavattiyamānaṃ vippakāraṃ. Tena ca attano anabhibhavanīyassa hetubhūtaṃ lokadhammesu nirupakkilesataṃ sabbākārato viditvā. Tāyaṃ velāyanti tassaṃ vippakārakaraṇavelāyaṃ. Imaṃ udānanti taṃ vippakāraṃ agaṇetvā assa agaṇanahetubhūtaṃ dhammānubhāvadīpakaṃ imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
其中,“当于自法”:指在名为“自己所成有身”的五取蕴诸法之时。“度彼岸者”:指通过遍知通达的圆满而到达彼岸;并由此,对于它们的原因——集,对于那以不转起为相的灭,以及导向灭的行道,通过断、证、修三类通达的圆满而到达彼岸。“成为婆罗门”:如此彻底排除了恶,所以称为婆罗门;也就是通过对有身的彻知而彻底洞悉四圣谛。经中也这么说:“我即在这带想、带心的一寻之身躯内,施设世间、世间集……”等等。或者另一种解释,“当于自法”:指自己的法。所谓自己的法,就是一个希求利益的人所拥有的戒等法。因为戒、定、慧、解脱等清净法能成就纯粹利乐,所以是人的“自己的法”;它们不像那些会带来祸害的染污法一样是“非己法”。“度彼岸者”:由于那些戒等法的圆满达成,所以到达了彼岸、达到了顶点。显示巴利原文
Tattha yadā sakesu dhammesūti yasmiṃ kāle sakaattabhāvasaṅkhātesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhadhammesu. Pāragūti pariññābhisamayapāripūrivasena pāraṅgato, tatoyeva tesaṃ hetubhūte samudaye, tadappavattilakkhaṇe nirodhe, nirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ca pahānasacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayapāripūrivasena pāragato. Hoti brāhmaṇoti evaṃ sabbaso bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇo nāma hoti, sabbaso sakaattabhāvāvabodhanepi catusaccābhisamayo hoti. Vuttañcetaṃ – ‘‘imasmiṃyeva byāmamatte kaḷevare sasaññimhi samanake lokañca lokasamudayañca paññapemī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 1.107; a. ni. 4.45). Atha vā sakesu dhammesūti attano dhammesu, attano dhammā nāma atthakāmassa puggalassa sīlādidhammā. Sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttiādayo hi vodānadhammā ekantahitasukhasampādanena purisassa attano dhammā nāma, na anatthāvahā saṃkilesadhammā viya asakadhammā. Pāragūti tesaṃ sīlādīnaṃ pāripūriyā pāraṃ pariyantaṃ gato.
在此,先说戒:戒有世间戒与出世间戒二种。其中,世间戒是前行的戒,略说由巴帝摩卡律仪等而有四种,广说则品类甚多。出世间戒依道与果分为二种,究其本质,即是正语、正业、正命。如同戒一样,定与慧也都有世间与出世间二类。世间定是连同近行定在内的八等至;出世间定则是道支所含摄的。世间慧是闻所成慧、思所成慧、修所成慧,这三种带有漏的智慧;出世间慧则是与道相应、与果相应的智慧。名为解脱的,是指果位解脱与涅槃,因此唯是出世间法。解脱智见是世间法,因为它有十九种,属于省察智的范畴。如此,在自身的相续中,由证得阿拉汉果而无余地成就了这些戒等诸法的圆满,由此到达彼岸、臻于究竟,所以说,对于自身之法,他成为了度彼岸者。显示巴利原文
Tattha sīlaṃ tāva lokiyalokuttaravasena duvidhaṃ. Tesu lokiyaṃ pubbabhāgasīlaṃ. Taṃ saṅkhepato pātimokkhasaṃvarādivasena catubbidhaṃ, vitthārato pana anekappabhedaṃ. Lokuttaraṃ maggaphalavasena duvidhaṃ, atthato sammāvācāsammākammantasammāājīvā. Yathā ca sīlaṃ, tathā samādhipaññā ca lokiyalokuttaravasena duvidhā. Tattha lokiyasamādhi saha upacārena aṭṭha samāpattiyo, lokuttarasamādhi maggapariyāpanno . Paññāpi lokiyā sutamayā, cintāmayā, bhāvanāmayā ca sāsavā, lokuttarā pana maggasampayuttā phalasampayuttā ca. Vimutti nāma phalavimutti nibbānañca, tasmā sā lokuttarāva. Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ lokiyameva, taṃ ekūnavīsatividhaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇabhāvato. Evaṃ etesaṃ sīlādidhammānaṃ attano santāne arahattaphalādhigamena anavasesato nibbattapāripūriyā pāraṃ pariyantaṃ gatoti sakesu dhammesu pāragū.
或者也可以这样理解:由证得入流果,于戒上成为度彼岸者,因为他被称为“戒圆满行持者”,而且此处以入流者统摄,连一来者也包括在内。由证得不来果,于定上成为度彼岸者,因为他被称为“定圆满行持者”。由证得阿拉汉果,则于其余三法上成为度彼岸者。因为阿拉汉的慧已达最极广大的境地,证得不动的心解脱,其省察智亦臻究竟,故于慧、心解脱与解脱智见上,被称为度彼岸者。如此,于一切方面,对四圣谛依四种道,通过遍知等十六种行相的功用成就,如前所述,在那些相应的时刻,于自法上成为度彼岸者。显示巴利原文
Atha vā sotāpattiphalādhigamena sīlasmiṃ pāragū. So hi ‘‘sīlesu paripūrakārī’’ti vutto, sotāpannaggahaṇeneva cettha sakadāgāmīpi gahito hoti. Anāgāmiphalādhigamena samādhismiṃ pāragū. So hi ‘‘samādhismiṃ paripūrakārī’’ti vutto. Arahattaphalādhigamena itaresu tīsu pāragū. Arahā hi paññāvepullappattiyā aggabhūtāya akuppāya cetovimuttiyā adhigatattā paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa ca pariyosānagamanato paññāvimuttivimuttiñāṇadassanesu pāragū nāma hoti. Evaṃ sabbathāpi catūsu ariyasaccesu catumaggavasena pariññādisoḷasavidhāya kiccanipphattiyā yathāvuttesu tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāle sakesu dhammesu pāragato.
“成为婆罗门”是指那时他因已排遣恶不善法,成为究竟义上的婆罗门。接着,“他超越了那毗舍遮与惊恐纷扰”的意思是:依如前所述,到达彼岸之后,阿阇迦罗巴迦,他超越、越过、征服了你所示现的那个为食肉而来的毗舍遮,以及为制造恐惧而掀起的纷扰与惊恐,不再为其所惧。这就是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Hoti brāhmaṇoti tadā so bāhitapāpadhammatāya paramatthabrāhmaṇo hoti. Atha etaṃ pisācañca, pakkulañcātivattatīti tato yathāvuttapāragamanato atha pacchā, ajakalāpaka, etaṃ tayā dassitaṃ pisitāsanatthamāgataṃ pisācaṃ bhayajananatthaṃ samuṭṭhāpitaṃ akkulapakkulikañca ativattati, atikkamati, abhibhavati, taṃ na bhāyatīti attho.
这首偈颂同样是以阿拉汉果为归结点而说。接着,阿阇迦罗巴迦看见自己以如此可怖之相与威吓,竟不能动摇世尊分毫,了达世尊那安忍不动的状态,心想:“啊,真是不可思议之人!”便生起欢喜心,以凡夫的信仰表明了心中已确立的归向,在世尊面前宣告自己为近事男。显示巴利原文
Ayampi gāthā arahattameva ullapitvā kathitā. Atha ajakalāpako attanā katena tathārūpenapi paṭibhayarūpena vibhiṃsanena akampanīyassa bhagavato taṃ tādibhāvaṃ disvā ‘‘aho acchariyamanussovatāya’’nti pasannamānaso pothujjanikāya saddhāya attani niviṭṭhabhāvaṃ vibhāvento satthu sammukhā upāsakattaṃ pavedesi.
第八《会遇经》注疏显示巴利原文
8. Saṅgāmajisuttavaṇṇanā
8 第八经中,“会遇”是他的名字。这位具寿是舍卫城一位大富豪长者的儿子。成年之时,父母为他迎娶了相称的妻子,将家产交付于他,他便为家室所缚。一日,他看见舍卫城的近事男们在上午行布施、受持戒法,到了傍晚,身着洁净的下衣与上衣,手持香花等物,正要前往祇园精舍听法,便问道:“你们要去哪里?”听说“要去祇园精舍世尊处听法”之后,他说:“那我也去。”便随同他们一起前往祇园。那时,世尊犹如在金窟中作狮子吼的狮子王一般,坐在正法堂中铺设的殊胜佛座上,于大众四部众中宣说法要。显示巴利原文
8. Aṭṭhame saṅgāmajīti evaṃnāmo. Ayañhi āyasmā sāvatthiyaṃ aññatarassa mahāvibhavassa seṭṭhino putto, vayappattakāle mātāpitūhi patirūpena dārena niyojetvā sāpateyyaṃ niyyātetvā gharabandhanena baddho hoti. So ekadivasaṃ sāvatthivāsino upāsake pubbaṇhasamayaṃ dānaṃ datvā sīlaṃ samādiyitvā sāyanhasamaye suddhavatthe suddhuttarāsaṅge gandhamālādihatthe dhammassavanatthaṃ jetavanābhimukhe gacchante disvā ‘‘kattha tumhe gacchathā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘dhammassavanatthaṃ jetavane satthu santika’’nti vutte ‘‘tena hi ahampi gamissāmī’’ti tehi saddhiṃ jetavanaṃ agamāsi. Tena ca samayena bhagavā kañcanaguhāyaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadanto kesarasīho viya saddhammamaṇḍape paññattavarabuddhāsane nisīditvā catuparisamajjhe dhammaṃ deseti.
那时,那些近事男顶礼世尊后,退坐一面。善男子会遇也坐在大众的外围听法。世尊次第说法,开示了四圣谛。圣谛宣说完毕时,有无数千位有情现证了法。善男子会遇也证得了入流果。集会散去后,他来到世尊跟前,顶礼之后乞求出家:“愿世尊度我出家。”世尊问道:“那么,你得到父母的允许出家了吗?”他回答说:“没有,尊者,尚未得到允许。”世尊说:“会遇,如来不度未经父母允许的儿子出家。”他说:“尊者,我将照办,让父母允许我出家。”于是他顶礼世尊,右绕之后,来到父母面前说道:“父亲、母亲,请允许我出家。”此后的经过,应按《赖吒和罗经》中的方式来了知。显示巴利原文
Atha kho te upāsakā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu, saṅgāmajipi kulaputto tassā parisāya pariyante dhammaṃ suṇanto nisīdi. Bhagavā anupubbikathaṃ kathetvā cattāri saccāni pakāsesi, saccapariyosāne anekesaṃ pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Saṅgāmajipi kulaputto sotāpattiphalaṃ patvā parisāya vuṭṭhitāya bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā pabbajjaṃ yāci ‘‘pabbājetha maṃ bhagavā’’ti. ‘‘Anuññātosi pana tvaṃ mātāpitūhi pabbajjāyā’’ti? ‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhante, anuññāto’’ti. ‘‘Na kho, saṅgāmaji, tathāgatā mātāpitūhi ananuññātaṃ puttaṃ pabbājentī’’ti. ‘‘Sohaṃ, bhante, tathā karissāmi, yathā maṃ mātāpitaro pabbajituṃ anujānantī’’ti. So bhagavantaṃ vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā mātāpitaro upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘ammatātā, anujānātha maṃ pabbajitu’’nti āha. Tato paraṃ raṭṭhapālasutte (ma. ni. 2.293 ādayo) āgatanayena veditabbaṃ.
于是,他承诺“出家后再与你们相见”,得到父母允许后,便前往世尊处请求出家。他在世尊座下获得了出家与具足戒。受具足戒后不久,为了证得上道果,他精勤努力,在某处林中住处入雨安居,证得了六神通。安居结束后,为了拜见世尊,同时也为了兑现对父母的许诺,他前往舍卫城。因此,经中说:“那时,具寿会遇来到了舍卫城。”显示巴利原文
Atha so ‘‘pabbajitvā attānaṃ dassessāmī’’ti paṭiññaṃ datvā anuññāto mātāpitūhi bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pabbajjaṃ yāci. Alattha kho ca bhagavato santike pabbajjaṃ upasampadañca, acirūpasampanno ca pana so uparimaggatthāya ghaṭento vāyamanto aññatarasmiṃ araññāvāse vassaṃ vasitvā chaḷabhiñño hutvā vutthavasso bhagavantaṃ dassanāya mātāpitūnañca paṭissavamocanatthaṃ sāvatthiṃ agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena āyasmā saṅgāmaji sāvatthiṃ anuppatto hotī’’ti.
这位具寿在城门村托钵乞食,午后从乞食归来,进入祇园精舍,来到世尊面前,与世尊相互问候后,又禀告了一些别的事情,接着顶礼世尊,右绕而出,坐在一棵树下作白日的安歇。那时,他的父母与亲友听说他回来,欢喜踊跃,急忙赶到精舍,见他坐在那里,便上前问候,然后请求说:“免得无嗣的家产被国王没收,或被不可意的继承人夺走;出家于你也不适宜。来吧,孩子,你还俗吧。”长老心想:“这些人不知道我对欲乐已无兴致,如同挑粪者执着粪团一般,只想让我沉溺欲乐。通过说法是不可能让他们明白的。”于是就像没有听到一样,依旧坐着。他们用种种方式请求,见他听不进这些话,便回家去,并安排他的妻子带着随从,吩咐说:“我们用种种方式请求他,都打动不了他的心。你去吧,贤善女,用让孩子出现在他眼前的方式去请求你的丈夫,让他回心转意。”原来,这位具寿出家时,她正怀有身孕。她答应道:“好的。”便抱着孩子,带着众多随从前往祇园精舍。因此经中说:“具寿会遇听到……”等等。显示巴利原文
So hāyasmā dhuragāme piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto jetavanaṃ pavisitvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṃ katapaṭisanthāro aññaṃ byākaritvā puna bhagavantaṃ vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā nikkhamitvā aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṃ nisīdi. Athassa mātāpitaro ñātimittā cassa āgamanaṃ sutvā, ‘‘saṅgāmaji, kira idhāgato’’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭhā turitaturitā vihāraṃ gantvā pariyesantā naṃ tattha nisinnaṃ disvā upasaṅkamitvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā ‘‘mā aputtakaṃ sāpateyyaṃ rājāno hareyyuṃ, appiyā dāyādā vā gaṇheyyuṃ, nālaṃ pabbajjāya, ehi, tāta, vibbhamā’’ti yāciṃsu. Taṃ sutvā thero ‘‘ime mayhaṃ kāmehi anatthikabhāvaṃ na jānanti, gūthadhārī viya gūthapiṇḍe kāmesuyeva allīyanaṃ icchanti, nayime sakkā dhammakathāya saññāpetu’’nti assuṇanto viya nisīdi. Te nānappakāraṃ yācitvā attano vacanaṃ aggaṇhantaṃ disvā gharaṃ pavisitvā puttena saddhiṃ tassa bhariyaṃ saparivāraṃ uyyojesuṃ ‘‘mayaṃ nānappakāraṃ taṃ yācantāpi tassa manaṃ alabhitvā āgatā, gaccha tvaṃ, bhadde, tava bhattāraṃ puttasandassanena yācitvā saññāpehī’’ti. Tāya kira āpannasattāya ayamāyasmā pabbajito. Sā ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā dārakamādāya mahatā parivārena jetavanaṃ agamāsi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘assosi kho āyasmato saṅgāmajissā’’tiādi.
其中,“前妻”是指过去在家时,因照顾服侍而成为伴侣的人,即妻子。“阿耶”一词,本当称为“阿耶子”,但此处是以出家人通用的称呼来呼召。“据说”是不定传闻词,应理解为与“据说他已来到”相关联。“带着幼子的沙门,请养活我们吧”:意思是,你抛下怀有身孕的我出家了,如今我带着幼子,你抛下这样的我只去行沙门法,这是不合适的。所以,沙门,请用衣食等来扶养我和以儿子为伴的我。然而,具寿僧伽玛吉收摄诸根,既不看,也不搭话。因此经中说:“如是说时,具寿僧伽玛吉默然。”显示巴利原文
Tattha purāṇadutiyikāti pubbe gihikāle pādaparicaraṇavasena dutiyikā, bhariyāti attho. Ayyoti ‘‘ayyaputto’’ti vattabbe pabbajitānaṃ anucchavikavohārena vadati. Kirāti anussavanatthe nipāto, tassa anuppatto kirāti sambandho veditabbo. Khuddaputtañhi samaṇa, posa manti āpannasattameva maṃ chaḍḍetvā pabbajito, sāhaṃ etarahi khuddaputtā, tādisaṃ maṃ chaḍḍetvāva tava samaṇadhammakaraṇaṃ ayuttaṃ, tasmā, samaṇa, puttadutiyaṃ maṃ ghāsacchādanādīhi bharassūti. Āyasmā pana, saṅgāmaji, indriyāni ukkhipitvā taṃ neva oloketi, nāpi ālapati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘evaṃ vutte āyasmā saṅgāmaji tuṇhī ahosī’’ti.
她这样说了三遍,见长老依然默不作声,心中思忖:“男人即使对妻子无所顾念,对儿子也应有顾念,父亲对儿子的慈爱深入骨髓,根深蒂固,因此,或许能以爱子之情让他随顺我的意愿。”于是她把孩子放在长老膝上,退到一旁,说:“沙门,这是你的儿子,你养他吧。”然后稍稍走开。据说,由于沙门的威光,她无法在他面前久立。长老依旧不看不理那孩子。那妇人站在不远处,回过头来看到长老这般态度,便明白了,转身抱起孩子,心想:“这沙门连儿子都不在意。”随即离去。因此经中说:“当时,具寿僧伽玛吉的前妻……”云云。显示巴利原文
Sā tikkhattuṃ tatheva vatvā tuṇhībhūtameva taṃ disvā ‘‘purisā nāma bhariyāsu nirapekkhāpi puttesu sāpekkhā honti, puttasineho pitu aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhati, tasmā puttapemenāpi mayhaṃ vase vatteyyā’’ti maññamānā puttaṃ therassa aṅke nikkhipitvā ekamantaṃ apakkamma ‘‘eso te, samaṇa, putto, posa na’’nti vatvā thokaṃ agamāsi. Sā kira samaṇatejenassa sammukhe ṭhātuṃ nāsakkhi. Thero dārakampi neva oloketi nāpi ālapati. Atha sā itthī avidūre ṭhatvā mukhaṃ parivattetvā olokentī therassa ākāraṃ ñatvā paṭinivattitvā ‘‘puttenapi ayaṃ samaṇo anatthiko’’ti dārakaṃ gahetvā pakkāmi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho āyasmato saṅgāmajissa purāṇadutiyikā’’tiādi.
其中,“连儿子也不在意”的意思是:这位沙门连自己的亲生儿子都不希求,更何况他人?这便是其意趣所在。所谓“天眼”,因其与天人之眼相似,故称天眼。天神的眼是由善行所生,不被胆汁、痰、血等所障碍,纵在远方也能领受所缘,是清净的根门之眼。而此由第四禅定所生、具足神通之眼也是如此,故称天眼(似天眼);或因依天住而获得,故称天眼;或因具大光明、大神通,故称天眼。以这样的天眼。“清净的”:指因远离诸盖等染污而极为清净。“超越人间的”:指超越人的境界。如此种种异行:即如上所述,将儿子放在膝上等,在出家者中不适宜的反常行为。显示巴利原文
Tattha puttenapīti ayaṃ samaṇo attano orasaputtenapi anatthiko, pageva aññehīti adhippāyo. Dibbenāti ettha dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ. Devatānañhi sucaritakammanibbattaṃ pittasemharuhirādīhi apalibuddhaṃ dūrepi ārammaṇasampaṭicchanasamatthaṃ dibbaṃ pasādacakkhu hoti. Idampi catutthajjhānasamādhinibbattaṃ abhiññācakkhuṃ tādisanti dibbaṃ viyāti dibbaṃ, dibbavihārasannissayena laddhattā vā dibbaṃ, mahājutikattā mahāgatikattā vā dibbaṃ, tena dibbena. Visuddhenāti nīvaraṇādisaṃkilesavigamena suparisuddhena. Atikkantamānusakenāti manussānaṃ visayātītena. Imaṃ evarūpaṃ vippakāranti imaṃ evaṃ vippakāraṃ yathāvuttaṃ pabbajitesu asāruppaṃ aṅke puttaṭṭhapanasaṅkhātaṃ virūpakiriyaṃ.
“了知此义”:即对着具寿僧伽玛吉于妻子、儿女等一切方面皆无所顾念之实相,以一切方式了知之后。“说此优陀那”:即说出这首表明他在可意与不可意境中皆保持如如不动之相的优陀那。显示巴利原文
Etamatthanti etaṃ āyasmato saṅgāmajissa puttadārādīsu sabbattha nirapekkhabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ sabbākārato viditvā. Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ tassa iṭṭhāniṭṭhādīsu tādibhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
其中的“来的”,意为正前来——指前妻。“不欣喜”:见我来而不欢喜、不喜悦。“离去的”:指她未与我交谈便离去,即正在离去。“不忧愁”:指内心不生热恼。那么,是何种原因使长老既不欣喜也不忧愁呢?为说明此因,而说“战胜会遇的会遇者已解脱”。其中,“会遇”有五种:欲染会遇、瞋恚会遇、愚痴会遇、慢会遇、见会遇。会遇比丘通过断除与止息,从这些会遇中解脱出来。“我称彼为婆罗门”:那位已达到如此不动摇之相、成为漏尽者,因他已完全舍断一切恶法,故我称他为婆罗门。显示巴利原文
Tattha āyantinti āgacchantiṃ, purāṇadutiyikanti adhippāyo. Nābhinandatīti daṭṭhuṃ maṃ āgatāti na nandati na tussati. Pakkamantinti sā ayaṃ mayā asammoditāva gacchatīti gacchantiṃ. Na socatīti na cittasantāpamāpajjati. Yena pana kāraṇena thero evaṃ nābhinandati na socati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅgā saṅgāmajiṃ mutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅgāti rāgasaṅgo dosamohamānadiṭṭhisaṅgoti pañcavidhāpi saṅgā samucchedappaṭipassaddhivimuttīhi vimuttaṃ saṅgāmajiṃ bhikkhuṃ. Tamahaṃbrūmi brāhmaṇanti taṃ tādibhāvappattaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ ahaṃ sabbaso bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇanti vadāmīti.
9. 结发者经释显示巴利原文
9. Jaṭilasuttavaṇṇanā
9 第九,“伽耶”在此既指村落,也指渡口。世尊住在伽耶村附近,故称“于伽耶住”;同理也指伽耶渡口。所谓伽耶渡口,即伽耶村附近有一池塘和一条河流,世间大众将这两者都称为“除罪渡口”。“伽耶悉萨”指:那里有一座山,山峰形如象头,名为伽耶悉萨山;山上有一块岩石,形似象肩,可容纳千位比丘,世尊即住于此。故称:“于伽耶住,在伽耶悉萨。”显示巴利原文
9. Navame gayāyanti ettha gayāti gāmopi titthampi vuccati. Gayāgāmassa hi avidūre viharanto bhagavā ‘‘gayāyaṃ viharatī’’ti vuccati, tathā gayātitthassa. Gayātitthanti hi gayāgāmassa avidūre ekā pokkharaṇī atthi nadīpi, tadubhayaṃ ‘‘pāpapavāhanatittha’’nti lokiyamahājano samudācarati. Gayāsīseti gajasīsasadisasikharo tattha eko pabbato gayāsīsanāmako, yattha hatthikumbhasadiso piṭṭhipāsāṇo bhikkhusahassassa okāso pahoti, tatra bhagavā viharati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘gayāyaṃ viharati gayāsīse’’ti.
“结发者”指苦行者。他们因蓄结发,在此称为“结发者”。“于隆冬降雪之时”指:冬季之中,摩伽月(一月)的最后四天及帕古纳月(二月)的最初四天,这八天为降雪之期。“在伽耶水中浮现”指:有些人先在那处公认的渡口水中全身沉没,然后浮出水面、跃出、漂起。“沉没”指连头一并没入水中。“做浮现与沉没”指:反复做浮出与沉没的动作。显示巴利原文
Jaṭilāti tāpasā. Te hi jaṭādhāritāya idha ‘‘jaṭilā’’ti vuttā. Antaraṭṭhake himapātasamayeti hemantassa utuno abbhantarabhūte māghamāsassa avasāne cattāro phagguṇamāsassa ādimhi cattāroti aṭṭhadivasaparimāṇe himassa patanakāle. Gayāyaṃ ummujjantīti keci tasmiṃ titthasammate udake paṭhamaṃ nimuggasakalasarīrā tato ummujjanti vuṭṭhahanti uppilavanti. Nimujjantīti sasīsaṃ udake osīdanti. Ummujjanimujjampi karontīti punappunaṃ ummujjananimujjanānipi karonti.
在那里,有的人持这样的见解,以为“单靠一次浮出水面就能清净罪业”,他们便只做浮出水面后就离开了。然而,浮出水面不可能离开沉入水中而独存,由于二者不相离,他们其实也作了沉入水中。也有的人持这样的见解,以为“单靠一次沉入水中就能清净罪业”,他们便只沉入一次,依前述的道理,因二者不相离,同样也作了浮出水面才离去。另有人持这样的见解,以为“只有在那渡口沉入水中才能清净罪业”,他们便在那里沉入水中后屏住呼吸,如同坠落悬崖之人般,直接在那里结束生命。还有的人持这样的见解,以为“反复地做浮上沉下的沐浴,才能清净罪业”,他们便反复地浮出水面与沉入水中。正是针对这一切人,才说“有浮出水面的人,有沉入水中的人,也有兼做浮出水面与沉入水中的人”。在此,虽然浮出水面要以沉入水中为前导,但只做沉入水中的人终究是少数,做浮出水面及两者兼做的人占多数;为了显示大多数人的情况,才把浮出水面放在前面来说。同样,说“众多结发者”,也是因为结发者占了多数,不过当时也有剃发留髻的人。显示巴利原文
Tattha hi keci ‘‘ekummujjaneneva pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, te ummujjanameva katvā gacchanti. Ummujjanaṃ pana nimujjanamantarena natthīti avinābhāvato nimujjanampi te karontiyeva. Yepi ‘‘ekanimujjaneneva pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, tepi ekavārameva nimujjitvā vuttanayena avinābhāvato ummujjanampi katvā pakkamanti. Ye pana ‘‘tasmiṃ titthe nimujjaneneva pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, te tattha nimujjitvā assāse sannirumbhitvā maruppapātapatitā viya tattheva jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇanti . Apare ‘‘punappunaṃ ummujjananimujjanāni katvā nhāte pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, te kālena kālaṃ ummujjananimujjanāni karonti. Te sabbepi sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘ummujjantipi nimujjantipi ummujjanimujjampi karontī’’ti. Ettha ca kiñcāpi nimujjanapubbakaṃ ummujjanaṃ, nimujjanameva pana karontā katipayā, ummujjanaṃ tadubhayañca karontā bahūti tesaṃ yebhuyyabhāvadassanatthaṃ ummujjanaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā sambahulā jaṭilāti jaṭilānaṃ yebhuyyatāya vuttaṃ, muṇḍasikhaṇḍinopi ca brāhmaṇā udakasuddhikā tasmiṃ kāle tattha tathā karonti.
所谓“泼洒”,是指有些人从伽耶河用手取水,洒在自己的头上和身上;另外有些人用瓶取水后,站在岸边这样做。“供奉火”是指:有些人在伽耶河岸边设置祭坛,摆上烟薪、供品等用具,然后向火供奉、侍奉火供。“依此而得清净”是指:依靠在伽耶河中浮出水面等行为以及侍奉火,从而从罪垢中清净、消除罪恶,乃至获得轮回的清净——他们就是持有这种见解的人。这便是它的意思。显示巴利原文
Osiñcantīti keci gayāya udakaṃ hatthena gahetvā attano sīse ca sarīre ca osiñcanti, apare ghaṭehi udakaṃ gahetvā tīre ṭhatvā tathā karonti. Aggiṃ juhantīti keci gayātīre vediṃ sajjetvā dhūmadabbhipūjādike upakaraṇe upanetvā aggihutaṃ juhanti aggihutaṃ paricaranti. Iminā suddhīti iminā gayāyaṃ ummujjanādinā aggiparicaraṇena ca pāpamalato suddhi pāpapavāhanā saṃsārasuddhi eva vā hotīti evaṃdiṭṭhikā hutvāti attho.
应当知道,这里所说的“浮出水面”等,只是举以示例罢了。在那些人中:有的修持水中住,有的献水作礼,有的站在那水中随转日月,有的数千遍地念诵萨维蒂等咒语,有的以“帝释来啊”等呼唤来召请明咒,有的大行敬礼。在这过程中,有的人下水,有的人上岸,有的人上岸后清净漱口,有的人站在水中弹弄弦丝、弹击琵琶等,做种种不同的举动。然而,即使他们示现了这些奇异的行为,也必然先在那水中作过沉入水中与浮出水面。因此,把这一切都含摄在沉入水中与浮出水面当中,而说“浮出水面者”等。就这样,正当那地方一片喧闹嘈杂时,世尊站在上方的山上,听到他们的喧哗,便观察此事,看见了他们那些举动,于是对此说道:“世尊看见……依此而得清净”。它的意思正是前面所解释的那样。显示巴利原文
Ummujjanādi cettha nidassanamattaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tesu hi keci udakavāsaṃ vasanti, keci udakassañjaliṃ denti, keci tasmiṃ udake ṭhatvā candimasūriye anuparivattanti, keci anekasahassavāraṃ sāvittiādike japanti, keci ‘‘inda āgacchā’’tiādinā vijjājapaṃ avhāyanti, keci mahatupaṭṭhānaṃ karonti, evañca karontā keci otaranti, keci uttaranti keci uttaritvā suddhikaācamanaṃ karonti, keci antoudake ṭhitā tantī vādenti, vīṇaṃ vādentīti evamādikā nānappakārakiriyā dassenti. Yasmā vā te evarūpā vikārakiriyā karontāpi tasmiṃ udake nimujjanaummujjanapubbakameva karonti, tasmā taṃ sabbaṃ nimujjanummujjanantogadhameva katvā ‘‘ummujjantī’’tipiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ tattha ākulabyākule vattamāne uparipabbate ṭhito bhagavā tesaṃ taṃ kolāhalaṃ sutvā ‘‘kinnu kho eta’’nti olokento taṃ kiriyavikāraṃ addasa, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘addasā kho bhagavā…pe… iminā suddhī’’ti, taṃ vuttatthameva.
“了知此义后”:即从一切方面了知此义——既了知他们将入水等执为清净道,也如实、无颠倒地了知真实等才是清净道。“此优陀那”:即阐明以水为净并非清净道、而真实等法如实方为清净道的那首优陀那,他宣说了此优陀那。显示巴利原文
Etamatthaṃviditvāti etaṃ atthaṃ udakorohanādiasuddhimagge tesaṃ suddhimaggaparāmasanaṃ saccādike ca suddhimagge attano aviparītāvabodhaṃ sabbākārato viditvā. Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ udakasuddhiyā asuddhimaggabhāvadīpakaṃ saccādidhammānañca yāthāvato suddhimaggabhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
其中,“不能以水成为清净”此句中的“以水”,指以沉入水中等方式。因为此处沉入水中等,省略了后面的词而只称为“水”,如同将“色有”略称为“色”。或者,“以水”:指作为沉入水中等动作所凭藉的水,对于有情来说,并没有一个名为清净的东西,意即不存在。又或者,“清净”:即通过那样所说的水,有情并不能从罪垢中得到清净,因此才说不能成为“清净者”。何以故?因为这里有许多人在沐浴。倘若依靠入水等方式便能清净罪业,那么在此水中沐浴的众人——那些造作杀母等恶业的人,以及牛、水牛等,乃至鱼鳖,这一切都应得到清净,然而事实并非如此。为什么?因为沐浴并非那些罪生起之因的对治。应知,任何能破坏某一事物者,才名为它的对治,犹如光明是黑暗的对治,明是无明的对治,而沐浴并非罪的对治。因此,这里应得出此结论:“不能以水成为清净”。显示巴利原文
Tattha na udakena sucī hotīti ettha udakenāti udakummujjanādinā. Udakummujjanādi hi idha uttarapadalopena ‘‘udaka’’nti vuttaṃ yathā rūpabhavo rūpanti. Atha vā udakenāti ummujjanādikiriyāya sādhanabhūtena udakena suci sattassa suddhi nāma na hoti, natthīti attho. Atha vā sucīti tena yathāvuttena udakena suci pāpamalato suddho nāma satto na hoti. Kasmā? Bahvettha nhāyatī jano. Yadi hi udakorohanādinā yathāvuttena pāpasuddhi nāma siyā, bahu ettha udake jano nhāyati, mātughātādipāpakammakārī añño ca gomahiṃsādiko antamaso macchakacchape upādāya, tassa sabbassāpi pāpasuddhi siyā, na panevaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Nhānassa pāpahetūnaṃ appaṭipakkhabhāvato. Yañhi yaṃ vināseti, so tassa paṭipakkho yathā āloko andhakārassa, vijjā ca avijjāya, na evaṃ nhānaṃ pāpassa. Tasmā niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ ‘‘na udakena suci hotī’’ti.
而为说明依何而得清净,乃说“若人具足真实…”等偈颂。其中,“若人”:指在什么人身上。“真实”:指言语的真实与离(妄语)的真实。或者说,“真实”:指智慧的真实与究竟义的真实。“法”:指圣道的法与果的法。所有这些法,若在哪一位人身上获得,他便是清净的;他是婆罗门。也就是说,这位圣者,特别是诸漏尽者,由于拥有究竟的清净,故为“清净者”与“婆罗门”。那么,为何在此将真实从法中特别提出来呢?因为真实有大利益。诚如诸多经典,如《经集》等中所说:“真实确实是甘露之语”、“真实于诸味中最胜”、“真实是义与法中的立足处,善者立于其中”、“沙门婆罗门立于真实”等,诸多赞叹真实功德。而违背真实的过患亦有宣说,如:“若有一法已过去,诳语之人…”、“说不实语者,堕入地狱”。显示巴利原文
Yena pana suci hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yamhi saccañcā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yamhīti yasmiṃ puggale . Saccanti vacīsaccañceva viratisaccañca. Atha vā saccanti ñāṇasaccañceva paramatthasaccañca. Dhammoti ariyamaggadhammo, phaladhammo ca, so sabbopi yasmiṃ puggale upalabbhati, so sucī so ca brāhmaṇoti so ariyapuggalo visesato khīṇāsavo accantasuddhiyā suci ca brāhmaṇo cāti. Kasmā panettha saccaṃ dhammato visuṃ katvā gahitaṃ? Saccassa bahūpakārattā. Tathā hi ‘‘saccaṃ ve amatā vācā (su. ni. 455), saccaṃ have sādutaraṃ rasānaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 184), sacce atthe ca dhamme ca, āhu santo patiṭṭhitā (su. ni. 455), sacce ṭhitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā cā’’tiādinā (jā. 2.21.433) anekesu suttapadesu saccaguṇā pakāsitā. Saccavipariyassa ca ‘‘ekaṃ dhammaṃ atītassa, musāvādissa jantuno (dha. pa. 176), abhūtavādī nirayaṃ upetī’’ti (dha. pa. 306) ca ādinā pakāsitāti.
第十:对《Bāhiya经》的注释显示巴利原文
10. Bāhiyasuttavaṇṇanā
10 第十经中,“巴希耶”是他的名字。“持木衣者”意指穿木制衣服。“苏帕拉卡”指他住在名为苏帕拉卡的港口。然而,这位巴希耶是谁?他如何成为持木衣者,又为何住在苏帕拉卡港?显示巴利原文
10. Dasame bāhiyoti tassa nāmaṃ. Dārucīriyoti dārumayacīro. Suppāraketi evaṃnāmake paṭṭane vasati. Ko panāyaṃ bāhiyo, kathañca dārucīriyo ahosi, kathaṃ suppārake paṭṭane paṭivasatīti?
关于此事,次第的因缘是这样的:据说,在十万劫之前,莲华上正自觉者的时代,在汉舍卫城,有一位善男子听闻十力者说法。他看见导师将一位比丘列为速证胜智者中的第一,便想:“这位比丘真了不起,竟被导师如此置于第一之位。啊!愿我未来在某位正自觉者的教法中出家,也能像这位比丘一样,被导师置于那样的最上地位。”他渴望这一地位,并造下与彼相应的功德业。尽其一生修习福德,死后生于天界,在天与人中流转。后来,他在迦叶佛十力者的教法中出家,戒行圆满,终生勤修沙门法,命终后又生天界。在无佛出世的间隙,他住于天界。于今佛出世时,降生于巴希耶国的一户人家。因出生于巴希耶国,故得名“巴希耶”。他成人后过着在家生活,为经商将大量货物装载于船,入海航行,如此往来,有七次都带着随从安然返回故里。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbīkathā – ito kira kappasatasahassamatthake padumuttarasammāsambuddhakāle eko kulaputto haṃsavatīnagare dasabalassa dhammadesanaṃ suṇanto satthāraṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ khippābhiññānaṃ etadagge ṭhapentaṃ disvā ‘‘mahā vatāyaṃ bhikkhu, yo satthārā evaṃ etadagge ṭhapīyati, aho vatāhampi anāgate evarūpassa sammāsambuddhassa sāsane pabbajitvā satthārā edise ṭhāne etadagge ṭhapetabbo bhaveyyaṃ yathāyaṃ bhikkhū’’ti taṃ ṭhānantaraṃ patthetvā tadanurūpaṃ adhikārakammaṃ katvā yāvajīvaṃ puññaṃ katvā saggaparāyaṇo hutvā devamanussesu saṃsaranto kassapadasabalassa sāsane pabbajitvā paripuṇṇasīlo samaṇadhammaṃ karontova jīvitakkhayaṃ patvā devaloke nibbatti. So ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ devaloke vasitvā imasmiṃ buddhuppāde bāhiyaraṭṭhe kulagehe paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi, taṃ bāhiyaraṭṭhe jātattā bāhiyoti sañjāniṃsu. So vayappatto gharāvāsaṃ vasanto vaṇijjatthāya bahūnaṃ bhaṇḍānaṃ nāvaṃ pūretvā samuddaṃ pavisitvā aparāparaṃ sañcaranto satta vāre saddhiṃyeva parisāya attano nagaraṃ upagañchi.
然而在第八次,他想:“我要前往金地。”装载货物后便登船。船入大海,尚未到达目的,即于海中遇难。许多人为鱼鳖所食。巴希耶抓住一块船板,随波漂流,忽急忽缓,终被冲至岸边,如金块般搁浅。他喘息稍定,恢复过来,便站起身。因羞惭而躲入丛林,无物蔽体,便折取软木枝条,以树皮缚之,制成下衣与上衣。另有人说:“他钻穿木板,用树皮串缀,制成下衣与上衣穿上。”总之,因他穿着这种木制衣服,人们便依先前之名,称他为“持木衣者”,同时仍叫他巴希耶。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhame vāre pana ‘‘suvaṇṇabhūmiṃ gamissāmī’’ti āropitabhaṇḍo nāvaṃ abhiruhi. Nāvā mahāsamuddaṃ ajjhogāhetvā icchitadesaṃ apatvāva samuddamajjhe vipannā. Mahājano macchakacchapabhakkho ahosi. Bāhiyo pana ekaṃ nāvāphalakaṃ gahetvā taranto ūmivegena mandamandaṃ khipamāno bhassitvā samudde patitattā jātarūpeneva samuddatīre nipanno. Parissamaṃ vinodetvā assāsamattaṃ labhitvā uṭṭhāya lajjāya gumbantaraṃ pavisitvā acchādanaṃ aññaṃ kiñci apassanto akkanāḷāni chinditvā vākehi paliveṭhetvā nivāsanapāvuraṇāni katvā acchādesi. Keci pana ‘‘dāruphalakāni vijjhitvā vākena āvuṇitvā nivāsanapāvuraṇaṃ katvā acchādesī’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ sabbathāpi dārumayacīradhāritāya ‘‘dārucīriyo’’ti purimavohārena ‘‘bāhiyo’’ti ca paññāyittha.
他手持一钵,依前述方式在苏波罗迦码头乞食。人们见到他,心想:“如果世间确有阿拉汉,应当就是这般模样。不知这位尊者会不会接受我们供养的衣服,还是因少欲而不肯接受?”于是他们试探着从各个方向送上衣服。他心想:“若我不继续保持此相,他们就不会对我生起这样的净信。我何不拒绝这些衣服,仍旧按原来的方式过活?这样我将会获得更多的利养恭敬。”这样想后,他出于欺诳心不接受衣服。众人于是更为净信,心想:“啊,这位尊者真是少欲!”便以更盛大的恭敬来供养他。显示巴利原文
Taṃ ekaṃ kapālaṃ gahetvā vuttaniyāmena suppārakapaṭṭane piṇḍāya carantaṃ disvā manussā cintesuṃ ‘‘sace loke arahanto nāma honti, evaṃvidhehi bhavitabbaṃ, kinnu kho ayaṃ ayyo vatthaṃ diyyamānaṃ gaṇheyya, udāhu appicchatāya na gaṇheyyā’’ti vīmaṃsantā nānādisāhi vatthāni upanesuṃ. So cintesi – ‘‘sacāhaṃ iminā niyāmena nāgamissaṃ, nayime evaṃ mayi pasīdeyyuṃ, yaṃnūnāhaṃ imāni paṭikkhipitvā imināva nīhārena vihareyyaṃ, evaṃ me lābhasakkāro uppajjissatī’’ti. So evaṃ cintetvā kohaññe ṭhatvā vatthāni na paṭiggaṇhi. Manussā ‘‘aho appiccho vatāyaṃ ayyo’’ti bhiyyosomattāya pasannamānasā mahantaṃ sakkārasammānaṃ kariṃsu.
他受用完饭食后,前往不远处的一座天祠。大众随他同去,修葺了那座天祠并供养给他。他想:“这些人仅见我身着木衣便生起净信,以至这般恭敬供养我。我应当在他们面前示现更为卓越的修行。”于是他保持着少欲知足、资具轻少的状态。然而,当众人推想他是“阿拉汉”时,他内心也自以为“我就是阿拉汉”。众人对他的恭敬尊重日益增盛,他也成了获得上妙资具的人。因此经中说:“那时,婆醯迦持木衣者住于苏波罗迦海边,被恭敬、被尊重……”等等。显示巴利原文
Sopi bhattakiccaṃ katvā avidūraṭṭhāne ekaṃ devāyatanaṃ agamāsi. Mahājano tena saddhiṃ eva gantvā taṃ devāyatanaṃ paṭijaggitvā adāsi. So ‘‘ime mayhaṃ cīradhāraṇamatte pasīditvā evaṃvidhaṃ sakkārasammānaṃ karonti, etesaṃ mayā ukkaṭṭhavuttinā bhavituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti sallahukaparikkhāro appicchova hutvā vihāsi. ‘‘Arahā’’ti pana tehi sambhāvīyamāno ‘‘arahā’’ti attānaṃ amaññi, uparūpari cassa sakkāragarukāro abhivaḍḍhi, lābhī ca ahosi uḷārānaṃ paccayānaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bāhiyo dārucīriyo suppārake paṭivasati samuddatīre sakkato garukato’’tiādi.
此处,“被恭敬”(sakkato),是指以尊重与殷勤承事的方式被恭敬。“被尊重”(garukato),是指出于“他具有殊胜功德”的想法,如同对待石伞盖一般,以尊崇的方式被尊重。“被崇敬”(mānito),是指以内心敬仰的方式被崇敬。“被供养”(pūjito),是指以花、香等物供养的方式被供养。“被敬礼”(apacito),是指以极清净的信心,通过让路、让座、奉上物品等方式被敬礼。“他获得衣服……乃至……资具”(lābhī cīvara…pe… parikkhārānaṃ),是指通过获得次第增上、受众人恭敬供养的衣服等四种资具,而成为获得者。显示巴利原文
Tattha sakkatoti sakkaccaṃ ādarena upaṭṭhānavasena sakkato. Garukatoti guṇavisesena yuttoti adhippāyena pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukaraṇavasena garukato. Mānitoti manasā sambhāvanavasena mānito. Pūjitoti pupphagandhādīhi pūjāvasena pūjito. Apacitoti abhippasannacittehi maggadānaāsanābhiharaṇādivasena apacito. Lābhī cīvara…pe… parikkhārānanti paṇītapaṇītānaṃ uparūpari upanīyamānānaṃ cīvarādīnaṃ catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ labhanavasena lābhī.
另有一说:“受恭敬”谓成就应受恭敬之位。“受尊重”谓成就应受尊重之位。“受崇敬”谓内心受到极大推崇、为人喜爱。“受供养”谓以四种资具而受供养。“受敬礼”谓达到受敬礼之境。若有人将四种资具恭敬地备办,呈上殊胜精妙之物供养某人,此人即称为“受恭敬者”。若怀着尊重之心而行供养,则称为“受尊重者”。若以内心喜爱与极深敬意而行,则称为“受崇敬者”。若一切皆以供养的形式而为,则称为“受供养者”。若以合掌、起迎、问讯等行至高恭敬,则称为“受敬礼者”。而持木衣者巴希亚于上述一切皆已成就,故经中说:“持木衣者巴希亚住于苏波罗迦,受恭敬……”云云。于此,虽然他不曾接受衣服,但众人以“尊者,请来,请接受此布料”的话语加以奉献,因此他亦得名为衣物的“获得者”。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – sakkatoti sakkārappatto. Garukatoti garukārappatto. Mānitoti bahumānito manasā piyāyito ca. Pūjitoti catupaccayābhipūjāya pūjito. Apacitoti apacāyanappatto. Yassa hi cattāro paccaye sakkatvā suabhisaṅkhate paṇītapaṇīte denti, so sakkato. Yasmiṃ garubhāvaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā denti, so garukato. Yaṃ manasā piyāyanti bahumaññanti ca, so mānito. Yassa sabbampetaṃ pūjanavasena karonti, so pūjito. Yassa abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānañjalikammādivasena paramanipaccakāraṃ karonti, so apacito. Bāhiyassa pana te sabbametaṃ akaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘bāhiyo dārucīriyo suppārake paṭivasati sakkato’’tiādi. Ettha ca cīvaraṃ so aggaṇhantopi ‘‘ehi, bhante, imaṃ vatthaṃ paṭiggaṇhāhī’’ti upanāmanavasena cīvarassāpi ‘‘lābhī’’tveva vutto.
“独处静坐者”指处于隐蔽静处之人。“独坐者”指独自一人。当他被众人称为“阿拉汉”时,在接下来所述的情境中,他心中生起了寻思,即内心生起了邪思惟。是如何生起的呢?“世间凡是那些阿拉汉或已入阿拉汉道者,我是其中之一。”意思是:在此有情世间,有些人因灭尽烦恼之敌,且值得供养、尊敬等,而成为阿拉汉;有些人则因正在断除烦恼之敌,而进入阿拉汉道;我即是他们中的一位。显示巴利原文
Rahogatassāti rahasi gatassa. Paṭisallīnassāti ekībhūtassa bahūhi manussehi ‘‘arahā’’ti vuccamānassa tassa idāni vuccamānākārena cetaso parivitakko udapādi cittassa micchāsaṅkappo uppajji. Kathaṃ? Ye kho keci loke arahanto vā arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannā, ahaṃ tesaṃ aññataroti. Tassattho – ye imasmiṃ sattaloke kilesārīnaṃ hatattā pūjāsakkārādīnañca arahabhāvena arahanto, ye kilesārīnaṃ hananena arahattamaggaṃ samāpannā, tesu ahaṃ ekoti.
“旧血亲”指于过去世曾为血亲、犹如眷属,并且共修沙门法的诸天神。然而,有人说:“‘旧血亲’是指过去世曾为其母的一位女神”,此说在注疏中已被破斥,故取前一种释义。显示巴利原文
Purāṇasālohitāti purimasmiṃ bhavesālohitā bandhusadisā ekato katasamaṇadhammā devatā. Keci pana ‘‘purāṇasālohitāti purāṇakāle bhavantare sālohitā mātubhūtā ekā devatā’’ti vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ paṭikkhipitvā purimoyevattho gahito.
据说,过去在迦叶佛的教法衰落时,七位比丘见到沙弥等造作恶行,心生悚惧,说道:“在教法还未消失之前,我们应当为自己建立依止!”他们礼拜金塔后进入森林,见到一座山,便说:“那些贪恋生命的人退回去吧,无有贪恋的人登上此山!”他们绑好梯子,待所有人都登上山顶后,踢倒梯子,开始修习沙门法。他们当中,僧团长老仅过了一夜便证得阿拉汉果。他从郁单越取来团食,对这些比丘说:“贤友们,请享用这个团食吧!”他们回答:“尊者,您是凭自己的威德这样做的。我们如果也能像您一样证得殊胜成就,自然会自己取来吃。”因此不愿食用。第二天,第二长老证得不来果。他也同样取来团食,到那里邀请其他人,而他们也同样拒绝。他们之中,证得阿拉汉果的那位般涅槃了,证得不来果的那位则出生于净居天。其余五位比丘尽管努力精进,却未能证得任何殊胜成就。他们在那里命终之后,出生于天界。在整整一位佛陀出世的间隔期间,他们只在天界中流转。到了现在这尊佛出世的时候,他们从天界死后,在各处的良家转生。这五人当中,一位成为宝库王(Pakkusāti r显示巴利原文
Pubbe kira kassapadasabalassa sāsane osakkamāne sāmaṇerādīnaṃ vippakāraṃ disvā satta bhikkhū saṃvegappattā ‘‘yāva sāsanaṃ na antaradhāyati, tāva attano patiṭṭhaṃ karissāmā’’ti suvaṇṇacetiyaṃ vanditvā araññaṃ paviṭṭhā ekaṃ pabbataṃ disvā ‘‘jīvite sālayā nivattantu, nirālayā imaṃ pabbataṃ abhiruhantū’’ti vatvā nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā sabbe taṃ pabbataṃ abhiruyha nisseṇiṃ pātetvā samaṇadhammaṃ kariṃsu. Tesu saṅghatthero ekarattātikkameneva arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. So uttarakuruto piṇḍapātaṃ ānetvā te bhikkhū, ‘‘āvuso, ito piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti āha. Te ‘‘tumhe, bhante, attano ānubhāvena evaṃ akattha, mayampi sace tumhe viya visesaṃ nibbattessāma, sayameva āharitvā bhuñjissāmā’’ti bhuñjituṃ na icchiṃsu. Tato dutiyadivase dutiyatthero anāgāmiphalaṃ pāpuṇi, sopi tatheva piṇḍapātaṃ ādāya tattha gantvā itare nimantesi, tepi tatheva paṭikkhipiṃsu. Tesu arahattappatto parinibbāyi, anāgāmī suddhāvāsabhūmiyaṃ nibbatti. Itare pana pañca janā ghaṭentā vāyamantāpi visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Te asakkontā tattheva parisussitvā devaloke nibbattā. Ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ devesuyeva saṃsaritvā imasmiṃ buddhuppāde devalokato cavitvā tattha tattha kulaghare nibbattiṃsu. Tesu hi eko pakkusāti rājā ahosi, eko kumārakassapo, eko dabbo mallaputto, eko sabhiyo paribbājako, eko bāhiyo dārucīriyo. Tattha yo so anāgāmī brahmaloke nibbatto, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘purāṇasālohitā devatā’’ti. Devaputtopi hi devadhītā viya devo eva devatāti katvā devatāti vuccati ‘‘atha kho aññatarā devatā’’tiādīsu viya. Idha pana brahmā devatāti adhippeto.
那位梵天刚在那里出生,就观察自己的梵天成就。当他回顾自己的来处时,记起了那七个人登山修习沙门法、其中一人般涅槃,以及自己证得不来果并生于此界的情形。他心想:“其余五人现在在哪里呢?”于是进行观察,知道他们出生在欲界天,并在之后适时地观察他们的动态:“他们在做什么呢?”到了这个时期,当他再观察“他们现在在哪里”时,看到巴希耶住在苏帕拉卡港附近,披着树皮衣,以欺诈的方式谋生。他心想:“此人从前曾和我一起绑梯登山,修习沙门法,那时他过着极其刻苦的生活,对生命毫不留恋,连阿拉汉取来的团食都不吃;现在他却怀着受人尊敬的想法,明明不是阿拉汉却宣称自己是阿拉汉,贪求利养、恭敬和名声,到处游走;而且他不知道十力者的出世。好吧,我要令他生起悚惧,让他知道佛陀的出世。”他立刻从梵天界下来,在深夜于苏帕拉卡港显现在树皮衣者面前。巴希耶看见自己的住所出现强烈光明,心想:“这是什么?”于是出门向空中观望,见到站在虚空中的大梵天,便合掌问道:“您是谁?”那位梵天回答:“我是你过去的同伴,那时我证得不来果显示巴利原文
Tassa hi brahmuno tattha nibbattasamanantarameva attano brahmasampattiṃ oloketvā āgataṭṭhānaṃ āvajjentassa sattannaṃ janānaṃ pabbataṃ āruyha samaṇadhammakaraṇaṃ, tatthekassa parinibbutabhāvo, anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā attano ca ettha nibbattabhāvo upaṭṭhāsi. So ‘‘kattha nu kho itare pañca janā’’ti āvajjento kāmāvacaradevaloke tesaṃ nibbattabhāvaṃ ñatvā aparabhāge kālānukālaṃ ‘‘kinnu kho karontī’’ti tesaṃ pavattiṃ oloketiyeva. Imasmiṃ pana kāle ‘‘kahaṃ nu kho’’ti āvajjento bāhiyaṃ suppārakapaṭṭanaṃ upanissāya dārucīradhāriṃ kohaññena jīvikaṃ kappentaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ mayā saddhiṃ pubbe nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā pabbataṃ abhiruhitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karonto atisallekhavuttiyā jīvite anapekkho arahatāpi ābhataṃ piṇḍapātaṃ aparibhuñjitvā idāni sambhāvanādhippāyo anarahāva arahattaṃ paṭijānitvā vicarati lābhasakkārasilokaṃ nikāmayamāno, dasabalassa ca nibbattabhāvaṃ na jānāti, handa naṃ saṃvejetvā buddhuppādaṃ jānāpessāmī’’ti tāvadeva brahmalokato otaritvā rattibhāge suppārakapaṭṭane dārucīriyassa sammukhe pāturahosi. Bāhiyo attano vasanaṭṭhāne uḷāraṃ obhāsaṃ disvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti bahi nikkhamitvā olokento ākāse ṭhitaṃ mahābrahmānaṃ disvā añjaliṃ paggayha ‘‘ke tumhe’’ti pucchi. Athassa so brahmā ‘‘ahaṃ te porāṇakasahāyo tadā anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā brahmaloke nibbatto, tvaṃ pana kiñci visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ asakkonto tadā puthujjanakālakiriyaṃ katvā saṃsaranto idāni titthiyavesadhārī anarahāva samāno ‘arahā aha’nti imaṃ laddhiṃ gahetvā vicarasīti ñatvā āgato, neva kho tvaṃ, bāhiya, arahā, paṭinissajjetaṃ pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ, mā te ahosi dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya, sammāsambuddho loke uppanno. So hi bhagavā arahā, gaccha naṃ payirupāsassū’’ti āha. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho bāhiyassa dārucīriyassa purāṇasālohitā devatā’’tiādi.
这里,「有怜悯者」(anukampikā)指具有爱护士人习性、富于悲悯的人。「愿利益者」(atthakāmā)指希望利益他人、富于慈爱的人。在这里,前一句表明那位天神希望去除巴希耶的痛苦,后一句表明希望给予他利益。「以心」(cetasā)指用她自己的心;这里应当理解为“以心为首”(cetosīsena)是指他心智(cetopariyañāṇa)。「心的遍寻」(cetoparivitakka)指他内心的活动。「了知后」(aññāya)即知道之后。「便那样接近他」(tenupasaṅkamī):就像一个力士能伸展或弯曲手臂那样,那位梵天隐没于梵天界,然后以显现在巴希耶面前的方式来到他身边。「说了此语」(etadavoca):梵天说出了接下来要讲的这段话,也就是“巴希耶,你绝不是阿拉汉……”等等。这就像抓住一个带着赃物的小偷一样,是针对巴希耶心中生起的“世间凡是阿拉汉或入阿拉汉道者……”等邪遍寻而说的。「巴希耶,你绝不是阿拉汉」(neva kho tvaṃ, bāhiya, arahā)这句话,否定了他在当时是无学。「也不入阿拉汉道」(nāpi arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpanno)这句话,则否定了他是还有学的圣者。这两者合起来,显示了他并非圣者。「你甚至没有那条道」(sāpi te paṭipadā natthi)——那条能让你成为阿拉汉或进入阿拉汉道的道路,你根本没有:这甚至否定了他是善凡夫。这里,「道」(paṭipadā)指戒清净等六种清净。因为是通过它来进入圣道,所以称为“道”。「成为」(assā)意思是“你将是”。显示巴利原文
Tattha anukampikāti anuggahasīlā karuṇādhikā. Atthakāmāti hitakāmā mettādhikā. Purimapadena cettha bāhiyassa dukkhāpanayanakāmataṃ tassā devatāya dasseti, pacchimena hitūpasaṃhāraṃ. Cetasāti attano cittena, cetosīsena cettha cetopariyañāṇaṃ gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Cetoparivitakkanti tassa cittappavattiṃ. Aññāyāti jānitvā. Tenupasaṅkamīti seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṃ vā bāhaṃ pasāreyya, pasāritaṃ vā bāhaṃ samiñjeyya, evameva brahmaloke antarahito bāhiyassa purato pātubhavanavasena upasaṅkami. Etadavocāti ‘‘ye kho keci loke arahanto vā’’tiādipavattamicchāparivitakkaṃ bāhiyaṃ sahoḍhaṃ coraṃ gaṇhanto viya ‘‘neva kho tvaṃ, bāhiya, arahā’’tiādikaṃ etaṃ idāni vuccamānavacanaṃ brahmā avoca. Neva kho tvaṃ, bāhiya, arahāti etena tadā bāhiyassa asekkhabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati, nāpi arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannoti etena sekkhabhāvaṃ, ubhayenapissa anariyabhāvameva dīpeti. Sāpi te paṭipadā natthi, yāya tvaṃ arahā vā assa arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannoti iminā panassa kalyāṇaputhujjanabhāvampi paṭikkhipati. Tattha paṭipadāti sīlavisuddhiādayo cha visuddhiyo. Paṭipajjati etāya ariyamaggeti paṭipadā. Assāti bhaveyyāsi.
他的这种“我是阿拉汉”的增上慢,是以什么为缘而生起的呢?有说此者:“他长期少欲、知足、严刻自律、精勤加行,且由彼分断除而灭除了烦恼,因此生起阿拉汉慢。”另有人说:“巴希耶是初禅等四种禅那的证得者,所以他是由镇伏断除令烦恼不现行,遂生起阿拉汉慢。”然而这两种说法都不过是他们各自的见解,因为注疏中说:“他心怀受人尊敬之想,贪求利养、恭敬与名声。”因此,此处应依前文所说之理来领会其义。显示巴利原文
Ayañcassa arahattādhimāno kiṃ nissāya uppannoti? ‘‘Appicchatāya santuṭṭhitāya sallekhatāya dīgharattaṃ katādhikārattā tadaṅgappahānavasena kilesānaṃ vihatattā arahattādhimāno uppanno’’ti keci vadanti. Apare panāhu ‘‘bāhiyo paṭhamādijhānacatukkalābhī, tasmāssa vikkhambhanappahānena kilesānaṃ asamudācārato arahattādhimāno uppajjatī’’ti. Tadubhayampi tesaṃ matimattameva ‘‘sambhāvanādhippāyo lābhasakkārasilokaṃ nikāmayamāno’’ti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatattā. Tasmā vuttanayenevettha attho veditabbo.
这时,巴希耶仰望着立于虚空中说法的大梵天,心中思惟:“啊,这实在太严重了!我自以为是阿拉汉,而此尊却说‘连导向阿拉汉之道你都没有’。这世间究竟有没有阿拉汉呢?”于是他便向大梵天请问。因此经中说:“天神,那么,现今在此世间,谁是阿拉汉,或谁已入于阿拉汉道呢?”显示巴利原文
Atha bāhiyo ākāse ṭhatvā kathentaṃ mahābrahmānaṃ oloketvā cintesi – ‘‘aho bhāriyaṃ vata kammaṃ, yamahaṃ arahāti cintesiṃ, ayañca ‘arahattagāminī paṭipadāpi te natthī’ti vadati, atthi nu kho loke koci arahā’’ti? Atha naṃ pucchi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha ke carahi devate loke arahanto vā arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannā’’ti.
其中,「那时」(athā)是引出问题的语气词。「哪些人现今」(ke carahī)即现今有哪些人。「世间」(loketi)指器世间。这里的意思是:在整个赡部洲洲的器世间中,如今有何处住着阿拉汉,或住着已入于阿拉汉道的人呢?我们前往那里,亲近他们,依止其教导,便能从流转之苦中解脱。「在北方」(Uttaresū)是就苏帕拉卡港的东北方而言的。显示巴利原文
Tattha athāti pucchārambhe nipāto. Ke carahīti ke etarahi. Loketi okāsaloke. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – bhājanalokabhūte sakalasmiṃ jambudīpatale kasmiṃ ṭhāne arahanto vā arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannā etarahi viharanti, yattha mayaṃ te upasaṅkamitvā tesaṃ ovāde ṭhatvā vaṭṭadukkhato muccissāmāti. Uttaresūti suppārakapaṭṭanato pubbuttaradisābhāgaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
「阿拉汉」:因远离故,名为阿拉汉。确实,他以圣道彻底摧毁了烦恼连同习气,因此从一切烦恼中极为远离,已居于极为遥远的彼岸。或因已杀灭敌故,名为阿拉汉。因为世尊以圣道毫无残余地杀灭、斩断了一切烦恼敌。或因已斩断轮辐故,名为阿拉汉。那无始以来持续转起的轮回之轮——以无明、有、渴爱为轮毂,以福行等诸行为轮辐,以老死为轮辋,被诸漏所集成的车轴贯穿,连接于三有之车上。世尊在菩提树下,以精进的双足立于戒地,以信之手握持‘尽诸业智’的利斧,已将所有辐条斩断、击破、摧毁。或因应受供养故,名为阿拉汉。于含括天神的世间之中,世尊是最应受供养者,堪受殊胜的衣等资具,以及种种特别供养。或因无有任何秘密故,名为阿拉汉。因如来已完全断除贪等一切烦恼,不善心所亦不会生起,绝无任何行恶而需隐匿不宣之事,是故名为「阿拉汉」。显示巴利原文
Arahanti ārakattā arahaṃ. Ārakā hi so sabbakilesehi suvidūravidūre ṭhito maggena savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattā. Arīnaṃ vā hatattā arahaṃ. Bhagavatā hi kilesārayo anavasesato ariyamaggena hatā samucchinnāti. Arānaṃ vā hatattā arahaṃ. Yañca avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhi puññādiabhisaṅkhārāraṃ jarāmaraṇanemi āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā tibhavarathe samāyojitaṃ anādikālappavattaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ. Tassānena bodhimaṇḍe vīriyapādehi sīlapathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya saddhāhatthena kammakkhayakarañāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā sabbepi arā hatā vihatā viddhaṃsitāti. Arahatīti vā arahaṃ. Bhagavā hi sadevake loke aggadakkhiṇeyyattā uḷāre cīvarādipaccaye pūjāvisesañca arahati. Rahābhāvato vā arahaṃ. Tathāgato hi sabbaso samucchinnarāgādikilesattā pāpakilesassāpi asambhavato pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvatopi arahanti vuccati.
「正自觉者」:因他正确地、凭自己觉悟了一切法,故名为正自觉者。世尊对于所应证知的法,作为所应证知而证知;对于所应遍知的法,作为所应遍知而遍知;对于所应断除的法,作为所应断除而断除;对于所应证悟的法,作为所应证悟而证悟;对于所应修习的法,作为所应修习而修习。此义于经中如是说:显示巴利原文
Sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho. Bhagavā hi abhiññeyye dhamme abhiññeyyato, pariññeyye dhamme pariññeyyato, pahātabbe dhamme pahātabbato, sacchikātabbe dhamme sacchikātabbato, bhāvetabbe dhamme bhāvetabbato abhisambujjhi. Vuttañhetaṃ –
「应了知的已了知,应修习的已修习;
应断者我皆已断除,因此,婆罗门啊,我是觉者。」(《经集》563;《中部》2.399;《清净道论》1.131)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhiññātaṃ, bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṃ; Pahātabbaṃ pahīnaṃ me, tasmā buddhosmi brāhmaṇā’’ti. (su. ni. 563; ma. ni. 2.399; visuddhi. 1.131);
其次,也可依一切三法、二法等分类方式来解释这一意义,例如:善法带来无过失的乐果,不善法带来有过失的苦果,等等。如此,以不颠倒的自然智,从一切方面觉悟一切法,故称为正自觉者——这是这里简略的解释。详细的解释,则应依《清净道论》中所说的方法来了知。经文中的“为阿罗汉果位”,是指为证得最上果;“说法”,是指随应所化众生的意乐与根性,开示具足初善、中善、后善,包含戒等修行的法,或者开示止与观的法。显示巴利原文
Apica kusale dhamme anavajjasukhavipākato, akusale dhamme sāvajjadukkhavipākatotiādinā sabbattikadukādivasena ayamattho netabbo. Iti aviparītaṃ sayambhuñāṇena sabbākārato sabbadhammānaṃ abhisambuddhattā sammāsambuddhoti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.129-131) āgatanayeneva veditabbo. Arahattāyāti aggaphalappaṭilābhāya. Dhammaṃ desetīti ādikalyāṇādiguṇavisesayuttaṃ sīlādipaṭipadādhammaṃ samathavipassanādhammameva vā veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ upadisati katheti.
“生起悚惧”是指,他心想:“唉!这凡夫的状态实在可悲!由于这种状态,我本不是阿罗汉,却自以为是阿罗汉;正自觉者已出现于世,正在说法,我竟不得知晓。的确,生命难料,死亡难知。”他因天神用上述那番话而生起悚惧,内心受到强烈震撼,因此称为“正感悚惧”。“即刻”是指就在那个时刻。“从苏波罗迦出发”是指,他的耳朵因听到“佛”这一名称,而生起了以佛为所缘的大喜,又为悚惧所驱策,于是从苏波罗迦港向舍卫城出发。“一切处只住一夜”的意思是,他在整个旅途中每经一处都只停留一个晚上,就这样到达。从苏波罗迦港到舍卫城,全程整整一百由旬,他却总共只过了一夜便已抵达。也就是说,他从苏波罗迦出发之后,即在当天到达了舍卫城。显示巴利原文
Saṃvejitoti ‘‘dhiratthu vata, bho, puthujjanabhāvassa, yenāhaṃ anarahāva samāno arahāti amaññiṃ, sammāsambuddhañca loke uppajjitvā dhammaṃ desentaṃ na jāniṃ, dujjānaṃ kho panidaṃ jīvitaṃ, dujjānaṃ maraṇa’’nti saṃvegamāpādito, devatāvacanena yathāvuttenākārena saṃviggamānasoti attho. Tāvadevāti tasmiṃyeva khaṇe. Suppārakā pakkāmīti buddhoti nāmamapi savanena uppannāya buddhārammaṇāya pītiyā saṃvegena ca codiyamānahadayo suppārakapaṭṭanato sāvatthiṃ uddissa pakkanto. Sabbattha ekarattiparivāsenāti sabbasmiṃ magge ekarattivāseneva agamāsi. Suppārakapaṭṭanato hi sāvatthi vīsayojanasate hoti, tañcāyaṃ ettakaṃ addhānaṃ ekarattivāsena agamāsi. Yadā suppārakato nikkhanto, tadaheva sāvatthiṃ sampattoti.
问:那他究竟是如何这般行进的?答:是依天神之威德,也有注释者说“依佛陀之威德”。然而,既然经文说“一切处只住一夜”,而路程又有百由旬,若理解为:他在路途中的村落、城镇与王都等处,随其所至随处过夜,不在那里等到第二天天明,便这般每一处都只住一夜而抵达舍卫城——如此,这个含义便得以彰显。因此,不应把“一切处只住一夜”理解为在每一处各各停留一夜。它的意思是:在这整整百由旬的路上,他总共只度过了一夜。也就是说,他在那整段旅途中只过一个夜晚,于最后一日午前时分便抵至舍卫城。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ panāyaṃ evaṃ agamāsīti? Devatānubhāvena, ‘‘buddhānubhāvenā’’tipi vadanti. ‘‘Sabbattha ekarattiparivāsenā’’ti pana vuttattā maggassa ca vīsayojanasatikattā antarāmagge gāmanigamarājadhānīsu yattha yattha rattiyaṃ vasati, tattha tattha dutiyaṃ aruṇaṃ anuṭṭhāpetvā sabbattha ekarattivāseneva sāvatthiṃ upasaṅkamīti ayamattho dīpito hotīti. Nayidaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sabbasmiṃ vīsayojanasatike magge ekarattivāsenāti imassa atthassa adhippetattā. Ekarattimattaṃ so sakalasmiṃ tasmiṃ magge vasitvā pacchimadivase pubbaṇhasamaye sāvatthiṃ anuppattoti.
世尊也已知道巴希亚前来,心想:“他的根器此时尚未成熟,但在另一个恰当的刹那便会成熟。”于是,世尊为等待巴希亚根器的成熟,就在那时由大比丘僧团围绕,进入舍卫城乞食。巴希亚进入祇园后,见到众多比丘为了消解饭后的身体沉重,正在露天地带经行,便问道:“世尊如今在哪里?”比丘们回答:“世尊已入舍卫城乞食。”接着问:“你从哪里来?”巴希亚说:“我从苏波罗迦港口来。”比丘们说:“你远道而来,请坐,先洗洗脚,涂上油,稍作休息。待世尊归来时,即可谒见大师。”巴希亚说:“诸位尊者!我不知自己的生命会不会有危险。我只在一夜之间,未作停留安坐,走完了百由旬的路程赶来。我要见到大师之后再去休息。”说完,便急切地走入舍卫城,看见了世尊:他正以无与伦比的佛陀威仪,光芒赫奕地站立着。因此,经文中才会这样记载:“那时,有众多比丘在露地经行。这时候,巴希亚·达鲁奇利耶来到那些比丘处……”云云。显示巴利原文
Bhagavāpi bāhiyassa āgamanaṃ ñatvā ‘‘na tāvassa indriyāni paripākaṃ gatāni, khaṇantare pana paripākaṃ gamissantī’’ti tassa indriyānaṃ paripākaṃ āgamayamāno mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivuto tasmiṃ khaṇe sāvatthiṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi. So ca jetavanaṃ pavisitvā bhuttapātarāse kāyālasiyavimocanatthaṃ abbhokāse caṅkamante sambahule bhikkhū passitvā ‘‘kahaṃ nu kho etarahi bhagavā’’ti pucchi. Bhikkhū ‘‘bhagavā sāvatthiṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho’’ti vatvā pucchiṃsu ‘‘tvaṃ pana kuto āgato’’ti? ‘‘Suppārakapaṭṭanato āgatomhī’’ti. ‘‘Dūrato āgatosi, nisīda, tāva pāde dhovitvā makkhetvā thokaṃ vissamāhi, āgatakāle satthāraṃ dakkhasī’’ti. ‘‘Ahaṃ, bhante, attano jīvitantarāyaṃ na jānāmi, ekarattenevamhi katthacipi ciraṃ aṭṭhatvā anisīditvā vīsayojanasatikaṃ maggaṃ āgato, satthāraṃ passitvāva vissamissāmī’’ti vatvā taramānarūpo sāvatthiṃ pavisitvā anopamāya buddhasiriyā virocamānaṃ bhagavantaṃ passi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū abbhokāse caṅkamanti. Atha kho bāhiyo dārucīriyo yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamī’’tiādi.
在此,“何处”(kahaṃ)是问在什么地方。“今”(nu)表疑问,“今”(kho)为语助词,整句的意思是:“如今究竟在什么地方?”“我等欲见”(dassanakāmamhā)即是说我们想要见到。因为我们想要见到彼世尊、想要亲近世尊,这份心情,就如同盲人想得到眼睛,聋人想得到耳朵,哑者想得到善妙的言语,手足残缺者想得到手足,贫穷者想得到财富,行于旷野险途者想得到安稳之地,被疾病所困者想得到健康,大海中破船者想寻得大筏一样——他以这个譬喻来显示此种渴望。而“速疾之貌”(taramānarūpo)就是指那种匆忙急切的样子。显示巴利原文
Tattha kahanti kattha. Nūti saṃsaye, khoti padapūraṇe, kasmiṃ nu kho padeseti attho. Dassanakāmamhāti daṭṭhukāmā amha. Mayañhi taṃ bhagavantaṃ andho viya cakkhuṃ, badhiro viya sotaṃ, mūgo viya kalyāṇavākkaraṇaṃ, hatthapādavikalo viya hatthapāde, daliddo viya dhanasampadaṃ, kantāraddhānappaṭipanno viya khemantabhūmiṃ, rogābhibhūto viya ārogyaṃ, mahāsamudde bhinnanāvo viya mahākullaṃ passituṃ upasaṅkamituñca icchāmāti dasseti. Taramānarūpoti taramānākāro.
「令生净信」:由于具足三十二大人相、八十随形好、一寻光、顶髻庄严,色身殊胜成就,一切处皆善见,对于那些倾心观见色身的人,能在一切方面令其生起净信。「应令净信」:由于具足十力、四无畏、六不共智、十八不共佛法等无量功德蕴集而成的法身成就,对于善于拣择者,它是应令人净信、可令人净信、值得净信的。「寂静根」:眼等五根远离散乱掉举,故五根寂静。「寂静意」:第六意根远离追逐外境的习气,故心意寂静。「证得最上调御寂静」:已证得、获得并安住于那称为出世间慧解脱与心解脱的最上调御与寂静。「调伏」:身行极其清净,没有手足乱动等戏弄,也没有嬉笑等,故身体已得调伏。「守护」:语行极其清净,没有无义语,也没有戏论等,故语言已得守护。「制根」显示巴利原文
Pāsādikanti bāttiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaasītianubyañjanabyāmappabhāketumālālaṅkatāya samantapāsādikāya attano sarīrasobhāsampattiyā rūpakāyadassanabyāvaṭassa janassa sabbabhāgato pasādāvahaṃ. Pasādanīyanti dasabalacatuvesārajjachaasādhāraṇañāṇaaṭṭhārasāveṇika- buddhadhammappabhutiaparimāṇaguṇagaṇasamannāgatāya dhammakāyasampattiyā sarikkhakajanassa pasādanīyaṃ pasīditabbayuttaṃ pasādārahaṃ vā. Santindriyanti cakkhādipañcindriyalolabhāvāpagamanena vūpasantapañcindriyaṃ. Santamānasanti chaṭṭhassa manindriyassa nibbisevanabhāvūpagamanena vūpasantamānasaṃ. Uttamadamathasamathamanuppattanti lokuttarapaññāvimutticetovimuttisaṅkhātaṃ uttamaṃ damathaṃ samathañca anuppatvā adhigantvā ṭhitaṃ. Dantanti suparisuddhakāyasamācāratāya ceva hatthapādakukkuccābhāvato davādiabhāvato ca kāyena dantaṃ. Guttanti suparisuddhavacīsamācāratāya ceva niratthakavācābhāvato davādiabhāvato ca vācāya guttaṃ. Yatindriyanti suparisuddhamanosamācāratāya ariyiddhiyogena abyāvaṭaappaṭisaṅkhānupekkhābhāvato ca manindriyavasena yatindriyaṃ. Nāganti chandādivasena agamanato, pahīnānaṃ rāgādikilesānaṃ punānāgamanato, kassacipi āgussa sabbathāpi akaraṇato, punabbhavassa ca agamanatoti imehi kāraṇehi nāgaṃ. Ettha ca pāsādikanti iminā rūpakāyena bhagavato pamāṇabhūtataṃ dīpeti, pasādanīyanti iminā dhammakāyena, santindriyantiādinā sesehi pamāṇabhūtataṃ dīpeti. Tena catuppamāṇike lokasannivāse anavasesato sattānaṃ bhagavato pamāṇabhāvo pakāsitoti veditabbo.
那时,他看见世尊如此在街道间行走,心中想到:“我长久之后终于得见正自觉者了!”欢喜踊跃,五种喜悦遍满全身,无有间断。因大喜故,他双眼大睁,一动不动。从看见世尊之处起,他便弯下身体,投入并沉没于世尊身光的中央,然后走近世尊,以五体投地之礼敬拜,一边揉捏、亲吻世尊的双足,一边说:“尊者,世尊,请为我说法。”因此,经中说:“他以头面顶礼世尊足后,对世尊这样说:‘尊者,世尊,请为我说法,善逝请为我说法,这能令我长夜获得利益与安乐。’”显示巴利原文
Evaṃbhūtañca bhagavantaṃ antaravīthiyaṃ gacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘cirassaṃ vata me sammāsambuddho diṭṭho’’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭho pañcavaṇṇāya pītiyā nirantaraṃ phuṭasarīro pītivipphāritavivaṭaniccalalocano diṭṭhaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya oṇatasarīro bhagavato sarīrappabhāvemajjhaṃ ajjhogāhetvā tattha nimujjanto bhagavato samīpaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā bhagavato pāde sambāhanto paricumbanto ‘‘desetu me, bhante, bhagavā dhamma’’nti āha. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhagavato pādesirasā nipatitvā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘desetu me, bhante, bhagavā dhammaṃ, desetu sugato dhammaṃ, yaṃ mamassa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’’ti.
于此,「善逝」:因行路美好,因到达美妙之处,因正确地行,因正确地说,故称善逝。因为“行”亦可说为“去”,而世尊的去行是美好、清净、无过失的。那么,这是什么行呢?即是圣道。凭借此行,他无碍地走向安稳的彼岸,也令他人走向那里,故因行路美好而称善逝。又因他到达了美妙之处——不死的涅槃,故因到达美妙之处而称善逝。又因正确地行,通过各阶段圣道所断除的烦恼不再回转,故亦是善逝。对此曾如是说:显示巴利原文
Tattha sugatoti sobhanagamanattā, sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā, sammā gatattā, sammā gadattā sugato. Gamanampi hi gatanti vuccati, tañca bhagavato sobhanaṃ parisuddhaṃ anavajjaṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti? Ariyamaggo. Tena hesa gamanena khemaṃ disaṃ asajjamāno gato, aññepi gametīti sobhanagamanattā sugato. Sundarañcesa ṭhānaṃ amataṃ nibbānaṃ gatoti sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā sugato. Sammā ca gatattā sugato tena tena maggena pahīne kilese puna apaccāgamanato. Vuttañhetaṃ –
由预流道所断的烦恼,不再返回、不再退转、不再回转,故为善逝;由一来道……乃至……由阿拉汉道……不再回转,故为善逝。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sotāpattimaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchatīti sugato. Sakadāgāmi…pe… arahattamaggena…pe… na paccāgacchatīti sugato’’ti (cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 27).
又或,因正确行故——于三阶段皆以正行道而行,故为善逝,意即善修行。从燃灯佛足下开始,直至菩提座,圆满三十波罗蜜,以正行道成就知义行、世间义行与佛陀义行之极致,广大饶益一切众生之利益安乐;不堕常、断、欲乐、自我苦行等极端,以无上觉支修习中道,于圣谛上证得法之无上。如是于一切众生,以无与伦比的正行道而行、而修习,故因正确行而得名善逝。又因其正确说法,于适当之时唯说适当之言,故亦为善逝。此亦曾如是说:显示巴利原文
Atha vā sammā gatattāti tīsupi avatthāsu sammāpaṭipattiyā gatattā, suppaṭipannattāti attho. Dīpaṅkarapādamūlato hi paṭṭhāya yāva mahābodhimaṇḍā tāva samatiṃsapāramipūritāya sammāpaṭipattiyā ñātatthacariyāya lokatthacariyāya buddhatthacariyāya koṭiṃ pāpuṇitvā sabbalokassa hitasukhameva paribrūhanto sassataṃ ucchedaṃ kāmasukhaṃ attakilamathanti ime ante anupagacchantiyā anuttarāya bojjhaṅgabhāvanāsaṅkhātāya majjhimāya paṭipadāya ariyasaccesu tato paraṃ samadhigatadhammādhipateyyo sabbasattesu avisayāya sammāpaṭipattiyā ca gato paṭipannoti evampi sammā gatattā sugato. Sammā cesa gadati yuttaṭṭhāne yuttameva vācaṃ bhāsatīti sugato. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“他是适时而语者、说真实语者、说义语者、说法语者、说律者;于适当之时,说出有依据、有节制、与义相应、含藏利益之语。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Kālavādī , bhūtavādī, atthavādī, dhammavādī, vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā kālena sāpadesaṃ pariyantavatiṃ atthasaṃhita’’nti (dī. ni. 1.9; ma. ni. 3.14).
还有这样的说法:显示巴利原文
Aparampi vuttaṃ –
凡是虚妄不实、没有利益的言语,以及他人不喜爱、不乐闻的话语,如来都不会说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yā sā vācā abhūtā atacchā anatthasaṃhitā, yā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, na taṃ tathāgato vācaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 2.86).
「善逝」:也因如此如实而说,故称善逝。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sammā gadattāpi sugato.
“能令我长夜得利益、得安乐”的意思是:法之开示,能为我在长时中带来禅那、解脱等利益,以及由证得这些而获得的安乐。“婆醯,且非时”的意思是:为你说法之时机尚未到来。有人问:“难道世尊于利益众生之行中,也有非时吗?世尊岂非适时而语者?”回答是:此处所说的‘时’,是指应受教化众生之根器成熟之时。然而,当时婆醯自身的根器是否成熟,实难了知,因此世尊未以此由作答,而是以自己正立于街巷中的情形为缘由,说“我等已入于宅舍”云云。“难知”即是难以明了之意。“命之障难”:他本欲言“那些能作生命障难之法,是发生还是不发生”,但因言语急促,只言“生命之障难”。生命诚然依众多因缘而得延续,而其障难亦有种种形态。过去曾如是说:显示巴利原文
Yaṃ mamassa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyāti yaṃ dhammassa upadisanaṃ cirakālaṃ mama jhānavimokkhādihitāya tadadhigantabbasukhāya ca siyā. Akālo kho tāva bāhiyāti tava dhammadesanāya na tāva kāloti attho. Kiṃ pana bhagavato sattahitapaṭipattiyā akālopi nāma atthi, yato bhagavā kālavādīti? Vuccate – kāloti cettha veneyyānaṃ indriyaparipākakālo adhippeto. Yasmā pana tadā bāhiyassa attano indriyānaṃ paripakkāparipakkabhāvo dubbiññeyyo, tasmā bhagavā taṃ avatvā attano antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhitabhāvamassa kāraṇaṃ apadisanto āha ‘‘antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhamhā’’ti. Dujjānanti dubbiññeyyaṃ. Jīvitantarāyānanti jīvitassa antarāyakaradhammānaṃ vattanaṃ avattanaṃ vāti vattukāmo sambhamavasena ‘‘jīvitantarāyāna’’nti āha. Tathā hi anekapaccayappaṭibaddhavuttijīvitaṃ anekarūpā ca tadantarāyā. Vuttañhi –
今日即当行精勤,谁知明日死将至;
因我等与彼大军之死神,实无任何契约在。”(中部 3.272; 导论 103)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ajjeva kiccamātappaṃ, ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suve; Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā’’ti. (ma. ni. 3.272; netti. 103);
那么,这位婆醯为何会首先提起生命的障碍呢?有人说:“因为他善于了知相,或因为他守护的善巧。”又有人说:“因为他在天神那里听说了生命的障碍。”然而,事实上,由于他是最后有者,并且受到亲依止成就的策励,他才这样说。因为对那些尚未证得阿拉汉果的人而言,生命是不会就此终结的。那么,世尊本欲为他说法,为何却两次拒绝呢?据说世尊这样思惟:“从他见到我的那一刻起,全身就持续被喜悦遍满,喜悦的力量极强,即便听了法,当下也无法通达。然而,等到中舍的状态稳定下来,而且他走了一百由旬的路,身体已经极其疲劳,让这疲劳也平息下来吧。”因此,世尊拒绝了两次。也有人说:“世尊这样做是为了让婆醯对听闻法生起恭敬心。”然而,当第三次被请求时,世尊看见他处于中舍,疲劳已经平息,并且生命的障碍现前,便思惟:“现在是说法的时候了。”于是以“那么,婆醯……”开示法义。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panāyaṃ jīvitantarāyameva tāva purakkharoti? ‘‘Nimittaññutāya adiṭṭhakosallena vā’’ti keci. Apare ‘‘devatāya santike jīvitantarāyassa sutattā’’ti vadanti. Antimabhavikattā pana upanissayasampattiyā codiyamāno evamāha. Na hi tesaṃ appattaarahattānaṃ jīvitakkhayo hoti. Kiṃ pana kāraṇā bhagavā tassa dhammaṃ desetukāmova dvikkhattuṃ paṭikkhipi? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi ‘‘imassa maṃ diṭṭhakālato paṭṭhāya sakalasarīraṃ pītiyā nirantaraṃ phuṭaṃ, atibalavā pītivego, dhammaṃ sutvāpi na tāva sakkhissati paṭivijjhituṃ. Yāva pana majjhattupekkhā saṇṭhāti, tāva tiṭṭhatu, vīsayojanasataṃ maggaṃ āgatattā darathopissa kāye balavā, sopi tāva paṭippassambhatū’’ti. Tasmā dvikkhattuṃ paṭikkhipi. Keci pana ‘‘dhammassavane ādarajananatthaṃ bhagavā evamakāsī’’ti vadanti. Tatiyavāraṃ yācito pana majjhattupekkhaṃ darathappaṭipassaddhiṃ paccupaṭṭhitañcassa jīvitantarāyaṃ disvā ‘‘idāni dhammadesanāya kālo’’ti cintetvā ‘‘tasmā tihā’’tiādinā dhammadesanaṃ ārabhi.
这里的“tasmā”(因此)是指:因为你非常急切地再三请求我,或是由于你说生命的障碍难以了知,并且你的诸根已经成熟,故说“因此”。“tihā”(那么)仅是一个语气词。“te”(你)的意思是“由你”,指的是现在应被教导的内容,他这样加以说明。显示巴利原文
Tattha tasmāti yasmā tvaṃ ussukkajāto hutvā ativiya maṃ yācasi, yasmā vā jīvitantarāyānaṃ dujjānataṃ vadasi, indriyāni ca te paripākaṃ gatāni, tasmā. Tihāti nipātamattaṃ. Teti tayā evanti idāni vattabbākāraṃ vadati.
“应学”(sikkhitabba)是指应当依增上戒学等三学而修习。为了说明如何修学,他接着说:“于所见,只是所见”等。显示巴利原文
Sikkhitabbanti adhisīlasikkhādīnaṃ tissannampi sikkhānaṃ vasena sikkhanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Yathā pana sikkhitabbaṃ, taṃ dassento ‘‘diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissatī’’tiādimāha.
其中,“所见唯是所见”的意思是:在色处上,由眼识看到的,只是单纯所见。正如眼识对于色,只看到色本身,并不看到无常等本质,耳识等其他识也是如此。也就是说:我应当这样修学——仅仅保持在眼门识的“唯是所见”状态。或者另一种解释,“所见”是指由眼识了知的色;“唯”是尺度。“所见唯是所见”便是以此为尺度,意思是心只保持在眼识本身。这说的是:正如眼识对于现前的色,不贪、不嗔、不痴,我也将同样远离贪等,让速行心只保持在眼识那样的状态,把自己的速行心限制在眼识的程度。显示巴利原文
Tattha diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattanti rūpāyatane cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhamattaṃ. Yathā hi cakkhuviññāṇaṃ rūpe rūpamattameva passati, na aniccādisabhāvaṃ, evameva sesaṃ. Cakkhudvārikaviññāṇena hi me diṭṭhamattameva bhavissatīti sikkhitabbanti attho. Atha vā diṭṭhe diṭṭhaṃ nāma cakkhuviññāṇena rūpavijānananti attho. Mattanti pamāṇaṃ. Diṭṭhā mattā etassāti diṭṭhamattaṃ, cakkhuviññāṇamattameva cittaṃ bhavissatīti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā āpāthagate rūpe cakkhuviññāṇaṃ na rajjati, na dussati, na muyhati, evaṃ rāgādivirahena cakkhuviññāṇamattameva me javanaṃ bhavissati, cakkhuviññāṇappamāṇeneva javanaṃ ṭhapessāmīti.
另一种说法,“所见”指由眼识所见到的色;“唯是所见”则指在那个色上生起的领受心、推度心、确定心这三种心。这些心不贪、不嗔、不痴,同样,面对现前的色,我也要让速行心仅按这些心的程度生起,不超出此度量而生起贪著等。应如此理解。对于“闻”和“觉”也应同样类推。“觉”应理解为香、味、触处以及与之对应的识。至于“于识知,唯是识知”:这里的“识知”是指由意门转向识所了知的所缘。“唯是识知”是说心应保持在转向的程度。正如转向心不贪、不嗔、不痴,我不会让贪等生起,而是只将心安住在转向的程度。这便是此处的意思。所以,婆醯,你应当这样修学:通过这样的修行方式,随顺戒定慧三学而学。显示巴利原文
Atha vā diṭṭhaṃ nāma cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhaṃ rūpaṃ, diṭṭhamattaṃ nāma tattheva uppannaṃ sampaṭicchanasantīraṇavoṭṭhabbanasaṅkhātaṃ cittattayaṃ. Yathā taṃ na rajjati, na dussati, na muyhati, evaṃ āpāthagate rūpe teneva sampaṭicchanādippamāṇena javanaṃ uppādessāmi, nāhaṃ taṃ pamāṇaṃ atikkamitvā rajjanādivasena uppajjituṃ dassāmīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Eseva nayo sutamute . Mutanti tadārammaṇaviññāṇehi saddhiṃ gandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Viññāte viññātamattanti ettha pana viññātaṃ nāma manodvārāvajjanena viññātārammaṇaṃ. Tasmiṃ viññāte viññātamattanti āvajjanappamāṇaṃ. Yathā āvajjanaṃ na rajjati, na dussati, na muyhati, evaṃ rajjanādivasena ca uppajjituṃ adatvā āvajjanappamāṇeneva cittaṃ ṭhapessāmīti ayamettha attho. Evañhi te, bāhiya, sikkhitabbanti evaṃ imāya paṭipadāya tayā, bāhiya, tissannaṃ sikkhānaṃ anuvattanavasena sikkhitabbaṃ.
这样,世尊因为婆醯喜好简略,便以“所见”等四个方面,将依六识身和六种所缘而有所差别的观禅境界进行分类,并为他开示了其中所涉及的知遍知与度遍知。如何开示呢?在这里,色处由于具有应当被见的特征,称为“所见”;而眼识以及与它同一门的一切识,由于具有见的作用,这两者都只是随顺因缘而生起的法,其中没有任何主体或造作者。因此,它们以“生起后便灭去”为无常,以“不断受生灭的逼迫”为苦,以“不能自主”为无我。有智慧的人还会在其中生起贪著等吗?这便是此处的意旨。对于“闻”等也是如此。显示巴利原文
Iti bhagavā bāhiyassa saṃkhittarucitāya chahi viññāṇakāyehi saddhiṃ chaḷārammaṇabhedabhinnaṃ vipassanāya visayaṃ diṭṭhādīhi catūhi koṭṭhāsehi vibhajitvā tatthassa ñātatīraṇapariññaṃ dasseti. Kathaṃ? Ettha hi rūpāyatanaṃ passitabbaṭṭhena diṭṭhaṃ nāma, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ pana saddhiṃ taṃdvārikaviññāṇehi dassanaṭṭhena, tadubhayampi yathāpaccayaṃ pavattamānaṃ dhammamattameva, na ettha koci kattā vā kāretā vā, yato taṃ hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccaṃ, udayabbayappaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhaṃ, avasavattanaṭṭhena anattāti kuto tattha paṇḍitassa rajjanādīnaṃ okāsoti? Ayamettha adhippāyo sutādīsupi.
接下来,为了说明已安住于知遍知与度遍知,并进一步证得道果而成就断遍知,世尊宣说了「yato kho te, bāhiya」(婆醯,当你……时)等开示。其中,「yato」(当……时)的意思是「当……的时候」或「由于……」。「te」(你)即是你。「tato」(那时)指那时,或因此。「tena」(以此)指这些所见等,或者指与所见等相关的贪等。这是说:婆醯,当你因某种因缘,依我所说的方法在所见等上修习,不颠倒地觉悟它们的真实自性而达到「唯是所见」等状态时,那时或因这一原因,你将不与于所见等相关的贪等共存,不会成为被贪染污的人、被嗔激怒的人或被痴迷惑的人;由于断除了贪等,你就不再与那些所见等相系缚。那么,婆醯,当你不因贪而染,不因嗔而怒,不因痴而迷的时候,那时或因这一原因,你将不会黏着于那些所见等之中,不会以「这是我的,我就是这个,这是我的自我」这样的渴爱、慢、邪见去执取与安住于所见、所闻、所觉、所识知的对象。至此,断遍知已达顶点,显示了漏尽者的境界。显示巴利原文
Idāni ñātatīraṇapariññāsu patiṭṭhitassa upari saha maggaphalena pahānapariññaṃ dassetuṃ, ‘‘yato kho te, bāhiyā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yatoti yadā, yasmā vā. Teti tava. Tatoti tadā, tasmā vā. Tenāti tena diṭṭhādinā, diṭṭhādipaṭibaddhena rāgādinā vā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bāhiya, tava yasmiṃ kāle yena vā kāraṇena diṭṭhādīsu mayā vuttavidhiṃ paṭipajjantassa aviparītasabhāvāvabodhena diṭṭhādimattaṃ bhavissati, tasmiṃ kāle tena vā kāraṇena diṭṭhādipaṭibaddhena rāgādinā saha na bhavissasi, ratto vā duṭṭho vā mūḷho vā na bhavissasi, pahīnarāgādikattā tena vā diṭṭhādinā saha paṭibaddho na bhavissasīti. Tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tatthāti yadā yasmā vā tvaṃ tena rāgena vā ratto dosena vā duṭṭho mohena vā mūḷho na bhavissasi, tadā tasmā vā tvaṃ tattha diṭṭhādike na bhavissasi, tasmiṃ diṭṭhe vā sutamutaviññāte vā ‘‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi allīno patiṭṭhito na bhavissasi. Ettāvatā pahānapariññaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā khīṇāsavabhūmi dassitā.
「那时,婆醯,你不在此,也不在彼,也不在二者之间。」意思是:当你不再因贪等而与那些所见等相系缚的时候,你便不在这个世间,不在他方世间,也不在这两者之间的任何地方。「这就是苦的尽头」是说:这确实是烦恼之苦与轮回之苦的尽头,是它们的终结。有些人执取「在两者之间」这个词,认为有「中阴身」(antarābhava),这种见解是错误的。因为中阴身在阿毗达摩中已被明确否定。「在之间」(antarena)这个词只是表明另一种解释的可能性,所以正确的意思是:「不在此,不在彼,也没有所谓的两者之间」。显示巴利原文
Tatotvaṃ, bāhiya, nevidha na huraṃ na ubhayamantarenāti yadā tvaṃ, bāhiya, tena rāgādinā tattha diṭṭhādīsu paṭibaddho na bhavissasi, tadā tvaṃ neva idhaloke na paraloke na ubhayatthāpi. Esevanto dukkhassāti kilesadukkhassa ca vaṭṭadukkhassa ca ayameva hi anto ayaṃ parivaṭumabhāvoti ayameva hi ettha attho. Ye pana ‘‘ubhayamantarenā’’ti padaṃ gahetvā antarābhavaṃ nāma icchanti, tesaṃ taṃ micchā. Antarābhavassa hi bhāvo abhidhamme paṭikkhittoyeva. Antarenāti vacanaṃ pana vikappantaradīpanaṃ, tasmā ayamettha attho – ‘‘neva idha na huraṃ, aparo vikappo na ubhaya’’nti.
又,另一种解释是,「在之间」(antarena)这个词是用来表明并没有其他可能性。意思是:「不在此,不在彼,在二者之间也没有任何地方。」有些人不如理地理解「中般涅槃者」与「有再生者」这些经文的含义,便说「中阴身确实存在」。然而,所谓「中般涅槃者」,是指在无烦天等处,于寿命未超过中间点时,便由证得最高道而通过灭尽一切烦恼的般涅槃入于般涅槃,并不是说他是中阴身。这是前一句经文的意思。后一句经文中,那些已经生有而不会再受生有的漏尽者,在前句中被说为「已生有者」;与此相反的,则是寻求再生的人,即「有再生者」,指未断除「有」结缚的有学人和凡夫。或者,在胎生、卵生、湿生、化生四种生育方式中,卵生和胎生有情,在未破卵壳或未出胎胞之前,称为「有再生者」;破卵壳或出胎胞之后,称为「已生有者」。湿生和化生有情,在第一个心识刹那称为「有再生者」,从第二心识刹那起称为「已生有者」。或者,根据他们出生时的威仪,在未换到另一种威仪之前,称为「有再生者」,之后称为「已生有者」。因此,必须驳斥有中阴身的见解。显示巴利原文
Atha vā antarenāti vacanaṃ pana vikappantarābhāvadīpanaṃ. Tassattho – ‘‘neva idha na huraṃ, ubhayamantare pana na aññaṭṭhānaṃ atthī’’ti. Yepi ca ‘‘antarāparinibbāyī sambhavesī’’ti ca imesaṃ suttapadānaṃ atthaṃ ayoniso gahetvā ‘‘atthiyeva antarābhavo’’ti vadanti, tepi yasmā avihādīsu tattha tattha āyuvemajjhaṃ anatikkamitvā antarā aggamaggādhigamena anavasesakilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyatīti antarāparinibbāyī, na antarābhavabhūtoti purimassa suttapadassa attho. Pacchimassa ca ye bhūtā eva, na bhavissanti, te khīṇāsavā purimapade bhūtāti vuttā. Tabbiruddhatāya sambhavamesantīti sambhavesino, appahīnabhavasaṃyojanattā sekhā puthujjanā ca. Catūsu vā yonīsu aṇḍajajalābujasattā yāva aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca na bhindanti, tāva sambhavesī nāma, aṇḍakosato vatthikosato ca bahi nikkhantā bhūtā nāma. Saṃsedajā opapātikā ca paṭhamacittakkhaṇe sambhavesī nāma, dutiyacittakkhaṇato paṭṭhāya bhūtā nāma. Yena vā iriyāpathena jāyanti, yāva tato aññaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tāva sambhavesino, tato paraṃ bhūtāti attho. Tasmā natthīti paṭikkhipitabbā. Sati hi ujuke pāḷianugate atthe kiṃ aniddhāritasāmatthiyena antarābhavena parikappitena payojananti.
然而,有些人提出了如下的论证:「就像在依相续而转起的诸法中,可见其无间断地在他处显现,例如在稻种等无识相续中那样;同样地,在有识相续中也应当无间断地在他处显现。这个道理唯有在承认中有(antarābhava)的前提下才成立,否则便不成立。」如果按照这个道理,那么对于具神通、心得自在者,当其决意令身随心而行时,能于一刹那从梵天界来此,或从此前往梵天界,这个现象也应当能解释得通。假如在一切情况下都只承许法在无间隔的空间中转起,即便说「神通者的神通境界是不可思议的」,那么由于经中说「业异熟是不可思议的」,这里也是同样的道理。因此,那只不过是他们的自见罢了。诸法的自性本来不可思议,它们有的依缘而在被空间隔开的地方显现,有的则在无间隔的地方显现。正如凭借口中发出的声音等缘,在他处——如镜面、山壁等处,可见映像、回声等依缘而生的事物生起。因此,并非所有事物都能在所有地方以类推证。这是此处的简要说明。至于以映像为喻的详细论证等,关于中有论议的探讨,应当从《论事》中了解。显示巴利原文
Ye pana ‘‘santānavasena pavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ avicchedena desantaresu pātubhāvo diṭṭho, yathā taṃ vīhiādiaviññāṇakasantāne, evaṃ saviññāṇakasantānepi avicchedena desantaresu pātubhāvena bhavitabbaṃ. Ayañca nayo sati antarābhave yujjati, na aññathā’’ti yuttiṃ vadanti. Tena hi iddhimato cetovasippattassa cittānugatikaṃ kāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahantassa khaṇena brahmalokato idhūpasaṅkamane ito vā brahmalokagamane yutti vattabbā. Yadi sabbattheva avicchinnadese dhammānaṃ pavatti icchitā, yadipi siyā iddhimantānaṃ iddhivisayo acinteyyoti. Taṃ idhāpi samānaṃ ‘‘kammavipāko acinteyyo’’ti vacanato. Tasmā taṃ tesaṃ matimattameva. Acinteyyasabhāvā hi sabhāvadhammā, te katthaci paccayavasena vicchinnadese pātubhavanti, katthaci avicchinnadese. Tathā hi mukhaghosādīhi paccayehi aññasmiṃ dese ādāsapabbatappadesādike paṭibimbapaṭighosādikaṃ paccayuppannaṃ nibbattamānaṃ dissati, tasmā na sabbaṃ sabbattha upanetabbanti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana paṭibimbassa udāharaṇabhāvasādhanādiko antarābhavakathāvicāro kathāvatthupakaraṇassa (kathā. 505; kathā. aṭṭha. 505) ṭīkāyaṃ gahetabbo.
还有一些人说:「idha(此处)是指欲有,huraṃ(彼处)是指无色有,ubhayamantarena(两者之间)则是指色有。」另有人说:「idha是指内六处,huraṃ是指外六处,ubhayamantarena是指心与心所法。」也有人这么说:「或者,idha是指缘法,huraṃ是指缘所生法,ubhayamantarena是指施设法。」这些说法在注疏中都未出现。首先,以「于所见唯是所见」等,依所见等将三界诸法摄为四类。在此,通过遮止对净、乐、常、我的执取,开示了不净、苦、无常、无我的随观。因此,连同下分的清净,便以简略的方式宣说了观。而「那时,婆醯,你不在彼中」这一句,因为意在令贪等烦恼永断,所以是指道。「那时,婆醯,你不在那之中」是指果。「不在此……不在两者之间」等,则宣说了无余涅槃界。应当如此理解。因此经中说:「那时,婆醯……心从诸漏中解脱。」显示巴利原文
Apare pana ‘‘idhāti kāmabhavo, huranti arūpabhavo, ubhayamantarenāti rūpabhavo vutto’’ti. Aññe ‘‘idhāti ajjhattikāyatanāni, huranti bāhirāyatanāni, ubhayamantarenāti cittacetasikā’’ti. ‘‘Idhāti vā paccayadhammā, huranti paccayuppannadhammā, ubhayamantarenāti paṇṇattidhammā vuttā’’ti vadanti. Taṃ sabbaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu natthi. Evaṃ tāva ‘‘diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissatī’’tiādinā diṭṭhādivasena catudhā tebhūmakadhammā saṅgahetabbā. Tattha subhasukhaniccaattaggāhaparivajjanamukhena asubhadukkhāniccānattānupassanā dassitāti heṭṭhimāhi visuddhīhi saddhiṃ saṅkhepeneva vipassanā kathitā. ‘‘Tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tenā’’ti iminā rāgādīnaṃ samucchedassa adhippetattā maggo. ‘‘Tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tatthā’’ti iminā phalaṃ. ‘‘Nevidhā’’tiādinā anupādisesā parinibbānadhātu kathitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho bāhiyassa…pe… āsavehi cittaṃ vimuccī’’ti.
「以这略说的法教」中,「当即」的意思是就在那个刹那,而非过了一段时间。「不执取」即不抓取。「从诸漏」:由于它们流向有顶、不成为圣者种姓,具有流转与长久伴随的意义,且如同酒等令人放逸,故得名为「漏」,即指欲贪等烦恼。「解脱」指以断除的解脱和止息的解脱而解脱,也就是舍离。因为他听闻导师说法时,便清净了戒,依于所得的心定而建立观,由于速疾通晓,当即灭尽一切诸漏,连同无碍解而证得阿拉汉果。他截断轮回之流,穷尽轮回边际,成为最后身者;当十九种省察生起时,受到法性的鞭策,他向世尊请求出家。世尊问:「你的钵与衣齐全了吗?」他答:「不齐全。」于是导师说:「那你就去把钵和衣找齐吧。」然后便离去了。因此说:「那时,世尊……便离去了。」显示巴利原文
Imāya saṃkhittapadāya desanāya tāvadevāti tasmiṃyeva khaṇe, na kālantare. Anupādāyāti aggahetvā. Āsavehīti ābhavaggaṃ āgotrabhuṃ savanato pavattanato cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena madirādiāsavasadisatāya ca ‘‘āsavā’’ti laddhanāmehi kāmarāgādīhi. Vimuccīti samucchedavimuttiyā paṭippassaddhivimuttiyā ca vimucci nissajji. So hi satthu dhammaṃ suṇanto eva sīlāni sodhetvā yathāladdhaṃ cittasamādhiṃ nissāya vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā khippābhiññatāya tāvadeva sabbāsave khepetvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. So saṃsārasotaṃ chinditvā katavaṭṭapariyanto antimadehadharo hutvā ekūnavīsatiyā paccavekkhaṇāsu pavattāsu dhammatāya codiyamāno bhagavantaṃ pabbajjaṃ yāci. ‘‘Paripuṇṇaṃ te pattacīvara’’nti puṭṭho ‘‘na paripuṇṇa’’nti āha. Atha naṃ satthā ‘‘tena hi pattacīvaraṃ pariyesā’’ti vatvā pakkāmi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho bhagavā…pe… pakkāmī’’ti.
据说他在迦叶正自觉者的教法中,行持沙门法长达两万年,却从未以钵或衣帮助过任何一位比丘,心想:“所谓比丘,自己得到资具后,随力布施时,应当自己受用。”因此,他没有获得善来比丘具足戒的因缘。又有人说:“在无佛出世的时代,他曾是盗贼,背弓带箭在森林中抢劫。一次,他见到一位独觉佛,贪图对方的钵与衣,便用箭射杀彼并夺走钵衣。因此,他不会有神通化现的钵与衣生起。大师知道这事,便没有以善来比丘的方式度他出家。”当他正四处寻找钵和衣时,一头母牛急速冲来,将他撞倒而命终。正因为如此,才说:“那时,世尊离去不久,一头有幼犊的母牛冲撞了树皮衣的巴希耶,夺走了他的生命。”显示巴利原文
So kira kassapadasabalassa sāsane vīsavassasahassāni samaṇadhammaṃ karonto ‘‘bhikkhunā nāma attanā paccaye labhitvā yathādānaṃ karontena attanāva paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti ekassa bhikkhussapi pattena vā cīvarena vā saṅgahaṃ nākāsi, tenassa ehibhikkhuupasampadāya upanissayo nāhosi. Keci panāhu – ‘‘so kira buddhasuññe loke coro hutvā dhanukalāpaṃ sannayhitvā araññe corikaṃ karonto ekaṃ paccekabuddhaṃ disvā pattacīvaralobhena taṃ usunā vijjhitvā pattacīvaraṃ gaṇhi, tenassa iddhimayapattacīvaraṃ na uppajjissatīti, satthā taṃ ñatvā ehibhikkhubhāvena pabbajjaṃ na adāsī’’ti. Tampi pattacīvarapariyesanaṃ caramānaṃ ekā dhenu vegena āpatantī paharitvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho acirapakkantassa bhagavato bāhiyaṃ dārucīriyaṃ gāvī taruṇavacchā adhipatitvā jīvitā voropesī’’ti.
其中,“离去不久”指世尊离去后不久。“有幼犊的母牛”指一位化作有幼犊母牛模样的女夜叉。“冲撞”即压倒、践踏。“夺去了他的生命”指因为过去生曾被他杀害,所以一见面便生起怨恨,用角顶撞而夺命。显示巴利原文
Tattha acirapakkantassāti na ciraṃ pakkantassa bhagavato. Gāvī taruṇavacchāti ekā yakkhinī taruṇavacchadhenurūpā. Adhipatitvāti abhibhavitvā madditvā. Jīvitā voropesīti purimasmiṃ attabhāve laddhāghātatāya diṭṭhamatteneva vericittaṃ uppādetvā siṅgena paharitvā jīvitā voropesi.
大师入城乞食,用完斋饭后,与众多比丘一同出城时,看见巴希耶的尸体被弃置在垃圾堆上,便对比丘们说:“比丘们,你们到一户人家门前,取一张床来,将这具尸体运到城外火化,再为他建造一座塔。”比丘们依教奉行。之后他们回到寺院,走到大师面前,禀告所做之事,并请问此人死后的去向。世尊于是告诉他们,他已般涅槃。比丘们问:“尊者曾说过‘树皮衣的巴希耶证得阿拉汉果’,他是什么时候证得的?”答:“在我为他说法之时。”又问:“您为他说法是什么时候?”答:“就在今日我行乞食的途中,停下为他而说。”比丘们说:“尊者途中停下为他说法,时间极短,他如何能以如此少许之法便证得殊胜?”于是世尊开示道:“比丘们,你们为何以‘少’或‘多’来衡量我所说的法?纵有上千首偈颂,若堆砌无义之言,也非善好;即使仅有一句偈颂,若与义理相应,那才是善好的。”显示巴利原文
Satthā piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakicco sambahulehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ nagarato nikkhamanto bāhiyassa sarīraṃ saṅkāraṭṭhāne patitaṃ disvā bhikkhū āṇāpesi – ‘‘bhikkhave, ekasmiṃ gharadvāre ṭhatvā mañcakaṃ āharāpetvā idaṃ sarīraṃ nagarato nīharitvā jhāpetvā thūpaṃ karothā’’ti, bhikkhū tathā akaṃsu. Katvā ca pana vihāraṃ gantvā satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā attanā katakiccaṃ ārocetvā tassa abhisamparāyaṃ pucchiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ bhagavā tassa parinibbutabhāvaṃ ācikkhi. Bhikkhū ‘‘tumhe, bhante, ‘bāhiyo dārucīriyo arahattaṃ patto’ti vadatha, kadā so arahattaṃ patto’’ti pucchiṃsu. ‘‘Mama dhammaṃ sutakāle’’ti ca vutte ‘‘kadā panassa tumhehi dhammo kathito’’ti? ‘‘Piṇḍāya carantena ajjeva antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhatvā’’ti. ‘‘Appamattako so, bhante, tumhehi antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhatvā kathitadhammo, kathaṃ so tāvatakena visesaṃ nibbattesī’’ti? ‘‘Kiṃ, bhikkhave, mama dhammaṃ ‘appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā’ti pamiṇatha, anekāni gāthāsahassānipi anatthasaṃhitāni na seyyo, atthanissitaṃ pana ekampi gāthāpadaṃ seyyo’’ti dassento –
纵有千首偈颂,若尽是些无义之言,
一句有意义的偈颂更为殊胜,听闻之后便得寂静。──《法句经》101
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sahassamapi ce gāthā, anatthapadasañhitā; Ekaṃ gāthāpadaṃ seyyo, yaṃ sutvā upasammatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 101) –
说完《法句经》中的这首偈颂后,为了显示他不仅因般涅槃而值得供养,也因是‘我的声闻比丘中速疾通智第一’而应受供养,世尊便说:‘比丘们,我的声闻比丘中,速疾通智第一者,即是这位身着树皮衣的巴希耶。’并将这位尊者置于第一之位。因此,经中说:‘那时,世尊在舍卫城乞食后……比丘们,树皮衣的巴希耶已般涅槃。’显示巴利原文
Dhammapade imaṃ gāthaṃ vatvā ‘‘na kevalaṃ so parinibbānamattena, atha kho mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ khippābhiññānaṃ aggabhāvenapi pūjāraho’’ti dassento ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ khippābhiññānaṃ, yadidaṃ bāhiyo dārucīriyo’’ti (a. ni. 1.216) taṃ āyasmantaṃ etadagge ṭhapesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā…pe… parinibbuto, bhikkhave, bāhiyo dārucīriyo’’ti.
其中,“午后”指用过斋饭后。“从乞食归返”指寻求团食后返回。这两句合在一起,表示已经用过斋了。“运出”指抬到城外。“焚烧”指火化。“为他建塔”指收取巴希耶的舍利,建造一座塔。并说明这样做的原因:“诸比丘,你们的一位同梵行者已经命终。”意思是:你们所修的是最上的梵行——即增上戒等行道之法,他也同样修习了这种梵行,所以称为“同梵行者”;由于他已到达临终,所以说“命终”;因此,你们应当用床将他运出,火化后为他建塔。显示巴利原文
Tattha pacchābhattanti bhattakiccato pacchā. Piṇḍapātapaṭikkantoti piṇḍapātapariyesanato paṭinivatto. Padadvayenāpi katabhattakiccoti vuttaṃ hoti. Nīharitvāti nagarato bahi netvā. Jhāpethāti dahatha. Thūpañcassa karothāti assa bāhiyassa sarīradhātuyo gahetvā cetiyañca karotha . Tattha kāraṇamāha – ‘‘sabrahmacārī vo, bhikkhave, kālakato’’ti. Tassattho – yaṃ tumhe seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmaṃ adhisīlādipaṭipattidhammaṃ sandiṭṭhaṃ caratha, taṃ so tumhehi samānaṃ brahmaṃ acarīti sabrahmacārī maraṇakālassa pattiyāva kālakato, tasmā taṃ mañcakena nīharitvā jhāpetha, thūpañcassa karothāti.
“他趣何往?”:在五趣之中,他的“趣”——即结生、成为生命存有的方式——究竟是哪一趣?“趣”指果报。意为:他是圣者还是凡夫?“死后”指死后的再生,或者有的灭尽。虽然世尊吩咐为他建塔一事,在意义上已清楚显示他已般涅槃,但有些比丘仅凭这些还不了解,于是问道:“他趣何往?”又或者,他们是想让此事更加显明,所以才这样请问世尊。显示巴利原文
Tassa kā gatīti pañcasu gatīsu tassa katamā gati upapatti bhavabhūtā, gatīti nipphatti, ariyo puthujjano vāti kā niṭṭhāti attho. Abhisamparāyoti pecca bhavuppatti bhavanirodho vā. Kiñcāpi tassa thūpakaraṇāṇattiyāva parinibbutabhāvo atthato pakāsito hoti, ye pana bhikkhū tattakena na jāniṃsu, te ‘‘tassa kā gatī’’ti pucchiṃsu. Pākaṭataraṃ vā kārāpetukāmā tathā bhagavantaṃ pucchiṃsu.
「贤者」:由于证得最上道智,以“贤”从此岸渡至彼岸,故称贤者。「遵行」:即依教修行。「法」:指出世间法。「随法」:指戒清净等行道法。又或者,「法」指涅槃法,「随法」指圣道与圣果法。「他并不以法之事烦扰我」:因为他依教奉行,所以并未因说法之事而烦扰我。若有人于师长前听法或领受业处后,却不依教修行,此人便名为烦扰师长。关于此,有云:“对心怀害想、于人间宣说殊胜法者,我不对婆罗门说。”又或「并未以法之事烦扰我」:意为并非以此法事而烦扰我。这是说,这能出离轮回之苦、属于我的教法,因他能善巧修行,故未被烦扰。不善巧修行者会破坏教法,即等于打击师长的法身。而这位巴希耶却将正行修到极致,依无余涅槃界而般涅槃。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,巴希耶·达如支利耶已般涅槃。”显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitoti aggamaggapaññāya adhigatattā paṇḍena ito gato pavattoti paṇḍito. Paccapādīti paṭipajji. Dhammassāti lokuttaradhammassa. Anudhammanti sīlavisuddhiādipaṭipadādhammaṃ. Atha vā dhammassāti nibbānadhammassa. Anudhammanti ariyamaggaphaladhammaṃ. Na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇanti dhammadesanāhetu na ca maṃ vihesesi yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipannattā. Yo hi satthu santike dhammaṃ sutvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā gahetvā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ na paṭipajjati, so satthāraṃ viheseti nāma. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘vihiṃsasaññī paguṇaṃ na bhāsiṃ, dhammaṃ paṇītaṃ manujesu brahme’’ti (mahāva. 9; ma. ni. 1.283; 2.339). Atha vā na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇanti na ca imaṃ dhammādhikaraṇaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – vaṭṭadukkhato niyyānahetubhūtaṃ imaṃ mama sāsanadhammaṃ suppaṭipannattā na viheseti. Duppaṭipanno hi sāsanaṃ bhindanto satthu dhammasarīre pahāraṃ deti nāma. Ayaṃ pana sammāpaṭipattiṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘parinibbuto, bhikkhave, bāhiyo dārucīriyo’’ti.
「了知此义」:即从一切方面了知这位婆醯长老依无余涅槃界而般涅槃的事实,并且了知那些同样般涅槃的漏尽者,其趣向难以为常人所了知。如此遍知之后,世尊宣说了这首感兴语——这首阐明无依止般涅槃之威力的感兴语。显示巴利原文
Etamatthaṃ viditvāti etaṃ therassa bāhiyassa anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutabhāvaṃ, tathā parinibbutānañca khīṇāsavānaṃ gatiyā pacurajanehi dubbiññeyyabhāvaṃ sabbākārato viditvā. Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ appatiṭṭhitaparinibbānānubhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
「在那里」:在那涅槃之中,水不能住,地不能住,火不能住,风不能住,不得安住。何以故?因为涅槃是无为之性。在那里,连丝毫的有为法都不可能存在。「白净」:指那些因色泽洁白而得名「白净」的、深隐的星宿与星辰。「不发光」:即不闪耀。「太阳不显现」:即便那在三大洲能于一刹那遍放光明的太阳,在此涅槃中也不能以其光芒照耀。「月天子不照」:纵使那具光辉、散发可爱清凉光线的月天子,在此涅槃中由于根本不存在,也绝不可能借其月光显耀。若以为那里没有日月等,或许会像世界中间那样恒常黑暗——为消除这种疑虑,故说「那里无黑暗」。因为既然没有色,也就不会有所谓的黑暗了。显示巴利原文
Tattha yatthāti yasmiṃ nibbāne āpo ca na gādhati, pathavī ca tejo ca vāyo ca na gādhati, na patiṭṭhāti. Kasmā? Nibbānassa asaṅkhatasabhāvattā. Na hi tattha saṅkhatadhammānaṃ lesopi sambhavati. Sukkāti sukkavaṇṇatāya sukkāti laddhanāmā gahanakkhattatārakā. Na jotantīti na bhāsanti. Ādicco nappakāsatīti tīsu dīpesu ekasmiṃ khaṇe ālokapharaṇasamattho ādiccopi ābhāvasena na dibbati. Na tattha candimā bhātīti satipi bhāsurabhāve kantasītalakiraṇo candopi tasmiṃ nibbāne abhāvato eva attano juṇhāvibhāsanena na virocati. Yadi tattha candimasūriyādayo natthi, lokantaro viya niccandhakārameva taṃ bhaveyyāti āsaṅkaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tamo tattha na vijjatī’’ti. Sati hi rūpābhāve tamo nāma na siyā.
「当他亲自证知时,牟尼以牟那而成为婆罗门」:由于了知四谛而获得「牟那」之称的道智,并且具足身牟那等,因此称为「牟尼」的那位圣弟子婆罗门,是在何时呢?就在他以这称为牟那的证悟之智,于最上道的刹那,自己亲自——舍弃传闻等而自作证——证知、通达了涅槃的时候。另有「avedī」的读法,意为了知。「然后,他从色、无色、苦乐中解脱」:此后,即了知涅槃之后。从「色」解脱:色指色法,此处涵盖了五蕴有和一种蕴有。从「无色」解脱:无色指无色法,此处涵盖了不与色混杂的无色有,这也称为四蕴有。从「苦乐」解脱:苦乐指在一切处生起的苦乐,即从轮回中解脱。或者,从「色」指从色界结生中解脱;从「无色」指从无色界结生中解脱;从「苦乐」指从欲界结生中解脱,因为欲有是苦乐混杂的。如此,他从整个轮回彻底解脱。世尊也以这两首偈颂来显示:「我的法子婆醯,有如此的涅槃趣向。」显示巴利原文
Yadā ca attanā vedi, muni monena brāhmaṇoti catusaccamunanato monanti laddhanāmena maggañāṇena kāyamoneyyādīhi ca samannāgatattā ‘‘munī’’ti laddhanāmo ariyasāvakabrāhmaṇo teneva monasaṅkhātena paṭivedhañāṇena yadā yasmiṃ kāle aggamaggakkhaṇe attanā sayameva anussavādike pahāya attapaccakkhaṃ katvā nibbānaṃ vedi paṭivijjhi. ‘‘Avedī’’tipi pāṭho, aññāsīti attho. Atha rūpā arūpā ca, sukhadukkhā pamuccatīti athāti tassa nibbānassa jānanato pacchā. Rūpāti rūpadhammā, tena pañcavokārabhavo ekavokārabhavo ca gahito hoti. Arūpāti arūpadhammā, tena rūpenāmissīkato arūpabhavo gahito hoti. So ‘‘catuvokārabhavo’’tipi vuccati. Sukhadukkhāti sabbattha uppajjanakasukhadukkhatopi vaṭṭato. Atha vā rūpāti rūpalokapaṭisandhito. Arūpāti arūpalokapaṭisandhito. Sukhadukkhāti kāmāvacarapaṭisandhito. Kāmabhavo hi byāmissasukhadukkho. Evametasmā sakalatopi vaṭṭato accantameva muccatīti gāthādvayenapi bhagavā ‘‘mayhaṃ puttassa bāhiyassa evarūpā nibbānagatī’’ti dasseti.